Students'  Series 


EXERCISES    IN 


uATIN  CQMPOSITION 


3  A  N 


Joru:    3?/ett 


.^ 


Cjjf  Stuirnts'  Srrirs  of  latin  Classics 


EXERCISEvS 


IN 


Latii^  Peose  Composition 


FOR   SCHOOLS 


BY 

M.  GRANT   DANIELL,  A.M. 

Principal  op  Cbaumct-Hall  ScnooL,  Boston 


Part  I. 

BASED    UPON    CAESAR'S    GALLIC   WAR,    BOOKS    l.-IV. 


XEACH,   SHEWELL,   AND   SANBORN. 
BOSTON.     NEW   YORK.     ClUCAGO. 


»  "  •  •  •     •  • 


COPTRIQHT,  1889, 

Bt  U.  grant  DANIELL. 

EDUCATION  DEPT. 


J 


It- 


^ 


HLtiy 


/ 


# 


Xoriuoot)  ^rrss : 

J.  S.  Gushing  &  Co.  —  Berwick  &  Smith. 

Boston;  Mass.,  U.S.A. 


9  CiT? 


-^ 


^D-P 


PREFACE. 


This  book  is  prepared  in  the  belief  that  Latin  compo- 
sition can  best  be  taught  in  connection  with  the  reading 
of  the  Latin  authors,  and  its  object  is  to  furnish  pupils 
with  sufficient  material  for  practice  in  Latin  composition 
while  they  are  reading  Caesar  and  Cicero. 

The  method  contemplates  the  study  and  recitation  of 
the  oral  exercises  as  a  part  of  each  day's  lesson,  either 
in  the  advance  or  the  daily  review  (preferably  the  latter), 
and  of  the  written  f  xercises  at  stated  periods  correspond- 
ing to  the  progi-ess  of  the  class  in  the  Latin  text,  —  the 
imi)ortant  thing  being  to  have  both  oral  and  written 
work  done  while  the  passages  on  which  they  are  based 
are  fresh  in  the  mind.  The  text  thus  furnishes  the  vo- 
cabulary, and  the  models  for  all  the  idioms,  the  princi- 
ples of  syntax,  and  the  order  and  arrangement  of  words. 

I  have  practised  substantially  this  method  for  many 
years,  and  feel  warranted  in  asserting  that  it  is  correct 
in  principle,  easily  applied  in  practice,  and  productive  of 
excellent  results.  It  economizes  time  and  labor  by  ac- 
complishing through  one  instrumentality  —  the  Latin 
author  —  these  two  objects:  first  and  most  important, 
the  better  comprehension  and  appreciation  of  the  Latin 
text ;  and  second,  facility  in  writing  Latin. 

Attempt  has  been  made  to  fumish  practice  in  all  the 


IV  PREFACE. 

common  rules  of  syntax  as  thoroughly  as  if  the  exercises 
consisted  of  isolated  sentences  arranged  according  to 
grammatical  rules.  Some  idea  of  how  successfully  this 
has  been  done  may  be  gained  by  consulting  the  Gram- 
matical Index,  which  it  is  hoped  will  prove  helpful  to 
teacher  and  scholar  for  ready  reference  to  the  grammars, 
and  for  a  review  by  topics,  when  that  is  desired. 

The  present  admission  requirement  in  Latin  composi- 
tion of  many  of  the  colleges  —  the  translation  into  Latin 
of  a  passage  of  connected  English  based  upon  some  por- 
tion of  the  authors  read — encourages,  and  even  demands, 
this  kind  of  work  in  preparatory  instruction. 

Many  teachers  prefer  to  begin  Caesar's  Gallic  War  with 
the  second  book  rather  than  the  first,  but  there  is  no 
uniformity  of  practice  in  this  respect.  For  this  reason 
the  notes  on  the  first  two  books  contain  many  repetitions 
that  would  otherwise  be  unnecessary.  I  strongly  recom- 
mend beginning  with  Book  IT. 

To  the  many  kind  friends  who  have  encouraged  me 
to  undertake  this  work,  I  return  my  warmest  thanks. 
I  wish  also  to  acknowledge  my  indebtedness  to  Prof. 
T.  B.  Lindsay  of  Boston  University,  to  John  Tetlow, 
A.  M.,  head  master  of  the  Boston  Girls'  High  and  Latin 
Schools,  who  read  parts  of  my  manuscript  and  made  val- 
uable criticisms  thereon ;  and  particularly  to  Prof.  E.  M. 
Pease  of  Bowdoin  College,  Editor-in-chief  of  The  Stu- 
dents' Series  of  Latin  Classics,  who  has  read  both  the 
manuscript  and  the  proof-sheets,  and  made  many  wise 
and  useful  suggestions. 

M.  GRANT  DANIELL. 

August,  1889. 


CONTENTS. 


KXKKCISES 

FOR 

Oral  Translation, 

Book  I.    .        .        . 

EXKUCISES 

FOR 

Written  Translation, 

Book  I. 

EXKKCISES 

FOR 

Oral  Translation, 

Book  II.  . 

EXKRaSES 

FOR 

Written  Translation, 

Book  II.   . 

Exercises 

FOR 

Oral  Translation, 

Book  III. 

Exercises 

FOR 

Written  Translation, 

Book  III. . 

Exercises 

FOR 

Oral  Translation, 

Book  IV. 

Ekercises 

FOR 

Written  Translation, 

Book  IV.  . 

Notes 

•       • 

, 

. 

Grammatical  Index 

. 

21 
31 
42 
48 
56 
61 
70 

77 
95 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/exercisesinlatinOOmgrarich 


BOOK  I. 
FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION. 

CHAPTER   I. 

1.  1.  There^  are  three  rivers  in  Gaul.  2.  The  Belgae 
inhabited  one  part  of  Gaul.  3.  In*  our  language  they 
were  called  Gauls.^  4.  We  call  them  Gauls.*  5.  They 
differ  *from  each  other.     6.  We  differ  from  each  other. 

7.  Of  all  the  Gauls  the  Belgge  are  nearest  to  the  Rhine. 

8.  The  Belgae  are  furthest  off  from  the  province.  9.  •Very 
seldom.  10.  These  things  ^make  men  effeminate.  11.  With^ 
whom  do  we  wage  war  ?  with  the  Germans.  12.  W^ho' 
surpasses  you  ^"in  courage  ?  13.  They  kept  the  Germans 
"from  their  territories.  14.  The  Kelts  occupy  one  part 
of  Gaul.  15.  It  has  been  said  '^that  the  Germans  wage 
war.  16.  Gaul  ^^begins  at  the  river  Rhine.  17.  The  river 
Rhone  bounds  one  part  of  Gaul.  18.  The  Pyrenees  moun- 
tains stretch  from  the  ocean  to  the  sea." 

CHAPTER  II. 

2.  1.  Is  not*  Orgetorix  wealthy  ?  2.  'When  Messalla 
and  Piso  were  consuls,  a  conspiracy  was  formed.  3.  Orget- 
orix persuaded*  the  nobility  to  form  a  conspiracy.   4.  *Can 


L  CiEBAR:   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  I. 

;yoa  persuaclc^  ire  to  go  out  of  the  kingdom?  5.  They 
surpass^  everybody  in  courage.  6.  Since  they  surpass 
everybody,  they  can  get  possession  of  Gaul.^  7.  It^  is 
easy  to  go  out  of  our  territories.  8.  I  can  easily  persuade 
*you  of  this.  9.  I  can  the^  more  easily  persuade  you  be- 
cause you  surpass  Orgetorix  in  courage.  10.  The  Rhine 
bounds  the  Helvetians  ^^on  one  side.  11.  The  river  is 
broad  and  deep.  12.  The  Helvetian  land  is  separated 
from  "that  of  the  Germans  by  the  Ehine.  13.  The  Rhone 
separates  the  Helvetians  from  our  province.  14.  ^^On  the 
third  side  Helvetia  is  bounded  by  Lake  Geneva.  15.  It 
resulted  from  these  facts^^  ^^that  they  were  affected  with 
great  mortification.  16.  We  can  easily  ^^make  war  upon 
the  Germans.  17.  Are  you  eager  for  warfare^^  ?  18.  Con- 
sidering their  glory  in  war,  they  have  very  narrow  limits. 
19.  We  think  ^^ve  have  narrow  limits.  20.  I  think  you 
are  eager  for  warfare. 

CHAPTER  III. 

3.  1.  Orgetorix  influenced  the  Helvetians  by  his 
authority.  2.  They  were  induced  ^to  buy  up  wagons  and 
pack-animals.  3.  An  abundance  of  grain  was  in  store. 
4.  Peace  and  friendship  were  established  with  their 
neighbors.  5.  These  preparations^  were  completed  ^in 
two  years.  6.  ^Three  years  are  enough  ^for  establishing 
peace.  7.  They  chose  Orgetorix  ^to  do  this  thing.  8.  I 
took  upon  myself  an  embassy  to  Orgetorix.  9.  ^He  per- 
suaded Casticus  to  seize  the  throne.  10.  He  persuades 
the  senate  to  call  him  friend.  11.  ^Was  Casticus  accept- 
able to  Divitiacus  ?  12.  ^Shall  you  give  Casticus  your 
daughter  in  marriage  ?     13.  It  is  an  easy  thing*  to  do  to 


FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION.  6 

holil  the  sui)remacy.  14.  It  is  not  doubtful  that  he 
hohls'  the  supremacy.  15.  There  is  no  doubt  that  they 
'"were  influenced  by  this  speech.  16.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  this  speech  influenced*"  them.  17.  It  was  not  doubt- 
ful that  the  Gauls  were"  very  powerful.  18.  I  assure  you 
**that  I  shall  hold  the  supremacy.  19.  They  can  get  pos- 
session of  all  Gaul."  20.  I  hope  "that  you  can  seize  the 
throne. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

4.  1.  Orgetorix  pleaded  his  cause  in^  chains.  2.  ^If 
you  are  condemned,  punishment  must  follow.  3.  *You 
must  be  burned  with  fire.  4.  The  day  ^for  pleading  his 
cause  is  apix)inted.  5.  ''Have  you  a  large  number  of 
debtors  ?  6.  All  the  household  of  Orgetorix  was  con- 
ducted to  the  same  place.  7.  We  rescued  ourselves  *from 
being  burned.  8.  ^Let  us  maintain  our  rights.*  9.  A  mul- 
titude of  men  was  collected  'by  the  magistrates.  10.  We 
think  *"that  Orgetorix  "committed  suicide.  11.  Suspicion 
is  not  wanting  that  he  was  burned.    12.  Was  he  burned  ? 

CHAPTER  V. 

6.  1.  Shall  you  go  forth  from  your  territories  ?  2.  ^Are 
you  ready  for  that  undertaking*?  3.  I  think  you  are 
ready.  4.  We  have  set  fire  to  our  towns,  about  six  in 
number.  5.  We  shall  take  Vith  us  all  our  grain,  except 
what  we  have  burned  up.  6.  They  returned*  home. 
7.  They  are  prepared  *to  burn  up  their  grain.  8.  They 
did  this  •to  take  away  the  hope  of  returning  home. 
9.  Shall  you  carry  out  four  months'  provisions  ?  10.  We 
shall  adopt'  the  same  plan.   11.  *Who  crossed  the  Rhine  ? 


4  C^SAR:    GALLIC   WAE,   BOOK  I. 

12.  Who  ^persuaded  the  Boii  to  besiege  Noreia  ?   13.  Can 
you  persuade  me  to  burn  down  my  house  ? 

CHAPTER  VI. 

6.  1.  They  could  go  out  from  home  by  two  routes. 
2.  With  difficulty  they  dragged  their  wagons  ^one  at  a 
time.  3.  The  road  is  so*^  narrow  ^hat  we  can  easily  keep 
off  the  enemy.  4.  The  road  through  the  province  is  *free 
from  obstacles.  5.  These  two  routes  are  much  easier. 
6.  What  can  be  easier  ^than  the  second  route  ?  7.  What^ 
river  flows  between  the  Helvetians  and  the  Allobroges  ? 
8.  One"  road  is  narrower  than  the  other.''  9.  You  don't 
seem  ^to  have  a  friendly  disposition  towards  me.  10.  Let^ 
me  go  over  the  bridge.  11.  I  think  ^'^I  shall  compel  you 
"to  let  me  go.  12.  On  that  day  they  all  ^^assembled  at 
the  bank  of  the  Ehone. 

CHAPTER  VII. 

7,  1.  Caesar  departed  from  the  city.  2.  The  bridge 
was  broken  down.  3.  Caesar  ordered  one  legion  to  hasten 
into  Gaul.  4.  Caesar  was  informed^  about  the  march  of 
the  Helvetians.  5.  Who^  informed  the  Helvetians  of 
Caesar's  arrival  ?  6.  ^It  is  my  intention  to  break  down 
the  bridge.  7.  What  was  the  intention^  of  the  Helve- 
tians ?  8.  We  march  through  the  province  because  we 
have  no  other  way.  9.  ^May  we  do  this  with  your'  per- 
mission ?  1.0.  Ambassadors  were  sent  *to  say  that  they 
might^  do  this.  11.  Are  they  not^®  people  of  an  unfriendly 
disposition  ?  12.  Will  they  refrain  from  injury  ?  13.  "If 
you  wish  to  take  a  day  for  deliberation,  you  may.^^ 
14.  ^^Let  them  return  ^*on  the  Kalends  of  April.  15.  If 
you  wish  anything,  return  on  the  Ides  of  April. 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


8.  1.  Meanwhile  the  soldiers  were  assembling  from  the 
province.  2.  I  have  live  legions  ^with  me.  3.  A  wall  fif- 
teen feet'  high*  was  extended  twelve  miles.*  4.  They 
were  attempting  to  cross  *against  Caesar's  will.  5.  It 
will  not  be  very  easy  to  cross,  *if  the  enemy  are  unwill- 
ing. 6.  He  cannot  grant  a  passage  to  any  one.  7.  He 
'said  that  the  day  had  not  come.  8.  He  *says  that  he 
cannot  prevent  them.  9.  If  you  use*  force,  you  will  be 
'Misappointed  in  your  expectation.  10.  Can  you  build  a 
raft  ?  11.  Why"  could  they  not  break  through  ?  12.  Be- 
cause the  soldiers  repulsed  them  with  their  weapons. 

CHAPTER  IX.  ^ 

9.  1.  ^If  you  are  unwilling,  we  cannot  go  through  the 
pass.  2.  Since*  we  cannot  persuade  you,  only*  one  road 
is  left.  3.  Can  we  not  persuade  the  iEduans  ?  4.  We 
can,  ^if  Dumnorix  is  our  advocate.  5.  Whose  daughter 
did  he  marry*  ?  6.  Was  not  Dumnorix  friendly  to  the 
Helvetians  ?  7.  Is  not  Orgetorix  desirous  of  a  revolu- 
tion ?  8.  Accordingly  the  business  was  undertaken  by 
Dumnorix.  9.  I  wish  to  keep  you  attached  to  me. 
10.  He  caused*  them  to  'exchange  hostages.  11.  "Let  not 
the  Sequanians  hinder  us  from  our  journey.  12.  Let  us 
'exchange  hostages. 

CHAPTER  X. 

10.  1.  What  do  you  intend*  to  do  ?  2.  It  is  attended' 
with  great  danger  to  the  province  *to  have  the  Helvetians 
for  neighbors.     3.  *If  you  should  do  this,  Caesar  would 


6  C^SAR:   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  I. 

^put  Labienus  in  command  of  the  province.  4.  For  these 
reasons  he  intends^  to  hasten  into  Italy.  5.  He  had  been 
wintering  in  Further  Gaul.  6.  Enemies  of  the  Roman 
people  had  seized  the  higher  positions.  7.  What  fortifi- 
cation was  Labienus  ^put  in  command  of  ?  8.  Three 
legions  were  enrolled  there.  9.  These  were  defeated  ^in 
battle.     10.  On  the  fourth  day  he  Arrived  at  Ocelum.*" 

CHAPTER  XI. 

11.  1.  Ambassadors  were  sent  ^to  ask  for  aid.  2.  Our 
towns  ought  not  to  be  stormed ;  ^ought  not  to  have  been 
stormed.  3.  Since^  we  could  not  defend  ourselves,  we 
asked  for  aid.  4.  Our  fields  have  been  devastated  almost 
in  sight  of  Caesar.  5.  Have  not  our  children  been  led 
into  slavery  ?  6.  They  said  that  their  children  had  been 
led  into  slavery.  .  7.  We  have  %othing  left  except  our 
villages.  8.  ^We  must  not  wait ;  you  must  not  wait ; 
they  must  not  wait.  9.  Labienus,*  inform  Caesar  that 
you  will  not  wait.  10.  He  decided  that  he  must  not  wait 
'till  all  the  resources  of  his  allies  were  exhausted. 

CHAPTER  XII. 

12.  1.   ^Li  which   direction    does   the   Ehone    flow? 

2.  Can  you  telP  by  the  eye  ^in  which  direction  it  flows  ? 

3.  The  scouts  informed  Caesar  that  one  part  of  the  forces 
had  crossed  the  river.  4.  ^Having  killed  the  consul,  they 
sent  his  army  under  the  yoke.  5.  **Having  sent  his  army 
under  the  yoke,  they  put  him  to  death.  6.  They  ^not  only 
killed  the  consul,  '^but  also  sent  his  army  under  the  yoke. 
7.  ^hat  district  which  caused  the  death  of  the  consul 
%as  the  first  to  go  out  from  home.     8.  Let  us  avenge  the 


FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION.  7 

wrongs  "of  the  people.  9.  Cassius  was  killed  in  the  same 
battle  with*  Piso.     10.  Whose  grandfather  was  Piso  ? 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

13.  1.  ^He  has  the  army  led  over  the  Arar.  2.  He  had  a 
bridge  built  'so  that  he  might  lead  his  army  over.  3.  Can 
Caesar  overtake  the  Helvetians  ?  4.  Can  you  do  'in  one 
day  what  we  accomplished  Hn  ten  days  ?  5.  They  knew 
that  Caesar  crossed*  the  river  *in  one  day.  6.  If  the 
Romans  make*  peace  with  the  Helvetians,  •the  latter  will 
go  where  ^the  former  wish.®  7.  Remember  that  old  defeat. 

8.  You  attacked  us  "when  we  were  crossing  the  river. 

9.  ^"Do  not  attribute  that  to  your  own  courage,  or"  despise 
us.  10.  We  rely  upon  "our  own  valor  rather  than  upon 
treachery. 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

14.  1.  The^  less  those  events  have  happened  according 
to  our  own  deserts,*  the*  more  'indignant  we  feel.  2.  *If 
we  were  conscious'*  of  any  wrong,  we  should  not  *feel  so 
indignant.  3.  ''Why  should  we  be  afraid  ?  4.  We  have 
done  nothing  'to  make  us  afraid.  5. 1  was  not  aware  ®that 
I  had  done  anything  "to  make  me  afraid.  6.  Why  do  you 
lK)ast  of  your  victory  ?  7.  They  ^'^made  great  boasts 
alx)ut  their  victory.  8.  Caesar  felt  indignant  because  the 
Helvetians  had  harassed  the  -^duans.  9.  The  immor- 
tal gods  "are  wont  to   punish   men   for  their  crimes." 

10.  Sometimes  the  gods  grant  us  prosjK^rity''  that'*  we 
may  suffer  more  keenly  from  a  cliange.*^  11.  Although" 
this  is  80,  still  we  are  "going  to  make  peace  with  you. 
12.  Although  you  are  sorry  for  your  crimes,  still  the  gods 
will  punish  you. 


8  C^SAR:   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  L 

CHAPTER   XV. 

15.  1.  ^In  what  direction  did  Caesar  march  ?  2.  Send 
ahead  some^  horsemen  *to  follow  up  the  enemy's  line.* 
3.  A  *few  of  the  Helvetians  joined  battle  with  our  cav- 
alry. 4.  With*  a  few  of  our  horsemen  we  drove  a  multi- 
tude of  their  horsemen.  5.  Occasionally  they  ^make  a 
bolder  stand.  6.  Can  you  not  restrain  your  men  from 
battle  ?  7.  It  is  enough  to  harass  the  enemy's  rear.* 
8.  There  are  not  more  than  ^four  or  live  miles  between  us 
and  the  enemy.  9.  Could  Caesar  keep  his  men  from  for- 
aging ?  10.  Don't  you  consider  this  enough  for  the 
present? 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

16.  1.  Caesar  importuned  the  ^duans  for  the  grain. 
2.  Not  only  is  there  no  fodder  at  hand,  but  ^not  even  are 
the  crops  in  the  fields  ripe.  3.  Moreover,  the  grain  which 
we  brought  up  the  Arar^  we  cannot  use.  4.  We  do  not 
wish  to  turn  our  course  from  the  Arar.  5.  The  day  is  at 
hand  on  which  the  leaders  must^  be  called  together.  6.  Is 
it  necessary'  to  put  him  off  day  after*  day  ?  7.  *What  sort 
of  power  had  Liscus  over  his  i)eople  ?  8.  Liscus  was  vio- 
lently accused  because,  ^though  the  enemy  were  near.  Tie 
did  not  help  Caesar.  9.  Could  they  buy  grain?  10.  He 
coiiplained  ^because  the  war  had  been  undertaken  at  a 
crimcal  time. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

17.  1.  Liscus  Tias  much  more  power  than  'even  Divitiar 
«^.  2.  There  were  some  *who  were  influenced  by  Caesar's 
argument.   3.  Liscus  was  prevented  *from  disclosing  what 


FOB  ORAL  TRANSLATION.  9 

he  'ought  to  have  disclosed.  4.  We  ought  not  to  use  yio* 
lent  language.  5.  I  do  not  doubt  that  they  ^are  going  to 
collect  the  grain.  6.  He  did  not  doubt  that  his  plans 
were  disclosed  to  the  enemy.  7.  Nay  even,  he  said  that 
he  disclosed  the  matter  'on  compulsion.  8.  •\Vhat  goes 
on  in  Gaul  is  disclosed  to  the  Romans.  9.  I  will  keep 
still  as  long  as  I  can.*    10.  I  cannot  restrain  them. 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

18,  1.  Dumnorix  was  pointed  at  by  Liscus.  2.  *Don*t 
discuss  these  matters  *in  my  presence.  3.  What  did  you 
say  in  the  meeting  ?  4.  Speak  'with  the  utmost  freedom 
and  boldness.  5.  Dumnorix  is  a  man^  of  great  liberality. 
C.  *When  you  bid,  nobody  dares  to  bid  against  yoii.  7.  I 
always  have  about  me  a  large  number  of  horsemen.  8.  I 
hate  Dumnorix  'on  my  own  account.  9.  I  Tiave  the  high- 
est  hopes  *of  purchasing  the  revenues  at  a  low  price. 
10.  He  despair^  of  the  favor  of  the  Roman  people. 

CHAPTER  XIX- 

19.  1.  Cifsiir  lia<i  punished  Dumnorix.  2.  I  will  Tiave 
him  summoned  before  me.  3.  All  these  things  were  done 
'without  Caesar's  knowledge.  4.  There  is  *rea8on  enough 
why  they  should  do  this  'without  your  knowledge.  5. 1 
am  afraid  *of  hurting  your  feelings.  6.  We  have  the 
greatest  confidence  in  you  *in  all  res})ects.  7.  What  did 
he  say  in  your  presence  about  Valerius  ?  8.  What  did 
you  say  in  my  presence  about  Divitiacus  ?  9.  Having 
learned  these'  facts,  he  himself  punished  Dumnorix. 
10.  He  begged  Tiim  to  declare  "what  each  one  said. 


10  C^SAR:    GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  I. 

CHAPTER  XX. 

20.  1.  Csesar  entreated  Divitiacus  ^not  to  embrace  him. 

2.  ^No  one  ^feels  more  pain  than  I  do"*,  because  these  things 
are  true.  3.  I  know  that  I  myself  ^have  very  little  power 
at  home.  4.  ^Love  of  his  brother  and  ^public  opinion  in- 
fluenced him.  5.  ^If  anytliing  befalls  Bumnorix,  it  will 
be  done  with  your  consent.  G.  ^If  anything  should  befall 
Dumnorix,  the  affections  of  all  Gaul  would  be  estranged 
from  Divitiacus.  7.  He  begged  him  ^"to  stop  weeping. 
8.  "Have  done  with  your  entreaties.  9.  He  pointed  out 
what  Dumnorix  had  done.  10.  For  the  future  avoid  ^^all 
grounds  of  suspicion. 

CHAPTERS  XXI.,  XXII. 

21.  1.  What^  is  the  character  of  the  mountain  ?  2.  I 
know^  what  the  character  of  the  mountain  is.  3.  Show 
me  ^what  your  plan  is.  4.  They  ascended  the  mountain 
by  the  same  road  that*  Considius  did.^  5.  Is  not  Consi- 
dius  regarded  as  skilled  in*  military  affairs  ?  6.  When^ 
Considius  ran  up  to  Caesar,  Labienus  held  the  ^top  of  the 
mountain.  7.  Considius  said  that  the  enemy  held  it. 
8.  ^Do  not  join  battle  unless  you  see^®  the  enemy  near  the 
hill.  9.  Considius  was  thoroughly  scared.  10.  At  day- 
break; late  in  the  day;  on  that  day;  at  the  usual  in- 
terval, f?^ 

CHAPTERS   XXIII.,  XXIV. 

22.  1.  We  must^  look  out  for  supplies.  2.  It  was 
necessary  to  turn  their  coiijse  away  from  the  enemy. 

3.  The  Helvetians  thought  that  the  Romans  were  panic- 


FOll   ORAL   TRANSLATION.  11 

stricken  * ;  4.  *the  more  so  because  they  had  changed 
their  course.  5.  The  cavalry  withstood  the  enemy's 
attack.  6.  Meanwhile  four  veteran  legions  were  drawn 
up  in*  line.  7.  These  were  stationed  *half  way  up  the 
hill,  and  the  auxiliaries  *on  top.  8.  The  whole  mountain 
was  covered  with  baggage.  9.  Forming  a  phalanx,  they 
advanced  Hialf  way  up  the  hill.  10.  The  hill  was  fortif.ed 
by  those  who  had  been  enlisted  last. 

CHAPTER  XXV. 

23.  1.  Caesar  removed  the  horses  in  order  to  equalize 
the  danger.  2.  ^Having  taken  away  all  hope  of  flight,  he 
encouraged  his  men.  3.  ^When  they  had  hurled  their 
javelins,  they  drew  their  swords.  4.  It  is  *a  great  hin- 
drance to  us  that'  our  shields  are  fastened  together. 
6.  Can  you  fight  to  advantage  with  your  left  hand 
shackled  ?  6.  Throw  away  your  shields,  and  fight  with 
swords.  7.  Fall  back,  and  withdraw  to  the  mountain. 
8.  They  fell  back  and  withdrew  to  the  mountain,  which 
was  near  by.  9.  Let  us  attack  the  Boii  on  the  exposed 
flank.     10.  The  second  line  opposed  the  Tulingi. 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 

24.  1.  Long  and  fiercely  *they  fought.  2.  'One  party 
withstood  the  attack,  *the  other  could  not.  3.  Could  'any 
one  see  the  back  of  a  foe  ?  4.  Although  no  one  could  see 
the  back  of  a  foe,  Hhey  fought  till  *late  at  night.  5.  Let 
us  hurl  our  weapons  at  the  enemy  *as  they  advance. 

6.  Caisar  captured  "one  of  Orgetorix*s  daughters  there. 

7.  Our  men  delayed  two  days  ^to  bury  the  slain.   8.  Don't 


12  C^SAE:   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  L 

you  aid  them  with  grain  or^  ^anything  else.  9.  If  you  do 
aid  them,  I  shall  hold  you  in  ^°the  same  estimation  as  [I 
do]  Orgetorix.  10.  If  you  should  aid  them,  Caesar  would 
hold  you  in  the  same  estimation  as  [he  does]  the  Helve- 
tians. 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 

25.  1.  They  cast  themselves  at  Caesar's^  feet.  2.  ^Hav- 
ing met  Caesar,  they  sued  for  peace  ^with  tears.     3.  Wait 

*for  my  arrival  iu  that  place  where  you  now*  are.  4.  ^Be- 
ing ordered  to  cast  themselves  at  his  feet,  they  obeyed. 
5.  The  slaves  escaped  to  Caesar.  6.  Search  for  the  arms 
and  collect  them.  7.  ®If  we  give  up  the  hostages,  Caesar 
will  demand  our  arms.  8.  Do  you  suppose  that-  your 
flight  can  be  concealed  ?  9.  ^If  we  give  up  our  arms,  we 
shall  be  punished.  10.  '^Early  in  the  night  they  gave  up 
their  arms  and  were  punished. 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

26.  1.  Search  them  out  and  bring  them  back.  2.  If 
you  wish  to  be  exculpated  Hn  my  sight,  bring  them  back. 
3.  Hostages,  arms,  and^  refugees  were  delivered  up.  4.  The 
Helvetians  returned  to  the  territories  ^hey  had  started 
from.  5.  We  have  nothing  ^wherewith  to  keep  from 
starvation.  6.  He  ordered  [iubeof  them  to  furnish^  a 
supply  of  grain.  7.  He  ordered  [imperof  them  to  re- 
build their  towns.  8.  Caesar  7does  not  want  the  Germans 
to  be  neighbors  of  our  province.  9.  ^At  the  request  of 
the  Boii  I  will  allow  them  to  give  lands  to  the  ^duans. 
10.  Are  not  the  Boii  known  to  be  men  of  extraordinary 
valor  ? 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  13 

CHAPTER  XXX. 

27.  1.  Leading  men  of  all  Gaul  congratulated  Caesar.* 

2.  He  had  -inflicted  punishment  upon   the   Helvetians. 

3.  Although^  he  had  inflicted  punishment  upon  them, 
still  ambassadors  came  *to  congratulate  him.  4.  With 
what  design  did  the  Helvetians  leave  their  homes  ? 
5.  Did  they  select  a  convenient  place  for  an  abode  ?  6.  Is 
all  Gaul  very  productive  ?  7.  They  beg  permission*  to 
select  an  abode.  8.  I  have  certain  things  that  I  wish 
to  ask  of  you.  9.  *Let  no  one  make  disclosures  except 
those  'who  are  directed  to  do  so.  10.  It  is  *of  advan- 
tage to  us  to  do  this  with  your  consent. 

CHAPTER   XXXI. 

28.  1.  ^May  we  treat  with  you  about  our  own  safety  ? 
2.  We  request  that  we  may*  treat  with  you  about  the 
safety  of  our  leaders.     3.  Was  not  this  ^request  granted  ? 

4.  We  strive  for  this,  —  that  we  may  accomplish  what^  we 
wish.  6.  They  strove  for  this,  —  that  they  might  not  be 
*put  to  torture.  6.  The  ^Eduans  hold  the  supremacy  in* 
one  of  the  parties,  the  Arvemi  in  the  other.  7.  'The  re- 
sult was  that  about  twelve  thousand  crossed  the  Rhine. 
8.  The  result  will  be  that  they  will  *meet  with  a  great 
disaster.  9.  They  did  not  refuse  •to  implore  help  from 
Caesar.  10.  He  is  the  only  one  ^''who  cannot  be  induced 
"to  take  the  oath.  11.  A  worse  thing  has  happened  to 
the  victors  than  to  the  vanquished.  12.  In  a  few  years 
we  shall  all  be  driven  out  of  Gaul.  13.  Caesar  is  not  to  be 
compared  with  Ariovistus.  14.  He  demanded  as  hostages 
the  children  *^of  all  the  nobles.  15.  I  have  no  doubt  that 
Caesar  can  defend  tiie  Gauls  from  Ariovistus. 


14  C^SAR:   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  I. 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 

29.  1.  Divitiacus  made  a  speech.  2.  The  Sequanians 
with  bowed  heads  sadly^  looked  upon  the  ground. 
3.  What  was  the  cause  of  this  behavior^  ?  4.  Do  you 
^make  no  reply  ^  5.  I  cannot  extort  %  single  word.  6.  I 
wonder  what  tKe  reason  is.  7.  We  do  not  dare  even  to 
complain.^  8.  Our  lot  is  harder  than  theirs,  because  Ario- 
vistus  is  present.  9.  They  said  that  their  lot  was  a  hard 
one®  because  Ariovistus  Vas  present.  10.  ^We  must 
endure  all  tortures. 

CHAPTER   XXXIII. 

30.  1.  Caesar  promised  to  encourage^  them.  2.  This 
will  be  ^y  care.  3.  I  have  great  hopes  that  Caesar  will 
dismiss  the  council.  4.  Was  Ariovistus  induced  ^o  put 
an  end  to  his  injuries  ?  5.  It  is  most  disgraceful  to  the 
Eoman  people  ^that  ykhe  iEduans  should  be  under  the 
sway  of  Ariovistus.  {  6.  Moreover,  the  Germans  will  get 
used  to  crossing  the  ^hine.  ^7.  Barbarous  men  will  not 
^refrain  from  seizing  upon  all  Gaul.  8.  Little  by  little 
they  will  go  forth  from  the  province  into  Italy.  9.  ^These 
dangers  must  be  thwarted  at  the  earliest  possible  moment. 
10.  He  thought  that  Ariovistus  assumed  such  insolence 
^that  he  ought  not  to  be  endured. 

CHAPTER  XXXIV. 

31.  1.  ^I  am  determined  to  send  ambassadors.  2.  Am- 
bassadors were  sent  to  treat  with  Ariovistus.  3.  A  place 
^alf  way  between  the  two  was  selected.  4.  I  wish  to 
select  some  place  for  a  conference.     5.  ^If  I  needed  any- 


FOR   ORAL   TRANSLATION.  15 

thiii«:j  of  you,  I  should  come  to  you.  6.  If  I  had  needed 
anything,  I  should  have  come.  7.  *If  you  want  anything 
of  me,  you  ought  to  come  to  me.  8.  *What  business  have 
you  in  Gaul  anyhow  ?  9.  *I  am  at  a  loss  to  understand 
what  business  Caesar  has  in  Gaul.  10.  The  ^part  of  Gaul 
which  I  have  conquered  is  mine. 

CHAPTER  XXXV. 

32.  1.  These  replies  were  reported  to  Caesar.  2.  You 
have  been  ^treated  with  great  kindness  by  me.  3.  *What 
a  return  you  are  making  to  the  Roman  people  !  4.  Don't 
you  think  you  ought  to  speak  about  ^  matter  of  general 
interest  ?  5.  '*This  is  what  I  demand  of  you.  6.  Return 
the  hostages  that  you  have  from  the  ^Eduans.  7.  Do 
not  harass  the  iEduans  or  their  allies.  8.  If  you  do  this, 
*you  will  have  lasting  friendship  with  Caesar.  9.  Who- 
ever shall  hold  the  province,  let  him,  *as  far  as  he  can, 
defend  our  friends.  10.  Since^  the  senate  so  decreed,  I 
shall  not  overlook  the  injuries  Mone  to  our  friends. 

CHAPTER  XXXVI. 

33.  1.  *It  is  the  right  of  war  that  those  who  have  con- 
quered should  govern  those  whom  they  have  conquered. 
2.  You  govern  those  whom  you  have  conquered  just  as 
you  please.  3.  *I  am  in  the  habit  of  governing  the  con- 
<iuered  according  to  my  own  judgment.  4.  I  never  pre- 
scribed to  you  how'  you  should  exercise*  your  rightful 
authority.  5.  You  ought  not  to  obstruct  me  in  my  rights. 
6.  You  do  me  a  great  wrong  *in  making  the  ^Eduans 
your  tributaries.  7.  If  you  *abide  by  that  which  has  been 
agreed  ui)0n,  I  will  not  make  war  upon  you.     8.  No  one 


16  C^SAR:    GALLIC   AVAR,    BOOK   1. 

ever  contended  with  me  ''except  to  his  own  ruin.  9.  Come 
on  when  you  will.  10.  You  will  find  out  that  the  Ger- 
mans are  well  skilled  in  arms. 

CHAPTERS  XXXVII.,  XXXVIII. 

34.  1.  The  Harudes  have  lately  been  brought  over  into 
Gaul.  2.  I  have  come  ^to  complain  because  the  Harudes 
have  lately  been  brought  over  into  Gaul.  3.  Not  even  ^by 
giving  hostages  could  they  purchase  peace.  4.  ^We  must 
hasten  lest  the  Suevi  unite^  with  Ariovistus.  5.  *Eesist- 
ance  cannot  easily  be  made,  if  a  new  force  unites  with  the 
veterans.  6.  ®When  this  was  announced,  Ariovistus  had 
already  accomplished  a  two  days'  march.  7.  ^We  must 
take    great    precautions    that    this    may    not    happen. 

8.  There  is  everything  in  Vesontio  that  is  useful^  in  war. 

9.  A  wall  encircles  the  town,  as  if  it  were  traced  around 
by  compasses.  10.  The  river  touches  the  base  of  the 
mountain  on  either  side. 

CHAPTER  XXXIX. 

35.  1.  Traders  asserted  that  the  Germans  were  men  of 
immense  size.  2.  They  %ad  had  frequent  encounters  with 
them.  3.  Such^  was  the  fierceness  of  their  eyes  that  the 
army  was  seized  with  terror.  4.  ^One  assigned  one  reason 
and  another  another  for  departing.  5.  '*To  avoid  suspicion 
of  fear,  I  shall  remain.  6.  ^Can  you  keep  back  the  tears  ? 
7.  ^Such  of  them  as  could  command  their  countenances 
appeared^  less  timid.**  8.  The  centurions  and  those*  who 
commanded  the  cavalry  did  not  fear  the  enemy.  9.  When 
you  order  the  ^"advance  of  the  standards,  the  soldiers 
will  not  obey.  10.  I  am  afraid  "that  supplies  cannot  be 
brought  up. 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  17 


CHAPTER  XL. 


36.  1.  Do  you  think  'you  ought  to  inquire  in  what 
direction  you  are  being  led  ?  2.  ^l  am  persuaded  "that 
Ariovistus  will  not  reject  the  terms.  3.  If  he  should 
spurn  our  good  will,  pray  what  should  we  fear  ?  4.  *An 
insurrection  of  slaves,  who  made  war  on  the  Roman  peo- 
ple, lately  took  place.  5.  Can  you  not  judge  from  this 
*how  much  advantage  firmness  has  ?  6.  The  Helvetians 
are  the  same  men  with  whom  we  ®have  had  frequent 
encounters.  7.  We  are  'a  match  *not  only  for  the  Helve- 
tians, ^but  for  the  Germans  also.  8.  You  can  find  out,  if 
you  inquire,  that  Ariovistus  did  not  ®give  them  a  chance 
at  him.  9.  We  cannot  be  caught  '"by  that  method  for 
which  there  is  an  opportunity  against  savages.  10.  You 
are  acting  presumptuously,  "since  you  appear  to  be  dic- 
tating to  your  commander.  11.  I  am  '^not  at  all  disturbed 
at  your  saying  that  you  will  not  advance."  12.  I  wish 
to  find  out  whether  duty  or  fear  prevails  with  you. 

CHAPTER  XLI. 

37.  1.  We  shall  be  the  first  to  return  thanks  to  Caesar. 

2.  He  has  'expressed  the  most  favorable  opinion  of  us. 

3.  We  assure  you  that  we  are  ''quite  ready  to  carry  on 
the  war.  4.  Then  the  *rest  of  the  legions  apologized  to 
Caesar.  5.  We  have  never  thought  that  the  decision  about 
the  war  ^belonged  to  us,  but  to  you.  6.  We  have  neither 
doubted  nor  feared.  7.  Above  all  others  I  have  the  great- 
est confidence  •in  you.     8.  Divitiacus  examined  the  road. 

9.  He  said  tliat  he  should  start  about  the  third  watch. 

10.  The  forces  of  Ariovistus  are  twenty  miles  away  from 
Caesar's. 


18  C^SAR:   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  I. 

CHAPTER  XLII. 

38.  1.  ^That  may  be  done,  as  far  as  I  am  concerned. 
2.  I  can  come  to  a  conference  without  danger.  3.  Now 
you  are  returning  to  reason.  4.  ^When  I  requested  it,  you 
refused.  5.  I  entertain  great  hopes  that  you  will  ap- 
proach nearer.  6.  ^Let  no  foot-soldier  be  brought  to  the 
conference.  7.  I  shall  not  come  on  any  other  terms.* 
8.  I  dare  not  intrust  my  safety  to  the  Gauls.  9.  The  most 
expedient  way^  is  to  take  away  their  horses  ^from  the 
Gauls.  10.  If  there  should  be  need  of  any  action,  he 
would  have  a  friendly  guard. 

CHAPTER  XLIII. 

39.  1.  They  saw  a  ^pretty  large  mound  of  earth  in  an 
extensive  plain.  2.  We  shall  take  to  the  conference  ^eight 
apiece  besides  ourselves.  3.  Let  us  carry  on  the  confer- 
ence ^on  horseback.  4.  He  was  called  king  by  the  senate, 
a  thing  which  has  happened  to  but*  few.  5.  Have  you  any 
good  ^reason  for  demanding  ^such  a  favor  ?  6.  Many  just 
grounds  of  intimacy  ^exist  between  you  and  us.  7.  *Who 
would  not  wish  his  friends  to  be  advanced  in  honor  ? 
8.  ^It  was  Csesar's  habit  to  allow  nothing  to  be  taken 
away  ^''from  his  allies.  9.  If  you  cannot  return  the  hos- 
tages, at  least  do  not  make  war  upon  us.  10.  Then  he 
made  the  same  demands  as"  before. 

CHAPTER  XLIV. 

40.  1.  I  did  not  cross  the  Ehine  of  my  own  accord. 
2.  I  abandoned  my  home  'at  your  request.  3.  The  Eo- 
mans  had  imposed  a  tax  upon  the  Gauls.    4.  All  the  states 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  19 

of  Gaul  have  been  defeated  by  Ariovistus.  5.  If  they 
wish  to  try  it  over  again,  I  am  ready  *for  a  second  con- 
test. 6.  I  sought  the  friendship  of  the  Roman  people  'in 
the  hope  that  it  would  be  an  honor  to  me.  7.  I  led  the 
Germans  over  the  Rhine  *for  the  sake  of  strengthening 
myself.  8.  This  part  of  Gaul  is  mine,  just  as  the  prov- 
ince is  yours.  9.  You  are  unfair  *in  interfering  with  me 
in  my  rights.  10.  I  am  not  so  simple  "as  not  to  know 
that  Caesar's  friendship  is  pretended. 

CHAPTERS  XLV.,  XLVI. 

41.  1.  It  is  not  Caesar's   habit  to   desert  his   allies. 

2.  It  is  not  his  habit  to  allow  ^his  allies  to  be  deserted. 

3.  The  Roman  people  will  not  allow  him  to  desert  their 
allies.  4.  Neither  he  himself  nor  the  Roman  people 
thought  that  Gaul  ^belonged  to  Ariovistus.  5.  ^Priority 
of  time  ought  not  to  be  regarded.  6.  The  Gauls  ought  to 
be  free,  and  to  enjoy^  their  own  laws.  7.  ^While  horsemen 
were  riding  up  to  our  men,  stones  were  thrown  at  us. 
8.  Don't  throw  any  stones  at  all.  9.  ^If  Ariovistus  should 
be  defeated,  "it  might  be  said  that  he  was  entrapped  by 
us.  10.  After*  the  attack  was  made,  Caesar  put  an  end 
to  the  conference. 

CHAPTER  XLVII. 

42.  1.  ^Three  days  afterwards  Ariovistus  treated  with 
Ciusar  a  second  time.  2.  If  you  don't  wish  to  apjioint  a 
day,  send  ^ne  of  your  lieutenants.  3.  I  cannot  keep  the 
Germans  'from  hurling  weapons.  4.  There  seems  to  be 
*no  reason  for  hurling  weapons ;  5.  *the  more  so  because 
there  is  no  danger.     6.  Gains,  son  of  Gaius,  was  a  young 


20  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  I. 

man  of  the  greatest  refinement.  7.  Ariovistus  %poke 
tlie  Gallic  language  fluently.  8.  It  seems  most  expedient 
to  present  Flaccus  with  citizenship.  9.  On  account  of 
your  knowledge  of  Latin'',  I  shall  enjoy  your  hospitality. 
10.  What  are  you  coming  to  me  for  ?  ^To  report  things 
to  Caesar  ? 

CHAPTERS  XLVIII.,   XLIX. 

43.  1.  On  the  same  day ;  on  the  next  day ;  on  the  day 
before ;  foi*  five  days ;  in  these  days ;  from  that  day ; 
daily.  2.  If  you  wish  to  contend  in  battle,  ^you  will  not 
lack  the  opportunity.  3.  If  you  should  wish  .  .  .  you 
would  not  lack.  ...  4.  If  you  had  wished  .  .  .  you  would 
not  have  lacked.  ...  5.  Let  them  select  foot-soldiers 
^one  apiece.  6.  We.  must  either  make  a  further  advance 
or  a  quicker  retreat.  7.  If  he  should  fall  off  his  horse, 
they  would  surround  him.  8.  Caesar  formed  his  line  of 
battle  beyond  the  place  where^  the  enemy  was.  9.  There* 
Ariovistus  sent  all  his  cavalry  to  frighten  Caesar's  army. 
10.  The  third  line  finished  the  work. 

CHAPTERS   L.,   LL 

44.  1.  ^Not  even  then ;  not  even  on  the  next  day ;  not 
even  the  opportunity  to  fight.  2.  The  smaller  camp  was 
attacked.  3.  ^The  reason  why  he  does  not  fight  is  be- 
cause it  is  full  moon.  4.  ^Was  it  full  moon  or  not  ? 
5.  The  matrons  declared  whether  or  not  the  Germans 
^would  conquer.  6.  ^Shall  we  contend  in  battle  or  not  ? 
7.  Caesar  used  the  auxiliaries  for  show.  8.  Considering 
the  number  of  legionary  soldiers,  he  is  strong  in  auxil- 
iaries. 9.  The  women  were  put  into  wagons  for  show. 
10.  With  tears  we  implore  you  not  to  go  into  the  battle. 


FOR    WRITTEN   TRANSLATION.  21 

CHAPTERS   LII.,    LIII. 

45.  1.  Cif^sar  put  a  'quaestor  over  each  legion.  2.  'Each 
one  hiis  a  witness  of  his  valor.  3.  So  fiercely  was  the 
attack  made  that  the  battle  was  fought  at  close  quarters 
with  swords.  4.  When  our  line  was  hard  pressed  'on 
the  right  wing,  the  enemy's  line  was  defeated  'on  the 
left.  5.  Crassus  was  sent  as  a  relief  to  the  third  line, 
*which  was  in  distress.  6.  Ariovistus  escaped  *in  a  boat 
that  he  had  found.  7.  *One  of  his  two  wives  was  cap- 
tured and  slain.  8.  It  'afforded  Caesar  great  pleasure 
that  his  friend  was  restored  to  him.  9.  *Shall  he  be 
immediately  burned  or  reserved  for  another  time  ?  10.  By 
the  favor  of  the  lots  I  am  unharmed. 


FOR  WRITTEN  TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTERS  I.— V. 

46.  1.  The  Belgians,  who  inhabit  one  of  the  three 
parts  of  Gaul,  are  the  bravest  of  all  the  Gauls,  because 
they  do  not  import  those  things  which  'make  men  effemi- 
nate. 

2.  Those*  who  surpass  all  their  neighbors  in  courage 
hold  the  supremacy  of  all  Gaul.  Wlience'  it  happens 
that  they  are  incessantly  waging  war  with  the  Germans. 

3.  ^Having  bought  up  a  large  number  of  wagons,  and 
having  completed  all  other  preparations,*  they  selected 
Orgetorix  •to  undertake  an  embassy  to  the  states. 


22  C^SAR:    GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  I. 

4.  At  that  time  Casticus,  a  Sequaiiian,  who  had  seized 
the  throne  in  his  own  state,  ''and  also  Dumnorix,  an 
^duan,  to  whom  Orgetorix  had  given  his  daughter  in 
marriage,  influenced^  by  the  argument  of  Orgetorix, 
^exchanged  pledges  with  each  other. 

CHAPTERS  VI.— X. 

47.  1.  One  route  is  difficult,  because  a  high  mountain 
overhangs ;  the  other  is  easy,  because  it  is  near  the  Rhone, 
over^  which  is  a  bridge. 

2.  ^AU  preparations  are  made,  and  a  day  appointed, 
^on  which  they  are  to  cross  the  Rhone  by  the  bridge 
that  extends  from  Geneva,  because  this  route  is  the 
easier. 

3.  When  Caesar  was  informed  of  their  approach,  he 
hastened  from  Rome  "^in  order  to  intercept  them.  To 
the  ambassadors,  who  had  been  sent  ^to  him,  he  replied 
that  he  Mid  not  think  the  Helvetians  ^would  march 
through  the  province  without  doing  injury. 

4.  Nevertheless,  he  named  a  day  ®for  the  ambassadors  to 
come  again,  and,  meanwhile,  ^having  extended  a  wall  and 
a  ditch  from  the  lake  to  the  mountain,  and  ^having  posted 
garrisons  here  and  there,  and  ^fortified  redoubts,  he 
informed  the  ambassadors,  when  they  had  come  back, 
^^that  he  should  prevent  them  if  they  attempted  to  march 
by  that  route. 

5.  "In  order  that  they  might  more  easily  march 
through  the  country  of  the  Sequanians,  they  gave  hos- 
tages to  them  ^-to  pass  through  their  territories  without 
injury. 


rOR   WRITTEN   TRANSLATION.  23 

CHAPTERS  XI.— XV. 

48.  1.  Caesar,  since  he  could  not  defend  himself  from 
the  ^duans,  sent  an  ambassador  to  them  to  say  that' 
he  had  ahs'ays  ^served  their  interests  so  well  that^  they 
ought  not  to  attack  his  army. 

2.  ^When  Caesar  was  asked  *in  what  direction  the  Arar 
flowed,  he  said,  "  *You  cannot  tell  by  the  eye,  because  it 
flows  with  such*  incredible  slowness." 

3.  That  part  of  the  army  which  had  hidden  in  the  for- 
ests, after  the  battle  was  fought,  began  to  build  a  bridge 
over  the  river  in  order  that  they  might  attack  Caesar 
'when  he  did  not  expect  them. 

4.  Divico  said  to  Caesar  that  ^os  for  his  having  built  a 
bridge  over  the  Arar  in  one  day,  *he  should  not  on  that 
account  despise  the  courage  of  the  Helvetians,  who  were 
alarmed  at  his  sudden  arrival. 

5.  Csesar  '"made  the  following  reply :  that  he  remem- 
bered" the  events  which  the  ambassadors  had  mentioned, 
and  on  that  account  "was  very  indignant ;  that,  even  '^if 
he  had  committed  any  injury,  he  could  not  forget  that 
the  iEduans  had  forcibly  attempted  "to  march  through 
the  province;  that,  nevertheless,  '^f  they  should  apolo- 
gize to  him  for  their  recent  injuries,  he  would  not  punish 
them. 

CHAPTERS   XVI.— XX. 

-4:9,  1.  ^When  Ciesar  observed  that  the  ^duans  were 
not  collecting  the  grain  which  they  had  promised,  and 
that  there  was  not  a  sufficient'  store  of  provender  for  his 
army,  he  summoned  their  leading  men,  and  complained 
because  at  so  critical  a  time  they  '^ad  not  relieved  him. 


24  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  i. 

2.  Liscus  had  no  doubt  that  the  magistrates  themselves 
by   violent    harangues*  prevented    the    common   people 

/'from  using  the  grain  which  had  been  collected  from 
the  fields. 

3.  Caesar  ®asked  many  questions  of  Liscus  and  others ; 
he  found  it  to  be  true  that  Dumnorix  was  in  great  favor 
with  the  common  people ;  that  his  wife  was  a  Helvetian, 
and  that  his  sister  'had  been  given  in  marriage  to  a 
Helvetian ;  and*  that  he  commanded  the  cavalry  which 
started^  the  flight  in  an  unsuccessful  skirmish  that  hap- 
pened a  few  days  before. 

'  4:  When  all  these  things  had  been  done  ^"without 
Caesar's  knowledge,  he  thought  there  was  sufficient 
reason"  why  he  should  summon  Divitiacus  to  him  and 
urge  him  ^^to  punish  his  brother  Dumnorix. 

5.  Divitiacus  ^Vas  much  pained  at  this,  and  begged 
Caesar  not  to  "pass  too  severe  a  sentence  upon  his 
brother.  Moved  by  his  entreaties,  he  summoned  Dum- 
norix, told  him  ^^what  fault  he  found  in  him,  and  ad- 
vised him  ^^o  avoid  ^'all  grounds  of  suspicion  in  future. 


CHAPTERS   XXI.— XXVI. 

50.  1.  On  the  same  day,  Caesar  sent  Considius  with 
scouts  to  ascertain  Vhat  the  design  of  the  enemy  was. 
He  himself  formed  a  line  of  battle  and  waited  for  Con- 
sidius. ^The  latter,  %ot  knowing  that  Labienus  held  the 
mountain,  reported  to  Caesar  that  it  was  held  by  the 
enemy.  Late  in  the  day  Cae&ar  learned  that  he  %as 
panic-stricken,  and  had  reported  what  he  had  not  seen 
just  as  if  he  had  seen  it. 

2.  Caesar,  either  because  he  thought  he  ought  to  dis- 


FOR   WRITTEN  TRANSLATION.  25 

tribute  grain  to  the  army,  or  because  he  saw  that  the 
Helvetians  had  changed  their  plans,  seized  a  higher  posi- 
tion and  fortified  a  camp  there.^ 

3.  The  Helvetians  *made  an  mack  upon  the  camp,  but 
were  repulsed.  Then  Ciesar  *formed  a  triple  line  of 
battle,  and  waited  for  a  second  attack.  The  Gauls  Mrew 
their  swords  and  'advanced  up  to  the  hill.  Our  men  from 
their  higher  position  threw  their  javelins  against  the 
advancing  phalanx,  and  pierced  through  and  pinned  to- 
gether the  enemy's  shields,  so  that  they,  *not  being  able 
to  fight  with  ease  *with  their  left  arms  shackled,  threw 
away  their  shields,  and  fought  with  their  bodies  unpro- 
tected. 

4.  'The  fight  was  kept  up  till  late  in  the  night.  Finally 
the  enemy,  weary  with  wounds,  withdrew;  and  those 
who  survived  marched  ^without  stopping  all  that  night, 
and  in  three  days  'arrived  among  the  Lingones. 

CHAPTERS  XXVII.— XXXI. 

51.  1.  *  While  the  Helvetians  were  awaiting  Caesar's 
arrival,  they  collected  all  the  slaves  who  had  fled  for 
refuge  to  them. 

2.  When  Caesar  found  out  that  about  five  thousand 
men  had  left'  the  camp  and  were  hastening  towards  the 
Rhine,  he  ordered  them  to  return  to  the  place  ^hey  had 
started  from. 

3.  *At  your  request  I  will  grant  you  permission  to 
rebuild  the  houses  that  you  have  burned,  and  to  receive 
the  i£duans  into  Hhe  same  condition  of  rights  and 
liberties  *that  you  yourselves  enjoy. 

4.  The  ambassadors  left  their  homes  "with  the  design 


26  C^SAR:   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  L 

of  asking  Caesar  ^to  appoint  a  day  for  a  council  of  all  the 
states  of  Gaul.  They  themselves  wished  to  treat  with 
him  in  secret  about  the  safety  of  their  states.  There 
were  two  parties  in*  Gaul  that  contended  for  the  mastery, 
one  of  which  invited  the  Germans  to  cross  the  Rhine. 
These  will  take  a  fancy  to  the  civilization  of  the  Gauls, 
and  more  will  come. 

5.  The  Gauls,  defeated  in  battle,  were  compelled  to 
give  hostages.  Divitiacus  was  the  only  man  ^vvho  could 
not  be  compelled  to  take  the  oath.  Nevertheless,  he 
thought  that  Ariovistus,  a  passionate,  reckless  man,  as 
soon  as  the  Gauls  were  conquered,  ^Vould  practise  every 
kind  of  cruelty  upon  them. 

CHAPTERS  XXXII.— XXXVI. 

52.  1.  The  Sequanians  alone  remained  silent,  doing 
none  of  the  things  that  the  others  did,  not  even  asking 
Csesar  for  aid.  The  reason  of  this  behavior^  was  that 
they  Avere  wholly^  in  the  power  of  Ariovistus,  whom  they 
had  received  into  their  towns,  and  whose  cruelty  they 
dreaded,  even  when  he  was  absent.  Wherefore^  their  lot 
was  a  very  hard  one.* 

2.  It  is  disgraceful  under  such  a  rule  as*  that*  of  the 
Eoman  people,  that  men  %ho  have  been  called  brothers 
by  the  senate  should  be  annoyed  by  Ariovistus,  who,  if 
he  should  lead  a  great  number  of  men  into  Gaul,  Svould 
not  refrain  from  doing  ^such  things  as  the  Cimbri  and 
Teutoni  have  done. 

3.  Wherefore  Csesar  ^requested  Ariovistus  to  come  ^o 
a  conference,  and  treat  with  him  about  '"matters  of  the 
highest  interest  to  both;   but  he  demurred,"  and  said 


FOR   WRITTEN  TRANSLATION.  27 

that  he  didn't  know  what  business'*  Caesar  had  in  Gaul 
anyhow ;  that  he  had  conquered  the  ^Eduans  and  made 
them  tributaries,  and  that  the  "^ame  of  brothers  given 
by  the  Roman  people  "would  do  them  no  good ;  that,  as 
to  Caesar's  attempting  to  dictate  to  him  how  he  should 
exercise"  his  rights,  he  (Caesar)  would  not  contend  with 
him  "except  to  his  own  ruin. 

CHAPTERS  XXXVII.— XL. 

53.  1.  Greatly  alarmed  at  ^these  proceedings,  they 
think  they  ought  to  hasten,  lest,  if  the  Treviri  should 
attempt  to  cross  the  Rhine  and  ^forrn  a  junction  with  the 
forces  of  Ariovistus,  ^hey  could  not  easily  be  resisted. 

2.  Caesar  thought  he  ought  *to  advance  upon  the  town 
by  forced  marches  night  and  day,  because  by  the  nature 
of  its  position,  being  almost  encircled  by  a  river,  it  had 
great  opportunities  for  protracting  the  war. 

3.  While  the  army  was  encamped  near  this  town,  the 
soldiers  were  seized  with  a  sudden  panic,  because  some 
traders  had  said  that  the  Germans  were  men  of  remark- 
able valor.  Some  of  them  were  so  frightened  that  they 
made  their  wills,  and  others  hid  in  tents  and  said  they 
wanted  to  go*  home. 

4.  Caesar  •called  a  council  of  the  centurions,  and  up- 
braided them  severely  because  they  attempted  to  dictate 
to  him,  their  commander :  '"  Why  should  Ariovistus  so 
rashly  *fail  in  his  duty?  When  the  Cimbri  were  de- 
feated by  Marius,  the  soldiers  seemed  to  have  deserved 
no  less  praise  than  the  centurions.  If  you  should  inquire 
why  the  flight  of  the  Gauls  took  place,  you  would  find 
that  they  Vere  tired  out  by  the  length  of  the  war,  and 


28  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  l 

^Vere  caught  by  a  stratagem  for  which  there  was  no 
chance  against  our  skilled  soldiers.  I  know  that  the 
tenth  legion,  "in  which  I  have  the  greatest  confidence, 
will  never  despair  of  their  commander,  or  inquire  in 
what  direction  he  leads  them,  but  will  follow  him,  even 
if  nobody  else  does.^^ " 

CHAPTERS   XLI.— XLIV. 

54.  1.  The  soldiers  of  Caesar's  army  who  had  been 
panic-stricken  were  so  moved  by  his  harangue  that  they 
apologized  to  him,  and  assured  him  that  they  would 
carry  on  the  war  ^vith  the  greatest  alacrity ;  ^their  apol- 
ogy was  accepted. 

2.  As^  Caesar  drew  near  to  Ariovistus,  ambassadors 
were  sent  to  and  fro  between  them,  and  finally  a  day  was 
appointed  for  a  conference.  To  this  conference  *each 
took  ten  horsemen,  and  they  themselves  parleyed  ^on 
horseback.  Caesar's  body-guard  was  his  ever-faithful^ 
tenth  legion,  which  he  had  mounted  on  the  horses  of  the 
Gallic  cavalry. 

3.  ^When  they  had  arrived  at  the  appointed  place, 
which  was  at  about  an  equal  distance  from  the  camp  of 
each,  Caesar  at  the  outset  mentioned  the  great  favor 
shown  by  the  senate  to  Ariovistus  *in  styling  him  king, 
and  showed  that,  although  he  had  no  just  grounds  for® 
demanding  such  a  favor,  the  Romans  would  take  away 
^^from  him  nothing  that  they  had  given,  "if  he  should 
return  the  hostages  ^^and  not  allow  any  more  Germans 
to  cross  the  Rhine. 

4.  Ariovistus  made  a  brief  reply  to  Caesar's  demands : 
saying  that  he  ^^had  been  requested  by  the  Gauls  them- 


FOR   WRrrTEN  TRANSLATION.  29 

selves  to  cross  the  Rhine ;  that  he  had  imposed  tribute 
iijx)!!  them  by  the  laws  of  war;  that  "if  the  Roman 
people  should  "interfere  with  this  tribute,  he  would  not 
seek  their  friendship  a  second  time ;  that  *as  to  his 
ordering  him  to  return  the  hostages,  he  should  refuse-, 
that  he  knew  that  Caesar's  death  would  be  acceptable  to 
many  leaders  of  the  Romans,  whose  favor  he  might  pur- 
chase '^by  putting  him  to  death. 

CHAPTERS  XLV.— LIII. 

65.  1.  Caesar  replied  that  he  could  not  desert  his  most 
meritorious  allies,  and  that  Gaul  'did  not  belong  to  Ario- 
vistus  'any  more  than  to  the  Roman  people ;  that  they 
had  not  even  imposed  tribute  upon  the  Arverni,  when 
they  had  conquered  them  in  war,  and  that  according  to 
the  decision  of  the  senate  all  Gaul  ought  to  be  free. 

2.  Ariovistus  displayed'  such  insolence,  and  his  horse- 
men rode  up  so  near  to  Caesar,  that  the  latter  broke  off 
the  conference.  The  former,  however,  *asked  for  another 
conference,  but  Caesar  saw  no  reason  *for  exposing  him- 
self again  to  such  savages ;  and  so  he  sent  as  ambassa- 
dors two  men  who  "spoke  the  German  language  fluently 
to  report  what  Ariovistus  wished  to  say.  These  men 
were  put  in  confinement  by  Ariovistus. 

3.  Caesar,  having  observed  that  the  enemy  kept  them- 
selves in  camp,  inquired  of  some  prisoners  for  what  rea- 
son they  did  not  'offer  him  a  chance  to  fight.  He  learned 
that  the  reason  was  that  they  thought  they  could  not 
conquer  before  full  moon.  He,  thinking  it  was  the  will 
of  heaven  that  his  own  legionary  soldiers  should  conquer, 
whether  it  were  full  moon  or  not,  gave  the  signal  for 
battle. 


30  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  l 

4.  The  enemy  rushed  forward  so  suddenly  that  our 
men  threw  away  their  javelins  and  fought  at  close 
quarters  with  swords.  At^last  the  enemy  turned  their 
backs,  and  did  not  stop  fleeing  till  they  reached^  the 
river,  where  they  found  canoes  ^to  cross  in. 


BOOK   II. 
FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTER   I. 

56.  1.  Caesar  was  in  Gaul.  2.  He  was  informed  ^by 
rumors ;  'by  Labienus.  3.  Labienus  'informed  him.  4.  All 
the  Belgae  *are  conspiring.  5.  They  were  exchanging  hos- 
tages. 6.  These  are  the  reasons  *for  conspiring.  7.  They 
fear  that  our  army  %ill  be  led  against  them.  8.  They 
feared  that  our  army  would  be  led  against  them.  9.  Ger- 
mans are  going  about  in  Gaul.  10.  Romans  are  'getting 
a  foothold  in  Gaul.  11.  We  are  indignant.  12.  They  are 
desirous  of  ^changes  in  the  government.  13.  In  Gaul 
men  are  hired  by  the  powerful.* 

CHAPTER  II. 

67.  1.  These  messages  alarmed  Caesar.  2.  Two  legions 
were  enrolled.  3.  Quintus  Pedius  led  them  into  Gaul. 
4.  They  were  in*  the  interior  of  Gaul.  5.  'As  soon  as  he 
came  to  the  army,  *they  had  a  plenty  of  food.  6.  The 
Senoiies  were  neighbors  of*  the  Belgae.  7.  *What  is  going 
on  among  them  ?  8.  He  gave*  it  in  charge  to  Pedius  Ho 
find  out.  9.  Bands  "are  collecting.  10.  •There  ought  to 
be  no  hesitation  about  marching  against  them. 


32  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  n. 

CHAPTER   III. 

58.  1.  He  came  sooner  than  any  one  would  suppose. 

2.  Ambassadors  are  sent  ^to  say ;  they  were  sent  to  say. 

3.  ^Ourselves  and   all  our  property  we  intrust  to  you. 

4.  We  have  not  conspired  with  the  Belgse.  5.  We  are 
ready^  to  give  hostages.  6.  They  did  his  bidding.  7.  They 
aided  him  with  grain.  8.  All  the  Belgae  are  in  arms. 
9.  They  have  united^  with  the  Germans.  10.  So  great 
was  their  madness  that  they  united^  with  the  Germans. 
11.  They  used  the  same  laws.  12.  He  ^dissuades  them 
from  conspiring.  13.  He  dissuaded  them  from  conspiring. 
14.  I  cannot  dissuade  you  from  conspiring  with  them. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

59.  1.  What  states  are  in  arms  ?  2.  He  asked  them 
^what  states  were  in  arms.  3.  They  asked  him.  4.  What 
can  they  do  in  war  ?  5.  Most  of  the  Belgae  sprang  from 
the  Germans.  6.  They  were  led  over  the  Ehine.  7.  The 
Gauls  were  expelled.  8.  He  found  out  ^hat  the  Gauls 
had  been  expelled.  9.  They  prevented  the  Cimbri  *from 
entering.  10.  They  are  the  only  ones  ^who  prevented. 
11.  From  this  it  resulted  that  they  put  on  airs.  12.  How 
large  a  number  have  they  promised  ?  13.  I  know®  how 
large  a  number  each  has  promised.  14.  The  Bellovaci 
have  great^  influence  ^because  of  their  valor.  15.  They 
claim  for  themselves  the  command.  16.  The  chief  con- 
trol of  the  war  has  been  conferred  upon  Galba.  17.  The 
Nervii  were  regarded  as  extremely  cruel.^  18.  They 
were  furthest  off. 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  33 

CHAPTER  V. 

60.  1.  The  whole  senate  met*  him.'  2.  The  children 
of  the  leaders  were  brought  to  him.'  3.  They  did  all 
these  things  promptly.  4.  It  greatly*  concerns  the  com- 
mon safety.     5.  The  bands  of  the  enemy  are  kept  apart. 

6.  This  can^  be  done,  if  our  troops  *keep  the  bands  of  the 
enemy  apart.  7.  *These  instructions  were  given.  8.  'After 
they  had  collected  their  forces,  they  came  to  Caesar. 
9.  *By  this  time  they  were  not  far  off.  10.  Supplies  can 
be  brought  to  Caesar  without  danger.  11.  Sabinus  was 
left  on  the  other  side  of  the  river.  12.  There  was  a  ditch 
ten  feet®  in  depth.*® 

CHAPTER  VI. 

61.  1.  The  town  is  ten  miles  from  the  river.  2.  The 
Belgae  attacked  Bibrax  with  great  violence.  3.  Stones 
were  hurled  against  the  wall.  4.  The  town  was  cleared 
of  soldiers.*  5.  'In  this  instance  the  wall  was  easily 
undermined.     6.  A  great  multitude  %ept  hurling  stones. 

7.  "K^ould  they  keep  their  position  on  the  wall  ?  8.  Who'' 
was  in  command  of  the  town  ?  9.  Iccius  was  a  man  *of 
great  influence  among  the  Remi.  10.  One  'of  the  ambas- 
sadors came  to  Caesar.  11.  *If  you  do  not  send  me  help, 
I  cannot  hold  out. 

CHAPTER  VII. 

62.  1.  Caesar  used  the  messengers  as  guides.*  2.  Arch- 
ers and  slingers  were  sent  *as  a  re-inforcement  to  the 
townsmen.  3.  'Could  they  *get  at  all  the  dwellings  ? 
4.  On  the  arrival  of  the  archers,  hope  of  defence  left  the 


34  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  il 

Remi.^     5.  All  the  villages  were  burned.     6.  Three  miles 
off;  more  than  three  miles^  off;  less  than  three  miles*'  off. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

63.  1.  Caesar  had  a  high  reputation  for  valor.  2.  He 
deferred  the  battle.  3.  Our  men  are  not  inferior.  4.  The 
place  was  suitable  ^for  a  cavalry  skirmish.  5.  There  is 
as  much  space  as  a  line  of  battle  can  occupy.  6.  There 
are  ^lateral  slopes  ^in  both  directions.  7.  Near  ^the  ends 
of  the  trenches  redoubts  were  constructed.  8.  Why^  did 
he  place  engines  there  ?  9.  That  the  enemy  might  not 
form  their  line.  10.  Why  did  he  leave  men^  in  camp  ? 
11.  ^To  act  as  a  reserve.  12.  ^If  there  should  be  need, 
they  could  be  brought  up. 

CHAPTER  IX. 

64.  1.  The  army  is  between  the  marsh  and  the  hill. 
2.  They  ^began  to  cross.  3.  Why  did  our  men  wait  ? 
4.  To  attack  the  enemy.  5.  ^There  is  a  contest  between 
our  men  and  the  enemy.  6.  The  cavalry  skirmish  was 
favorable  to  neither^  side."*  7.  ^If  they  can,  they  will 
take  the  redoubt.  8.  ^If  they  could,  they  would  take  the 
redoubt.  9.  They  attempted  to  advance  ^vith  the  design 
of  taking  the  redoubt.  10.  *If  they  cannot  do  this,  they 
will  keep  our  men  from  supplies. 

CHAPTER  X. 

65.  1.  Light -armed  Numidi^ns  were  led  over  the 
bridge.  2.  A  fierce  battle  was  being  fought.  3.  The 
enemy  were  obstructed  in  the  river.     4.  A  great  number 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  35 

of  Numidians  *were  slain.  5.  They  attempted  to  cross 
over  their  bodies.  6.  Hope  of  crossing  the  river  had 
disappointed  them.^  7.  ^Did*  not  our  men  advance  into 
a  worse  i^osition  ?  8.  The  best  thing*  is  for*  each  to  cross 
the  river.  9.  They  decided  to  call  a  council.  10.  They 
assembled  from  all  quarters  to  defend  themselves. 
11.  They  defended  their  own  territories  rather  than 
others'.  12.  He  persuades  them ;  '^they  are  persuaded. 
13.  They  cannot  be  persuaded  *to  wait  longer.  14.  Divi- 
tiacus  is  approaching  the  army. 

CHAPTER  XI. 

66.  1.  They    left^    their    camp    with    great    tumult. 

2.  Everybody  sought  the  first  place.  3.  They  ^got  home 
in  the  second  watch.  4.  *VVhat  did  the  departure  seem 
like  ?  5.  Through  whom  did  Caesar  learn  of  this  move- 
ment*? 6.  *For  what  reason  did  he  keep  his  army  in 
camp  ?  7.  By  whom  was  the  fact  established  ?  8.  Whom 
did  he  put  in  command  of  the  cavalry  ?  9.  A  multitude 
of  the  enemy  were  cut  down  *in  their  flight.  10.  ^Those 
in  the  rear  made  a  stand.  11.  The  leaders  were  *out  of 
danger.     12.  'At  sunset  ^"they  were  ordered  to  stop. 

CHAPTERS   XII.,  XIII. 

67.  1.  On  the  next  day,  the  enemy  recovered*  from 
their  alarm.     2.  The  town  was  destitute  of  defenders. 

3.  He  could  not  take  it,  'although  there  were  few  de- 
fenders. 4.  Sheds  are  *of  use  in  besieging.  5.  They  all 
assembled  in*  the  town.  6.  Caesar  received  as  hostages* 
the  first  men  of  the  state.  7.  The  two  sons  of  the  king 
were  hostages.*    8.  While'  Caesar  was  pitching  his  camp, 


36  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  ii. 

the  elders  came  out  of  the  town.  9.  They  stretched  out 
their  hands  after  their  manner.  10.  ^With  hands  out- 
spread the  women  approached  the  camp. 

CHAPTERS   XIV.,   XV. 

'  68.  1.  I  will  %e  spokesman  in  your  behalf.  2.  The 
iEduans  were  suffering  great  indignities.  3.  I  know 
^how  great  a  loss  you  have  inflicted  on  the  state.  4.  I 
said  ^hat  I  knew  how  great  a  loss  you  %ad  inflicted. 

5.  Show^  the   kindness   %hat   is   characteristic   of   you. 

6.  ^I  beg  of  you  to  show  mercy  toAvards  me.  7.  He  said 
that,  ^out  of  respect  to  Caesar,  ^he  would  spare  them. 
8.  ^"When  the  hostages  were  delivered,  they  collected 
the  arms.  9.  Caesar  "made  inquiries  about  their  habits. 
10.  ^^Traders  have  no  access  to  them.  11.  They  allow  no 
wine  to  be  imported.  12.  By  wine  the  courage  is  en- 
feebled. 13.  They  have  abandoned  their  ancestral  valor. 
14.  They  will  accept  no^^  terms  of  peace. 

CHAPTERS   XVI.,  XVII. 

69.  1.  Where^  have  the  Nervii  encamped  ?  2.  What 
are  they  waiting  for  ?  3.  By  reason  of  age  mei»  are  use- 
less for  fighting.  4.  Into  what  place  had  they  put  the 
women  ?  5.  From  whom  did  Caesar  learn  all  these  things  ? 
6.  Certain  ones  of^  the  surrendered  Belgae  were  marching 
along^  with  Caesar.  7.  They  had  observed  our  army's 
*usual  manner  of  marching.  8.  There  will  be  ^no  trouble 
^in  attacking  the  first  legion.  9.  The  other  legions  are 
a  great  way  off.  10.  ^The  result  will  be  that  ^hey  will 
not  stand  their  ground.  11.  The  hedge  affords  a  defence 
'which  cannot  be  entered.  12.  The  Nervii  did  not  ne- 
glect the  advice- 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  87 

CHAPTERS   XVIII.,   XIX. 

* 

70.  1.  The  river  Sanibre  has  been  mentioned  above. 

2.  The  height  of  the  hill  is  about  *two  hundred  feet. 

3.  Cifisar  sent  ahead  the  cavalry.  4.  The  plan  of  march 
'is  different  from  what  the  Belgse  reported.  5.  Why  did 
he  lead  six  legions  unincumbered  ?  6.  Who  'brought  up 
the   rear?      7.  The   enemy  withdrew  into   the   woods. 

8.  Again  and  again  they  made  attacks  upon  our  men. 

9.  *How   far  did   our  men   venture    to    pursue  them  ? 

10.  Those  who  lay  concealed  in  the  woods  saw  the  bag- 
gage-train. 11.  That  was  the  time  for*  beginning  the 
battle.  12.  With  incredible  swiftness  they  ran  down  to 
the  river. 

CHAPTER  XX. 

71.  1.  ^You  have  everything  to  do  at  once.  2.  ^These 
preparations  were  hindered  by  the  approach  of  the  enemy. 
3.  The  knowledge  and  experience  of  the  soldiers  ''proved 
a  help  in  these  difficulties.  4.  They  know  what  ought* 
to  be  done.  5.  They  prescribed  for  themselves  what 
ought*  to  be  done.  6.  Caesar  forbade  the  lieutenants  to 
leave  their  respective*  legions.  7.  I  shall  not  wait  for 
your  command  any  longer.  8.  Of  myself  I  shall  execute 
what  seems  best. 

CHAPTERS  XXI.,  XXIL 

72.  1.  He  'gave  the  necessary  orders.  2.  For  the  pur- 
pose of  encouraging  the  tenth  legion  he  did  this.  3.  ^Be 
not  disturbed  in  mind.  4.  It  is  the  time  *for  putting  on 
the  ornaments.  5.  ^Having  put  on  their  helmets,  they 
were  ready  for  fighting.     6.  They  are  *not  more  than  a 


38  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  n. 

stone's  throw  off.  7.  ^Some  were  in  one  place,  others  in 
another.  8.  One  was  in  one  place,  another  in  another. 
9.  The  view  was  obstructed  by  intervening  hedges.  10.  So 
great  was  the  inequality  of  things  Hhat  various  events 
of  fortune  followed. 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 

73.  1.  The  soldiers  of  the  tenth  legion  hurled  their 
javelins.  2.  The  Atrebates  were  breathless  Avith  running. 
3.  From  what  place  did  they  drive  them  ?  4.  With  what 
did  they  slay  them  ?  5.  Shall  you  hesitate  to  cross  the 
river  ?  6.  The  enemy  ^renewed  the  fight,  but  were  put 
to  flight.  7.  ^With  whom  have  they  come  in  conflict  ? 
8.  Where  did  they  fight?  9.  Almost  the  whole  camp 
was  exposed.  10.  The  seventh  legion  had  taken  posi- 
tion ^ot  far  from  the  eleventh. 

CHAPTER   XXIV. 

74.  1.  The  light-armed  infantry  were  with^  the  cavalry. 

2.  These  were  routed  at  the  first  onset  of  the  enemy. 

3.  ^here  did  they  retreat  to  ?  4.  The  enemy  met  the 
horsemen  ^face  to  face.  5.  The  camp-followers  went 
forth  to  plunder.  6.  They  looked  back  and  saw  the 
Gauls  in  our  camp.-  7.  They  rushed*  ^some  in  one  direc- 
tion, some  in  another.  8.  The  camp  was  '^ling  up  with 
a  multitude  of  the  enemy.  9.  The  slingers  were  fleeing 
^in  all  directions.  10.  The  legions  were  almost  sur- 
rounded. 

CHAPTER  XXV. 

75.  1.  The  right  wing  was  hard  pressed.  2.  The  sol- 
diers, being  crowded  together,  were  a  hindrance  to  ^one 


FOR   ORAL   TRANSLATION.  89 

another.  3.  Sextius  was  worn  out  by  *many  severe 
wounds.  4.  Not  a  few  abandoned  the  contest.  5.  The 
enemy  did  not  stop  coming  up.  6.  Things  were  in  a 
strait,  *and  no  reserve  could  be  sent  up.  7.  Caesar 
snatched  a  shield  *from  a  soldier.  8.  The  soldiers 
charged*.  9.  His  arrival  inspired  •them  with  hope. 
10.  Everybody  did  his  best. 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 

76.  1.  The  second  legion  halted  near  by.  2.  They 
^faced  about  and  charged  upon  the  enemy.  3.  Caesar  ad- 
vised the  tribunes  to  charge  upon  the  enemy.  4.  They 
rendered  aid  one*  to  another.  5.  They  do  not  fear  'being 
surrounded.  6.  They  will  *make  a  bolder  resistance. 
7.  When  the  battle  was  announced,  the  men  quickened 
their  speed.  8.  The  enemy  saw  them  on  top  of  the  hill. 
9.  *VVhat  is  going  on  in  camp  ?  10.  "How  do  matters 
stand?  11.  He  learned  how  matters  stood.  12.  He 
left  nothing  undone. 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 

77.  1.  The    men    hvere   leaning    upon   their   shields. 

2.  Even  though*  unarmed,  they  encountered  armed  men^. 

3.  The  cavalry  wiped  out  the  disgrace  of  flight  by  valor. 

4.  They  put  themselves   before  the  legionary  soldiers. 

5.  You  put  yourself  ahead  of  me.  6.  The  first  of  them 
fell.  7.  The  others  stood  upon  them  *as  they  lay.  8.  They 
*picked  up  the  javelins  and  threw  them  back.  9.  Not  in 
vain  did  they  clamber  up  the  high  banks.  10.  *We  must 
decide  that  they  did  not  cross  a  broad  river  in  vain. 


40  c^sak:  gallic  war,  book  il 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

78.  1.  The  race  of  the  Nervii  was  reduced  almost  to 
extinction.  2.  We  said  that  the  women  were  placed  Hn 
the  marshes.  3.  There  is  ^no  safety  to  the  vanquished. 
4.  All  that  survived  surrendered  to  Caesar.  5.  All  that 
survive  will  surrender.  6.  There  are  barely  live  hundred 
that  can  bear  arms.  7.  The  senators  were  reduced  from 
five  hundred  to  three.  8.  Caesar  ^had  mercy  on  them. 
9.  ■*!  bid  you  to  refrain^  from  injury.  10.  I  shall  preserve 
you  with  the  greatest  care. 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 

79.  1.  I  have  written  above  about  the  Aduatuci. 
2.  They  came  to  help  the  Nervii.  3.  While  they  were 
^on  the  way,  the  battle  was  announced.  4.  AVhen  the 
battle  was  announced,  they  returned  home.  5.  On  all 
sides  around  there  were  high  cliffs.  6.  Pointed  logs 
were  placed  on  the  wall.  7.  Those  ^parts  of  the  baggage- 
train  that  they  could  not  drive  they  carried.  8.  Now 
they  make^  war,  now  they  make^  peace.  9.  Their  neigh- 
bors harassed  them  for  many  years.  10.  With  the  con- 
sent of  all  this  place  was  selected. 

CHAPTER  XXX. 

80.  1.  Frequent  raids  were  made.  2.  Slight  skirmishes 
were  fought.^  3.  A  tower  was  set  up  a  long  distance  off. 
4.  Why  did  they  ^laugh  at  the  tower  ?  5.  By  what  strength, 
pray,  do  you  expect  to  set  it  up  on  the  wall  ?  6.  It  is 
^so  heavy  that  you  cannot  set  it  up  on  the  wall.  7.  You 
are  men  of  small  stature.     8.  In  comparison  with  the 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  41 

size  of  the  tower  you  are  very  sliort.*  9.  The  tower  was 
*an  object  of  contempt  to  tliem.  10.  Generally  the  Gauls 
are  men  of  great  stature. 

CHAPTER  XXXI. 

81.  1.  It  moved^  and  approached  the  walls.  2.  It  is 
moving*  and  approaching  the  walls.  3.  The  unusual 
api)earance  alarmed  them.  4.  The  Romans  wage  war  by 
divine  aid.  5.  We  give  ourselves  up  to  your  power. 
6.  One  thing  we  beg  and  beseech.  7.  The  Aduatuci  must 
be  spared.  8.  ^l)o  not  rob  us  of  our  arms.  9.  Our  neigh- 
bors envy  us.  10.  *It  is  better  for  us  to  suffer  any  fate 
whatsoever. 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 

82.  1.  It  is  more  in  accordance  with  my  custom  than 
with  your  desert.  2.  If  you  surrender,  I  will  spare  you. 
3.  I  shall  do  what*  I  did  'in  the  case  of  the  Nervii.  4.  Do 
not  inflict  any  injury  upon  the  Roman  people.  5.  We 
are  doing  what*  you  ordered.  6.  Heaps  of  arms  were 
thrown  from  the  walls.  7.  It  was  afterwards  found  out 
that  they  had  kept  back  a  third  part.  8.  *Let  us  have 
peace. 

CHAPTER  XXXIII. 

83.  1.  The  gates  were  shut.  2.  The  soldiers  went  out 
of  the  town.  3.  Why  did  Caesar  order  the  gates  to  be 
shut  ?  4.  They  had  formed  this  plan  before.  5.  *Are  our 
men  'going  to  lead  off  the  guards  ?  6.  They  made  shields 
out  of  bark.  7.  The  enemy  *fight  as  fiercely  as  brave 
men  ought  to  fight.     8.  They  fought  as  fiercely  as  brave 


42    ,         c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  n. 

men  ought  ^to  have  fought.  9.  ^From  what  place  are  the 
men  hurling  weapons  ?  10.  ^How  many  men  were  slain  ? 
11.  Nobody  defended  them  any  longer.  12.  By  nighty 
towards  evening ;  in  the  third  watch ;  on  the  next  day. 

CHAPTER  XXXV. 

84.  1.  All  Gaul  was  subdued.  2.  The  nations  that 
lived^  beyond  the  Rhine  sent  ambassadors.  3.  They 
promised  Ho  give  hostages.  4.  These  embassies  returned 
to  him^  the  next  summer.  5.  Caesar  promised  ^o  hasten 
to  Italy.  6.  He  promised  ^o  lead  the  legions  into  winter 
quarters.  7.  ''In  consequence  of  Csesar's  despatches  the 
senate  decreed  a  thanksgiving.  8.  For  fifteen  days ;  in 
the  beginning  of  summer ;  before  that  time. 


FOE,  WRITTEN   TRANSLATION. 

CHAPTERS  I.— V. 

85.  1.  They  are  afraid  that  Hf  all  Gaul  is  subdued, 
the  army  of  the  Roman  people  ^will  winter  among  the 
Germans. 

2.  The  reasons  ^for  conspiring,  were :  first,  ^because 
they  were  unwilling  ^hat  our  army  should  be  led  among 
them^ ;  secondly,  ^because  they  were  indignant  that  royal 
power  was  commonly  usurped  by  the  more  powerful. 

3.  ^As  soon  as  he  learned  '*what  was  going  on,  he  gave 
it  in  charge  to  Quintus  Pedius  *to  prepare  a  supply  of 


FOR  WRITTEN  TRANSLATION.  43 

grain,  and  in  the  beginning  of  summer  he  sent  an  ambas- 
sador ho  inform  the  Senones  **^hat  he  had  moved  his 
camp. 

4.  Concerning  the  states  that  were  in  arms  Caesar 
"gained  the  following  information:  that  the  Gauls  had 
been  prevented  from  entering  within  the  territories  of 
tlie  Belgae ;  that  from  this  fact  it  resulted  that  they  "did 
not  know  "how  large  a  multitude  had  settled  there;  that 
each  had  promised  twenty  thousand  picked  men'^ ;  and" 
that  the  Nervii,  who  were  furthest  off,  were  the  most 
eruel. 

5.  "After  Caesar  had  taken  leave  of  the  ambassadors 
with  kind  words,  he  ordered  everything  to  be  done 
promptly  ^so  that  the  bands  of  the  enemy  might  be 
kept  apart. 

CHAPTERS  VI.— XI. 

86.  1.  Caesar,  ^having  waited  a  little  while  near  Bibrax, 
-a  town  which,  as  was  indicated  by  smoke,  was  less  than 
seven  miles  off,  and  having  devastated  the  fields,  has- 
tened with  all  his  forces  towards  the  town  in  order  to 
give*  relief  to  Iccius. 

2.  When'  he  had  made  a  trial  •to  see  what  his  men 
could  do  in  a .  cavalry  skirmish,  he  found  that  they  were 
not  inferior  to  the  enemy ;  and  ^having  pitched  his  camp 
oh  a  hill  ^vhich  rose  gradually  from  the  plain,  and  'hav- 
ing  made  a  trench  at  each  side  of  the  hill,  at  right  angles 
with  it,  he  formed  his  line  in  front  of  the  camp. 

3.  In  the  mean  time  the  enemy  attempted***  to  cross  a 
marsh  that  was  between  their  camp  and  ours,  "with  the 
design  of  attacking  our  men.  The  latter,"  attempting 
with    the   greatest   boldness   to  surround  them   while" 


44  C^SAR:    GALLIC   WAR,    BOOK   II. 

obstructed  in  the  marsh,  pushed  forward  into  a  more 
unfavorable  position,  and  were  repulsed  by  a  multitude 
of  weapons.  When  they  found  that  their  expectation 
"in  regard  to  surrounding  the  enemy  had  deceived  them, 
they  called  a  council.  J 

4.  Csesar,  having  been  informed  by  spies  that  the 
enemy  had  determined  to  abandon^^  their  camp,  sent  an 
officer  ahead  ^^o  follow  them  up.  The  cavalry  ^having 
pursued  them  for  several  miles,  attacked  their  rear. 
They,  however, ^^  stood  firm,  and  valiantly  sustained  the 
attack;  but  ^^hose  in  front,  hearing  the  shouting,  fled 
in  confusion. 

CHAPTERS  XII.— XVII. 

87.  1.  The  town  of  Noviodunum,  to  which  they  had 
retreated,^  was  in  the  territories  of  the  Suessiones.  ^In 
order  to  storm  this  town  Caesar  began  to  throw  up  a 
mound,  and  to  set  up  towers,  which  movements*  so 
alarmed  the  Grauls  that  they  sent  ambassadors  to  him. 
*When  he  had  received  their  hostages,  and  all  the  arms 
had  been  given  up,  he  hastened  towards  another  town, 
which  quickly  surrendered. 

2.  ^After  the  dismissal  of  the  troops,  Divitiacus  said, 
in  behalf  of  the  Bellovaci,  that  they  had  been  forced  to 
undergo  'all  sorts  of  insults  :  that  those  Vho  understood 
the  designs  of  the  leaders  begged  of  Caesar  to  ®show  his 
characteristic  kindness  not  only  towards  them  but  also 
towards  all  the  Belgse :  and  that  they  had  been  accus- 
tomed to  maintain  whatever^"  wars  befell  them  by  the 
aid  and  resources  of  the  Belgae. 

3.  Caesar  next"  made  inquiries  about  the  nature  and 
customs  of  the  Nervii,  and  received  the  following  infor 


FOR   WRITTEN  TRANSLATION.  46 

mation :  that  they  were  men  of  great  valor,  ^because  they 
allowed  no  wine  to  be  imported,  ®by  which  they  thought 
their  courage  was  enfeebled. 

4.  Certain  men  of  the  Belgae  who  were  marching  along 
with  Caesar  thought  that,  'because  a  large  quantity"  of , 
baggage  was  between  the  several  legions  of  Caesar's  army, 
^he  Nervii  would  have  no  trouble  in  attacking  the  first 
legion  "as  it  came  into  camp. 

CHAPTERS  XVIII.— XXIII. 

88.  1.  The  Nervii  had  selected  as  a  place  for  their 
camp  a  hill  wooded  in  the  upper  part,  within  which 
woods  they  kept  themselves  secreted;  and  when  they 
saw  the  first  ^part  of  our  baggage-train,  *which  was  the 
time  agreed  upon  *for  making  an  attack  upon  the  cavalry, 
they  suddenly  rushed  forth  from  the  woods  *in  full  force. 

2.  In  the  ^battle  with  the  Nervii,  which  ^ook  place 
between  the  two  hills  where^  the  river  Sambre  flows,  the 
Roman  soldiers  were  much  embarrassed  on  account  of 
the  *quick  movements  of  the  enemy.  Many  of  *the  former 
'"were  busy  fortifying  the  camp,  and  not  a  few  were  a 
"considerable  distance  away  seeking  materials.  Caesar, 
however,  urged  them  '*to  remember  their  former  valor, 
and  bravely  sustain  the  enemy's  charge. 

3.  The  army  could  not  be  formed  as  the  methods  of 
military  science  required,  because  the  character  of  the 
ground  was  such"  that  the  view  was  obstructed  by 
hedges,  and  regular"  reserves  could  not  be  posted ;  nor 
could  Caesar  alone  give"  all  the  necessary  orders.  After 
the  Atrebates  had  been  driven  into  the  river,  our  men 
slew  with  their  swords  a  large  part  of  them  '•as  they 
attempted  to  cross. 


46  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  il 

CHAPTERS   XXIV.— XXVIII. 

89.  1.  The  camp-followers  who  had  gone  out  by^  the 
decuman  gate  to  plunder,  when  they  heard  the  shouts  of 
the  light-armed  infantry,  were  panic-stricken,^  and  rushed 
^some  in  one  direction,  some  in  another.  At  the  same 
time  Caesar  was  informed  that  the  centurions  of  the  fifth 
cohort  had  been  slain,  the  standard-bearer  killed,  the 
standard  lost,  and  almost  all  the  centurions  of  the  other 
cohorts  either  wounded  or  slain,  and  that  the  ^situation 
was  so  critical  that  *our  cause  was  already  despaired  of. 

2.  He  at  once  proceeded  to  the  front  of  the  line  and 
encouraged  the  soldiers,  and  they  with  renewed  spirit 
delayed  a  little  the  onset  of  the  enemy.  Titus  Labienus, 
when  he  learned  from  messengers  in  how  great  danger 
the  camp  was  involved,  sent  two  legions  Ho  the  rescue. 

3.  When  the  enemy  saw  that  the  cavalry  were  putting 
themselves  before  the  legionary  soldiers,  and  that  even 
'the  wounded  men  were  renewing  the  battle,  they  dis- 
played the  greatest  valor  even  in  the  last  hope  of  safety. 

4.  When  many  of  them  had  fallen,  those  who  survived* 
piled  up  the  dead  bodies  of  their  comrades,^  and  fought 
from  them  as  from  a  mound.  The  elders,  thinking^**  that 
Caesar,  who  was"  always  merciful  to  the  vanquished, 
would  spare  them,  surrendered  to  him. 

CHAPTERS  XXIX.— XXXV. 

90.  1.  The  Aduatuci,  who  had  come  ^to  help  the  Nervii, 
when  they  heard  of  this  battle,  went  home  again^  and 
withdrew  into  one  town,  which  had  high  precipices  all 
around.     Caesar  constructed  at  a  distance  from  the  town 


FOR  WRITTEN  TRANSLATION.  47 

a  high  tower,  which  the  townsmen'  thought  the  Romans, 
being*  men  of  so  little  stature,  could  not  move. 

2.  But  when  it  'began  to  approach  the  town,  they  were 
so  alarmed  that  they  sent  ambassadors  to  Caesar,  who 
spoke  after  this  fashion:  "•they  had  not  thought  that 
the  Romans  could  move  machines  of  so  great  weight; 
they  yielded'  to  his  power;  one  thing  they  begged, — 
*that  'he  would  show  his  customary  kindness,  and  spare 
them."  Caesar  replied  that  in  the  case  of  the  Nervii  he 
had  ordered  their  neighbors  not  to  do  injury  to  them, 
and  that  he  would  spare  them^°,  "if  they  should  surren- 
der before  throwing  their  arms  into  the  ditch. 

3.  The  townsmen  ^^as  a  last  resort  suddenly  made  a 
sortie  from  the  town  in  the  night.  Our  men,  because 
they  supposed  the  enemy  would  fight  very  fiercely, 
quickly  made  signals  by  fires,  and  all  from  the  nearest 
redoubts  ran  ^*to  the  spot  where  they  thought  the  enemy 
were,  slew  three  thousand  men,  and  drove  the  rest  into 
the  town. 

4.  At  the  same  time  Crassus  informed  Caesar  that  he 
had  reduced  all  the  states  that  border  on  the  ocean  into 
the  power  of  the  Roman  people.  After  all  these  achieve- 
ments, Caesar  hastened  to  Italy. 


BOOK  III. 


FOR   ORAL   TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTER   I. 

91.  1.  What  reason  ^had  Caesar  ^for  setting  out  for 
Italy  ?  2.  He  wished  to  open  a  road  over  the  Alps. 
3.  ^He  permitted  Galba  to  winter  in  those  places.  4.  Am- 
bassadors were  sent  from  all  quarters  to  Galba.  5.  What 
Vas  the  name  of  the  village  in  which  he  passed  the 
winter  ?  6.  A  river  divided  the  town  into  two  parts, 
^one  of  which  was  assigned  to  the  legion. 


CHAPTER  II. 

92.  1.  The  mountains  which  overhang  are  held  by  the 
Seduni  and  Veragri.  2.  The  Gauls  to  whom  he  had 
assigned  one  part  of  the  village  all  departed  by  night. 
3.  It  happened  ^that  they  suddenly,  renewed  the  war,  and 
crushed  the  legion.  4.  The  two  cohorts,  ^and  those  not 
very  full,  the  Gauls  despised.  5.  AVhen  we  ^charge  down 
into  the  valley,  they  ^cannot  withstand  even  our  first 
assault.  6.  ^And  besides  *we  have  persuaded  ourselves 
that  when  we  hurl  our  weapons  ^hey  will  depart. 


FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION.  49 

CHAPTER   III. 

93.  1.  The  work  on  the  winter  quarters  has  not  been 
completely  finished.  2.  ^Sufficient  provision  for  supplies 
has  not  been  made.  3.  ^It  is  impossible  that  aid  should 
come.  4.  Supplies  cannot  be  brought  up  ^cause  the 
roads  are  blocked.  5.  Let  us  make  a  sortie,  and  hasten 
to  ^a  place  of  safety  by  the  same  roads  by  which  we  came. 
6.  *A  majority  determined  to  abandon  the  baggage  and 
hasten  to  a  place  of  safety. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

94.  1.  'There  is  hardly  time  for  giving  a  signal.  2.  Our 
men  at-  first  from  their  higher  position  sent  no^  weapon 
without  effect.  3.  When  the  enemy  are  wearied  with 
'long  fighting  they  withdraw,  and  Afresh  men  take  their 
places.  4.  Our  men  are  so  few  that  they  cannot*  with- 
draw from  the  fight,  even*  when  they  are  tired.  5.  *No 
chance  is  given  them  of  doing  any  of  these  things. 
G.  They  cannoc*  leave  the  place  where  they  stand'  even* 
when  they  are  wounded. 

CHAPTER  V. 

95.  1.  Not  only  did  the  enemy  press  on  more  vigor- 
ously, but  they  even  began  to  fill  up  the  trenches.  2.  In 
the  'battle  with  the  Nervii,  Sextius  was  exhausted  with 
wounds.  3.  The  only  hope  of  safety  lies  'in  making  a 
sortie  and  trying  the  last  resource.  4.  Stop  the  fight, 
and  only  pick  up  the  spent  weapons.  5.  Refresh  your- 
selves from  your  toil,  and  then  'make  a  sortie  from  the 
camp. 


50  C^SAK:    GALLIC   WAK,    BOOK   III. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

96.  1.  You  leave  us  no^  opportunity  either^  of  learning 
what  is  doing,  or^  of  ^collecting  our  wits.  2.  Do  you 
^entertain  the  hope  of  slaying  all  your  enemies  ?  3.  Out 
of  more  than  three  thousand  men  *one  third  were  slain. 
4.  Galba  had  come  with  one^  purpose,  but  saw  that  he 
had  met  with  a  different^  state  of  things.  5.  After  this 
battle  was  fought,  there  was  a  great  lack  of  arms  and 
supplies. 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

97.  1.  The  influence  of  the  Veneti  is  very  great  because 
they  hold  all  the  sea-coast.  2.  All  who  are  accustomed 
to  use  ships  are  tributaries  of  the  Veneti.  3.  Velanius 
and^  Silius  were  retained.  4.  We  ^had  rather  recover  our 
hostages  than  remain  in  slavery  to^  the  Eomans.  5.  If 
you  wish  to  recover  your  ambassadors,  send  back  our 
hostages  to  us. 

CHAPTER  IX. 

98.  1.  Meanwhile  galleys  were  constructed,  rowers 
organized,  and  sailors  and  pilots  collected.  2.  We  know 
how  great  a  crime  we  ^have  been  guilty  of.  3.  Consider- 
ing the  magnitude  of  the  danger,  let  us  build  ^as  many 
ships  as  possible.  4.  Although  they  ^were  strongest  in 
ships,  still  everything  turned  out  contrary  to  expecta- 
tion. 5.  Navigation  is  a  very  different  thing  in  the  river 
Loire  *from  what  it  is  on  the  broad  ocean. 

CHAPTER  X. 

99.  1.  The  difficulties  of  waging  war  were  very  great ; 
nevertheless  the  conspiracy  of  so  many  states  ^prompted 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  61 

Caesar  to  undertake  it.     2.  If  we  overlook  this  revolt, 
the   Morini  will   think  *they  may  do  the  same  thing. 

3.  Since  all  the  Gauls  are  quickly  excited  to  war,  the 
army  must  be  distributed  among  several  communities. 

4.  Caesar  thought  that  'before  the  Gauls  should  be  ex- 
cited to  war,  *he  ought  to  divide  his  army. 

CHAPTER  XI. 

100.  1.  He  gave  it  in  charge  to  Labienus  ^to  hold  the 
Remi  to  their  allegiance.  2.  *That  the  Aquitani  might 
not  send  auxiliaries,  Crassus  set  out  for  that  region. 
,3.  Sabinus  took  care  *that  the  Unelli  and  Lexovii  should 
be  kept  apaii;.  4.  A  fleet  of  Gallic  ships  was  ordered  to 
assemble.  5.  Caesar  himself  hastened  to  the  sea-coast 
with  all  the  infantry. 

CHAPTER  XII. 

101.  1.  There  is  no*  access  to  the  towns  either*  on 
foot  or'  by  ships.  2.  Caesar  shut  off  the  sea  by  dikes  and 
dams,  which'  he  made  level  with  the  walls  of  the  town. 
3.  They  removed  their  goods  the  more  easily  because 
they  had  an  abundance  of  ships.  4.  ^During  a  great  part 
of  the  summer  Caesar  was  detained  by  storms.  5.  *At 
ebb-tide  the  ships  are  wrecked  on  the  shoals. 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

102.  1.  The  ships  are  made  flat-bottomed,  that  they 
may  the  more  easily  encounter  the  shoals.  2.  They  are 
made  wholly'  of  oak  *so  as  to  endure  the  buffeting  of  the 
waves.  3.  They  used  timbers  a  foot*  thick,  spikes  of  the 
thickness  of  one's^  thumb,  iron  cables  instead  of  ropes^ 


52  C^SAE:   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  IIL 

and*  hides  for  sails.  4.  Our  ships  could  neither  bear  a 
storm  easily  nor  stay  in  shoal  water  safely.  5.  ^When 
these  are  left  by  the  tide,  rocks  and  reefs  are  greatly  to 
be  feared.^ 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

103.  1.  So  much  labor  is  spent  in  vain,  for  we  can 
neither  check  the  enemy's  flight  nor  injure  them.  2.  ^It 
is  not  quite  clear  to  me  ^what  I  am  to  do  or  what  method 
of  battle  I  am  to  adopt.  3.  Their  ships  cannot  ^be  in- 
jured with  our  beaks,  because  they  are  made  of  oak. 
4.  When  the  sails  and  rigging  were  torn  away,  ''their 
ships  were  of  no  use  to  them.  5.  Our  men  were  superior 
in  valor  because  Caesar  ^was  watching  them. 

CHAPTER  XV. 

104.  1.  -^Three  and  even  four  ships  at  a  tiine  sur- 
rounded each  one  of  the  enemy's.  2.  After  the  barba- 
rians observed  our  men  boarding^  their  ships,  they  sought 
safety  in  flight.  3.  Since  they  found  no  relief  for  this^, 
they  turned  their  ships  about.  4.  The  sudden  calm  was 
extremely  opportune  *for  pursuing  them  singly.  5.  ^The 
battle  raged  from  about  nine  o'clock  till  three. 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

105.  1.  Whatever  vessels  we  have  anywhere  have  all 
been  collected  in  this  place.  2.  We  have  neither  ^any 
place  to  retreat  to  nor  %ny  means  of  defending  our 
towns.  3.  *They  must  be  punished  severely  in  order 
that  they  may  in  future  regard  the  rights  of  ambassa- 
dors. 


FOB  ORAL  TRANSLATION.  53 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

106.  1.  Viridovix  collected  large  forces  from  the 
states  which  had  revolted.  2.  Hope  of  plunder*  had 
called  out  a  large  number  of  robbers  from  all  parts  of 
Gaul.  3.  Every  day  Viridovix  offered  Sabinus  a  chance 
to  fight.  4.  In  the  absence  of  Caesar,  Sabinus  was  unwill- 
ing to  fight  except  ^on  even  terms.  5.  A  lieutenant 
''ought  not  to  fight  unless  some  favorable  chance  is 
offered. 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

107.  1.  Sabinus  persuaded  a  certain  shrewd  man  to 
go  over  to  the  enemy  as*  a  deserter.  2.  This  man,  a 
Gaul,  told  them  that  Sabinus  on  the  next  night  would 
lead  his  army  out  of  camp.  3.  The  opportunity  of  lead- 
ing the  army  out  of  camp  ought^  not  to  be  thrown  away. 

4.  Men  generally  'are  glad  to  believe  what^  they  wish. 

5.  *They  did  not  proceed  towards  the  camp  until  they 
had  collected  fagots  *to  fill  up  the  trench  with. 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

108.  1.  They  hastened  with  great  speed,  *in  order 
that  the  Romans  might  not  rally  and  arm  themselves. 
2.  When  they  ^got  to  the  camp  all  out  of  breath,  Sabinus 
gave  %is  men  the  signal  *whieh  they  desired.  3.  It 
happened  that  our  men  made  a  sortie  from  two  gates. 
4.  On  account  of  the  valor  of  the  soldiers,  not  even  one 
of  the  enemy  escaped.  6.  As  the  Gauls  undertake  wars 
Svith  eagerness,  so  they  are  by  no  meajis  resolute  in 
bearing  defeat.* 


54  C^SAR:   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  HI. 

CHAPTER  XX. 

109.  1.  At  about  the  same  time  Publiiis  Crassus  was 
waging  war  in  those  places  where  the  army  of  Valerius 
had  been  defeated.  2.  Mallius  fled  from  the  same  place 
^after  losing  his  baggage-train.  3.  When  he  had  arrived 
there  and  learned  that  it  was  the  place  where  Valerius 
had  been  killed  a  few  years  before,  he  used''  no  ordinary 
diligence. 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

110.  1.  Since  the  safety  of  all  Aquitania  lies^  in  our 
valor,  let  us  not  turn  our  backs.  2.  What  can  they  do 
with  ^a  mere  boy  for  a  leader  ?  3.  They  wish  ^o  show 
what  they  can  effect  without  their  general.  4.  Some- 
times they  made  sorties,  and  sometimes  they  worked 
mines  up  to  the  wall.  5.  ^Owing  to  the  watchfulness  of 
our  men,  they  could  accomplish  nothing  with  mines. 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

111.  1.  These   devoted  followers   are  called  soldurii. 

2.  They  enjoy  all  the  blessings  of  life  *in  common  with 
those  to  whose  friendship  they  have  devoted  themselves. 

3.  If  anything  should  happen  to  him  to  whose  friendship 
a  soldurius  has  devoted  himself,  he  would  not  refuse^  to 
die.  4.  Nor  has  any  one  been  found  ^so  far  *who  has 
refused  to  commit  suicide.  5.  ^Although  they  were 
driven  back  into  the  town,  nevertheless  they  enjoyed 
the  same  terms  of  surrender. 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 

112.  1.  The  town  was  taken  ^a  few  days  after  they 
arrived  there.     2.  Ambassadors  were   summoned  from 


FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION.  55 

those  states  which  belonged  to  Hither  Spain.*  3.  Cras- 
sus  could  not  easily  separate  his  forces,  whereas*  the 
enemy  could  roam  about,  and  block  the  roads,  and  leave 
a  ^sufficient  garrison  for  the  camp.  4.  Since  the  number 
of  the  enemy  was  increasing  day  by  day,  he  thought  that 
he  must  not  hesitate  to  engage  in  battle.  5.  Learning* 
that  the  whole  council  *liad  the  same  feeling,  he  set 
the  next  day  for  the  battle. 

CHAPTER   XXIV. 

113.  1.  Let  us  wait  'to  see  what  plan  the  enemy 
adopts.  2.  I  think  it  is  safer  to  form  a  double  line  and 
put  the  auxiliaries  in  the  centre  of  the  line.  3.  The 
enemy  thought  that,  *if  the  roads  should  be  blockaded, 
they  could  win  the  victory  without  receiving^  any  wound. 
4.  On  account  of  the  delay  of  the  enemy,  our  soldiers 
were  more  eager  to  fight.  5.  *We  must  no  longer  delay 
going  to  the  enemy's  camp. 

CHAPTERS  XXV.,  XXVI. 

114.  1.  While  some  were  supplying  stones  and  weap- 
ons for  the  fighters,  others  were  bringing  sods  for  the 
mound.  2.  The  enemy  fought*  steadily  and  hurled 
weapons  from  the  rampart  *with  good  effect.  3.  They 
led  the  horsemen  around  by  a .  longer  route  that  they 
might  not  be  seen  by  the  enemy.  4.  They  arrived  at  the 
decuman  gate  and  demolished  the  walls  before'  the  enemy 
could  find  out  what  was  going  on.  5.  It  is  clear  that  out 
of  fifty  thousand  men  hardly  a  fourth  part  was  left. 

CHAPTERS  XXVIL—XXIX. 

115.  1.  Summer  is  now  almost  gone  and  winter  is  at 
hand.    2.  The  Morini  carried  on  war  4n  a  very  different 


56  C^SAR:   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  III. 

manner  from  Caesar.  3.  When  Caesar  arrived  at  the 
forest  to  which  they  ^had  betaken  themselves,  he  began 
to  fortify  a  camp.  4.  Having  made  an  attack  upon  onr 
men,  they  were  driven  back  into  the  woods.  5.  Caesar 
cut  down  the  woods  and  piled  up  the  timber  for  a  rampart. 


FOE  WEITTEN  TEANSLATIOISr. 


CHAPTERS   I.— VI. 

116.  1.  When  Galba  had  been  sent  towards  the  Alps 
^for  the  purpose  of  opening  a  road  over  those  very  high 
mountains,  ^he  had  permission,  ^if  he  thought  it  neces- 
sary, to  go  into  winter  quarters  in  a  valley  which  lay 
near  the  river.     In  this  valley  was  a  village. 

2.  The  Gauls  who  lived  there,  despising*  G-alba's  legion, 
'TDecause  two  cohorts  had  been  detached  to  procure  sup- 
plies, and  thinking'^  that  the  rest  of  the  legion  could  not 
withstand  an  attack,  withdrew  from  the  village  by  night, 
and  took  position  on  the  mountain,  whence  they  might 
charge  down  into  the  valley  and  easily  overpower  the 
whole  legion.  Galba,  seeing^  the  heights  covered  with 
armed  men,  and  knowing^  that  his  fortifications  were  not 
completed,  quickly  called  a  council  for  the  purpose  of 
getting  the  opinions  of  his  officers. 

3.  ^A  majority  decided  to  stay  where  they  were  and 
defend  the  camp.  At  a  given  signal  the  enemy  began  to 
hurl  stones  and  javelins  upon  the  rampart.  Our  men  at 
first  ®made  a  brave  resistance,  but  on  account  of  their 


FOR    WRITTEN    TRANSLATION.  57 

small    number  were   unable  to  leave  the  fight  to  rest 
themselves. 

4.  At  last  'matters  came  to  such  a  pass,  *°after  the 
battle  had  raged  for  more  than  six  hours,  that  Galba 
directed  his  men  to  try  the  last  resource,  make  a  sortie 
from  all  the  gates,  and  leave  the  enemy  no  chance  to 
collect  their  wits.  Thus  those  who  had  entertained  the 
hope  of  crushing  Galba's  legion  were  themselves  sur- 
rounded and  killed. 

CHAPTERS  VII.— XII. 

117.  1.  A  new  war  arose  in  Gaul,  ^the  cause  of  which 
was  that  the  Veneti,  who  lived  on  the  searcoast,  had 
detained  two  Roman  ambassadors,  thinking  that  through 
them  they  should  recover  their  own  hostages,  whom 
Crassus  held.  They  induced  their  neighbors  to  detain 
two  other  ambassadors,  and  to  do  nothing  Without  the 
general  consent. 

2.  *Owing  to  the  nature  of  their  position,  and  to  their 
knowledge  of  naval  affairs,  they  trusted  that  the  Romans, 
who  neither  had  any  supply  of  ships  nor  were  acquainted 
with  the  places  where  the  war  ^would  have  to  be  carried 
on,  would  give  up  the  hostages  and  depart  from  those 
regions. 

3.  Although*  Caesar  was  aware  of  the  difficulties  of 
waging  war  in  pliices  where  towns  were  situated  on 
extreme  points  of  land  and  afforded*  no  access  to  an  army 
except  in  ships,  nevertheless,  'the  wrong  done  by  detain- 
ing hostages,  and  the  conspiring  of  so  many  states,  and 
especially  *the  fear  that  other  states  might  conspire 
against  him  urged  him  to  this  war.  Accordingly  he  dis- 
tributed his  army  among  the  states  which  had  not  yet 


58  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  in. 

conspired    with   the   Veneti,    and   immediately   ordered 
ships  to  be  built  and  supplies  to  be  brought  together. 


CHAPTERS  XIII.— XVII. 

118.  1.  The  Gallic  ships  were  of  so  great  solidity^ 
that  ^they  could  not  be  injured  by  the  beaks  of  our 
ships ;  and  their  height  was  so  great  that  weapons  could 
not  easily  be  ^thrown  to  them  with  effect.  Because  of 
their  height,  too,''  the  weapons  sent  by  the  enemy  fell 
more  heavily  upon  our  men. 

2.  Nevertheless,  by  means  of  sharpened  hooks  attached 
to  long  poles,  the  ropes  which  fastened  the  yards  to  the 
masts  were  cut  off,  and  the  yards  fell ;  and  thus  ^the  sails 
became  useless.  Then  our  men  ^would  board  the  ship, 
and  by  their  superior  valor  overpower  the  barbarians. 
The  latter,  since  they  could  find  no  remedy  for  this 
^mode  of  attack,  hastened  to  flee,  but  a  calm  suddenly 
came  on  so  that  they  could  not  stir^  from  the  spot. 

3.  Almost  all  the  ships  were  taken  by  the  Romans. 
Having  lost  their  ships,  the  Veneti  ^had  no  means  of 
defending  their  towns,  and  so  were  compelled  to  sur- 
render to  Csesar,  who  ^^'punished  them  "with  the  utmost 
severity. 

4.  While  these  things  were  going  on,  Viridovix,  who 
was  at  the  head  of  all  the  states  that  had  revolted,  ^^col- 
lected a  large  army  of  desperate  men  from  all  parts  of 
Gaul,  and  offered  battle  to  Quintus  Titurius  Sabinus, 
Caesar's  lieutenant;  but  he  kept  himself  in  camp,  ^'^be- 
cause  the  commander-in-chief  was  absent. 


FOR  WRITTEN    TRANSLATION.  59 


CHAPTERS  XVIII.— XXII. 

119.  1.  ^By  means  of  a  suitable  person,  who  went  over 
to  the  enemy's  camp  as  a  deserter,  Sabinus  confirmed  the 
impression  of  his  cowardice,  and  *gave  the  enemy  to 
understand  that  he  was  'going  to  withdraw  his  army 
secretly  from  camp,  and  escape  if  he  could. 

2.  When  they  heard  that,  they  all  exclaimed  that  *they 
must  proceed  to  Sabinus's  camp,  and  thither  they  has- 
tened with  such  speed  that  they  got  there  quite  out  of 
breath;  and  *owing  to  their  fatigue,  ''as  well  as  to  the 
valor  of  our  soldiers  and  their  practice  in  former  battles, 
they  were  unable  to  bear  even  our  first  charge. 

3.  When  they  had  'turned  in  flight,  our  men  followed 
them  up  and  slew  a  large  number.  A  new  war  now  arose 
in  Aquitania,  —  which,  as  has  been  said,  is  a  third  part 
of  Gaul — whither  Crassus  had  been  sent  to  lead  an  army 
against  the  Sontiates. 

4.  A  long  and  fierce  battle  was  fought,  because*  the 
Sontiates  relied  upon  former  victories  and  thought  that 
the  safety  of  Aquitania  lay  in  their  valor,  while*  the 
Uomans  desired  to  show  what  they  could  accomplish 
without  their  general.  Crassus,  having  slain  a  large 
number,  attacked  their  town,  and  many  surrendered. 
While  they  were  delivering  their  arms,  Adiatunnus 
made  a  sortie  from  another  part  of  the  town,  but  was 
driven  back. 

CHAPTERS  XXIII.— XXIX. 

120.  1.  The  Aquitanians,  thinking  that  they  could 
easily  drive  the  Romans  from  their  boundaries,  if  all  the 
states  should  conspire  and  gather  troops,  send  aiubas- 


60  C^SAR:    gallic   war,    book   III. 

sadors  in  all  directions.  Ee-inforcements  are  summoned 
even  from  Hither  Spain.  ^  Leadei'S  are  selected  from  the 
old^  troops  of  Quintus  ^rtorii\^  who  understood  the 
Roman  way^  of  carryu^  on  war,  and  the  number  of 
the  enemy  increased  day  by  day. 

2.  When  these  facts  were  reported  to  Crassus,  he 
determined  to  make  an  attack  upon  the  enemy's  camp 
the  next  day.  At  daybreak  the  soldiers  began,  some  to 
fill  the  trenches  and  others  to  hurl  weapons  upon  the 
rampart.     The  enemy  fought  steadily  and  fearlessly.^ 

3.  At  length  some  horsemen,  *who  had  made  a  circuit 
of  the  camp,  reported  to  Crassus  that  there  was  an  easy 
way  of  access  to  the  camp  ^in  the  rear.  A  few  cohorts 
were  quickly  led  around  the  camp  by  a  long  route,  so 
that  they  might  not  be  seen  by  the  enemy,  and  having 
broken  down  the  wall,  they  halted  right^  in  the  enemy's 
camp  before  these  knew  Vhat  the  matter  was.  Thus, 
surrounded  on  all  sides,  the  enemy  gave  up  all  hope  and 
sought  safety  in  flight. 

4.  At  about  the  same  time  Caesar  led  his  army  among 
the  Morini  and  Menapii,  who  withdrew  into  the  forests 
and  swamps,  whence  they  made  attacks  upon  our  forces. 
Caesar  determined  to  cut  down  the  forests,  but  on  account 
of  the  storms  which  ensued,  he  was  ^obliged  to  stop  work 
and  put  his  army  into  winter  quarters. 


FOR  ORAL   TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTER   I. 

121.  1.  There  are  one  hundred  cantons,  from  each*  of 
which  a  thousand  armed  men  are  led  out  to  war  every 
year.  2.  The  latter^  stay  at  home  and  subsist  on  milk 
and  flesh,  while*  the  former*  are  under*  arms.  3.  Since 
the  boys  are  not  trained  to  any  duty,  they  do  nothing  at 
all  against  their  will.  4.  On  account  of  their  daily  exer- 
cise they  become*  men  of  extraordinary*  power.  5.  The 
hides  with  which  they  are  clothed  are  so  scant'  that  a 
great  part  of  the  body  is  exposed. 

CHAPTERS   II.,  III. 

122.  1.  The  Grermans  allow  traders  to  come  among 
them,  in  order  that  they  may  sell  what  they  take*  in  war. 
2.  The  Gauls  take  particular  delight  in  their  horses,  but 
the  Germans  use  small  and  ill-shaped  ones.*  3.  And* 
they  think  that  nothing*  is  more  disgraceful  than  to  use 
housings.  4.  However  few  they  are,  they  dare  to  attack 
any  number  whatever  of  effeminate*  Gauls.  5.  Although* 
the  Ubii  are  'of  the  same  race,  nevertheless  they  are 
more  refined  than  the  other  Germans. 


62  C^SAR:    GALLIC   WAR,    BOOK   IV. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

123.  1.  The  Menapii,  alarmed  at  the  approach  of  the 
Usipetes  and  Tencteri,  stationed  garrisons  on  this  side 
of  the  Rhine.  2.  Having  tried  ^every  resource,  they 
pretended  to  return  to  their  own  abodes.  3.  They  were 
unable  to  cross  the  Ehine  on  account  of  the  lack  of 
vessels.  4.  -Before  crossing  the  river,  they  seized  all  the 
vessels  of  the  Menapii.  o.  They  crossed  the  Rhine 
^before  the  Menapii,  who  were  on  this  side  of  the  river, 
were  informed. 

CHAPTERS  v.,  VI. 

124:.  1.  ^No  confidence  should  be  placed  in  the  Gauls, 
because  of  their  fickleness.^  2.  Travellers  are  compelled 
even  against  their  will  to  disclose  what  they  have  heard 
about  everything.  3.  What  regions  have  you  come 
from,  and  what  have  you  learned  there  ?  4.  They  often 
have^  to  repent  on  the  spot  of  schemes  which  they  enter 
into.  o.  The  things  that  I  suspected  would  happen  have 
happened. 

CHAPTERS  VII.,  VIH. 

125.  1.  We  neither  refuse  to  contend  if  we  are  pro- 
voked, nor  are  ^ve  the  first  to  make  war  upon  others. 
2.  We  resist  ^anybody  that  makes  war  on  us,  ^and  ask 
for  no  quarter.  3.  *Let  not  the  Romans  allow  us  to  be 
driven  ^from  the  lands  that  we  possess.  4.  We  yield  to 
the  immortal  gods  alone,  to  whom  not  even  the  Suevi 
can^  be  equal.  5.  I  could  have  no  friendship^  with  you, 
if  you  should  remain  in  Gaul. 


FOR    ORAL    TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTERS   IX.,  X. 


126.  1.  The  ambiOssadors,  having  reported  these  things 
to  their  people,  returned  to  Caesar  'the  next  day  but  one. 

2.  When  they  asked  Caesar  not  to  move  his  camp  nearer, 
he  thouglit  it  was  for  the  purpose-  of  causing  delay. 

3.  I  know  that  Caesar  will  move  his  camp  nearer,  if  he 
wishes.  4.  Barbarous  nations  inhabit  the  large  islands 
made  by  the  Rhine  where  it  approaches  the  ocean. 
5.  *rhere  are  some  of  these  nations  that  subsist  on  fish 
and  birds'  eggs. 

CHAPTER  XI. 

127.  1.  We  earnestly  entreat  you  ^not  to  advance  fur- 
ther. 2.  We  beg  you  to  send  forward  some  horsemen  to 
keep  your  men  from  fighting.  3.  If  the  Ubii  will  *give 
us  security  on  oath,  we  will  ^accept  the  terms  that  you 
propose.  4.  Here^  they  assembled  on  the  next  day  in 
great  numbers  to  learn  about  Caesar's  demands.  6.  TelP 
the  prefects  not  to  irritate  the  enemy. 

CHAPTER  XII. 

.  128.  1.  Although  the  number  of  our  cavalry  was  more 
than  five  thousand,*  the  enemy  made  an  attack  upon 
them.  2.  Our  men,  fearing  nothing  'because  the  enemy 
had  not  more  than  five  hundred,  were  quickly  thrown 
into  disorder.  3.  As  soon  as  they  had  dismounted,  they 
8tablM»d  our  horses  underneatli.  4.  They  did  not  ^top" 
fighting  until  they  had  killed*  sixty-five  of  our  men. 
5.  Piso,  *havinp  rescued  his  binthor  from  danger,  was 
himself  surrounded  and  slain. 


64  C^SAR;   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  IV. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

129.  vL.  It  was  the  ^leight  of  folly  to  wait  till  the 
enemy  had  formed  their  plans.  2.  Men^  who  have  treach- 
erously sued  for  peace  and  then  made  war  ^without 
provocation,  ought  not  to  be  listened  t^\l3.  The  ne^^t 
day  in  the  morning  they  came  to  C8esar  to  clear  them- 
selves *for  having  deceived  him.  f  4.  It  is  the  ^height  of 
folly  to  let  go  by  a  single^  day  suitable  for  battle.  5.  I 
am  glad  that  Gaesar  retained  those  elders  who  had  come 
to  sue  for  peace.li 

^  CHAPTER  XIV. 

\  130.  1.  ^Is  it  better  to  hold  a  council  or  to  take  up 
arms  ?  2.  He  will  arrive  at  the  camp  before  we  can  tell 
what  is  going  on.  3.  The  soldiers  burst  into  the  camp 
before  we  could  tell  what  was  going  on.  4.  Since  they 
went  out  from  home  with  ^everything  they  had^  there 
was  a  multitude  of  women  and  children  in  the  camp^ 
5.  Caesar  sent  the  cavalry  to  pursue  the  women  and 
children.\ 


CHAPTER  XV. 

131\  1.  They  threw^  away  their  arms,  abandoned^  their 
standards,  and  rushed^  out  of  camp.  2.  When  they  had 
come  to  the  confluence  of  the  Meuse  and  the  Rhine,  they 
*gave  up  hope  of  further  flight.  3.  Overcome  with  fear 
they  cast  themselves  into  the  river  and  perishedM  4.  We 
were  all  safe  to  a  man,  only  a  very  few  being  wounded. 
5.  They  wished  to  remain  with  Caesar,  ^because  they 
feared  the  vengeance^  of  the  Gauls. 


FOR    ORAL   TRANSLATION.  66 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

132.  1.  For  many  reasons  Ciesar  determined  that  the 
war  must  be  finished.  2.  The  Germans  are  easily  induced 
to  cross  the  Rhine  and  come  into  Gau])  3.  When  you 
find  out  that  we  4iave  both  the  ability  and  the  courage 
to  cross  the  Rhine,  you  will  fear  for  your  own  posses- 
sions. 4.  Those  who  had  crossed  the  river,  as  I  have 
mentioned  above,  were  not  in  the  battle.  5.  We  earnestly 
beg  you  to  send  us  aid,  unless  you  are  prevented  by  pub- 
lic duties  from  doing  so. 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

133.  1.  To  cross  the  Rhine  in  boats  is  neither  safe 
nor  'consistent  with  the  dignity  of  the  Roman  people. 
2.  Therefore  a  bridge  must  be  built,  or  else*  the  army 
must  not  be  taken  over.  3.  The  logs,  sharpened  a  little 
at  the  lower  end,  were  driven  in,  not  vertically,  but 
sloping.  4.  The*  greater  the  violence  of  the  water,* 
the*  more  tightly  are  these  logs  held  together.  5.  If  the 
barbarians  send  down  trees  or  boats  to  knock  down  the 
bridge,  these  things  cannot  harm  it. 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

134.  1.  After  the  Suevi  had  learned  that  Caesar  was 
building  a  bridge,  they  held  a  council,  f  2.  Remove  from 
your  towns  and  put  your  wives  and  children  in  the 
woods.  3.  Let  all  who  can  bear  arms  assemble  in  one 
place,  in  about  the  centre*  of  the  country  of  the  Suevi. 
4.  After'  Ca>sar  had  punished  the  Sugambri,  and  relieved 
the  Ubii,  he  withdrew  into  Gaul.  5.  He  spent  seventeen 
days  in  all  on  the  other  side  of  the  RhineJ) 


6Q  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  iv. 

CHAPTER  XX. 

135.^  1.  In  almost  all  the  Gallic  wars,  the  Britons 
have  furnished  auxiliaries  to  our  enemies.  2.  It  will  be 
^of  great  advantage  if  we  only  ascertain^  what  nations 
inhabit  Britain.  3.  If  we  cannot  find  out  how  great  the 
island  is,  still  it  will  b,e  of  advantage  ^o  examine  the 
character  of  the  people^  4.  fHe  thought  that,  "^if  he 
should  summon  to  himself  the  traders  from  all  quarters, 
he  might  find  out  what  harbors  there  were  suitable  for 
war-ships. 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

136.  1.  Before^  ordering^  the  fleet  to  assemble,  he 
directed^  Gains  Volusenus  to  explore  the  coast.  2.  Before^ 
sending  the  ambassadors  home  again,"*  he  ^made  them 
liberal  promisesiN  3.  Commius,  whose  influence  among 
the  Atrebates  he  regarded  as®  of  great  value,  was  estab- 
lished as®  king  there.  4.  Visit  what  states  you  can,  and 
tell  them  I  am  coming''  soon.  5.  I  will  examine  all  the 
places,  ^as  far  as  the  opportunity  is  offered  me,  ^seeing 
that  I  dare  not  ^°go  ashore. 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

137.  1.  The  Morini,  who  had  made  war  on  the  Roman 
peojjle,  excused  themselves  ^on  the  ground  that  they 
were  barbarians.  2.  We  come  to  promise  ^to  do  what- 
ever you  order.  3.  About  forty  transports  will  be  enough 
for^  conveying  one  legion  over.  4.  "^To  these  are  to  be 
added  eighteen  transports,  which  are  detained  by  the 
wind  ^from  coming  to  the  harbor.  5.  ®What  galleys  we 
have  besides,  we  shall  leave  on  the  coast  of  Gaul. 


FOR    ORAL    TRANSLATION.  67 

CHAPTER   XXIII. 

138.    1.  'Having  gone   on   board  at  about   the  third 
'  watch,  they  waited  at  anchor  tilP  the  weather  should  be     / 
suitable  for  sailing.   2.  It  is  by  no  means  a  suitable  place 
for  disembarking,  where  weapons  can  be  thrown  from     " 
the  cliffs'    to  the  shore.      3.  Both  military  science  and 
especially  seamanship*  demand  that  all   commands  be      | 
executed   promptly.      4.  Weighing^  anchor  at   a  given     ; 
signal,  they  advanced  about  five  miles  from  that  place. 


"s 


.  CHAPTER   XXIV. 


139.  1.  The  barbarians  generally  employed  cavalry 
and  charioteers  in  battles,  ^z.  The  Romans  could  not 
station  their  ships  except'  in  deep  water.*  ^.  Neither 
could  they  jump  out  of  the  ships,  keep  their  footing 
amid*  the  waves,  and  fight  with  the  enemy  all  at  once. 
V  4.  The  enemy,  *on  the  other  hand,  with  all  their  limbs 
free,  could  hurl  weapons  from  dry  ground.*  5.  Wholly 
unacquainted  with  tliis  sort  of  fighting,  our  men  were 
much  terrified. 

.  CHAPTER  XXV. 

14(1.  1.  Th^  galleys  were  removed  a  little  from  the 
transports  and  put  in  motion  with  oars.  B.  The  enemy 
were  dislodged  by  slings,  arrows,  and'  he^vy  missiles 
hurled  from  the  galleys.  \3.  *If  you  do  not  wish  to  be 
frightened  by  the  heavy  missiles,  *fall  back  just  a  little. 
4.  He  at  least  who  carried  the  eagle  did  his  duty  to  the 
state  ^ind  also  to  his  commander.  \  5.  If  you  do  not 
jump  down  out  of  your  ships,  you  will  betray  the  eagle 
to  the  enemy. 


68  C^SAR  :    GALLIC    WAK,   BOOK   IV. 

CHAPTER  XXVI, 

141.  1.  We  could  not  follow  our  own  standards,  but. 
we  flocked  to  ^any  that  we  came  across.  2.  The  enemy 
^would  surround  some  as  they  came  out  of  the  ships  ^in 
scattered  groups.  3.  ^When  Caesar  observed  this,  he  sent 
up  some  skiffs  and  spy-boats  filled  with  soldiers,  as  a 
relief  to  those  in  distress.  4.  Our  men  put  the  enemy 
to  flight,  ^but  did  not  follow  them  up,  because  they  had 
no  cavalry. 


ad  1( 


CHAPTERS   XXVII.,  XXVIII. 


142\  1.  The  barbarians  arrested  Commius  ^as  soon  as 
he  had  left^  his  ship,  and  put  him  in  chains,  although^ 
he  had  come  to  them  in  the  character"*  of  an  envoy.  2.  If 
you  lay  all  the  blame  upon  the  multitude,  ^you  cannot 
be  pardoned.  3.  Although  you  have  made  war  without 
reason,  still  I  will  pardon  your  imprudence.  4.  A  part 
of  the  hostages  were  given  on  the  spot,  and  a  part  ^had 
to  be  summoned  from  a  distance.  5.  Some  of  the  vessels 
were  driven  back  to  the  same  place  ''they  had  started 
from,  and  some  cast  anchor. 


/ 


CHAPTERS  XXIX.,  XXX. 


143.  1.  It  happened  that  Caesar  ^did  not  know  that 
the  full  moon  causes  very  high  tides  in  the  ocean.  2.  He 
%ad  the  galleys  drawn  up  on  shore,  and  the  transports 
anchored.^  3.  It  is  evident  that  the  ships  are  useless  for 
sailing  when  their  rigging  is  lost.  t4.  When  these  ships 
are  lost,  we  have^.no  others  ^in  which  we  can  be  carried 
back  to   Gaul./   5.  Since   the   Romans  *lack  horsemen. 


FOR    ORAL   TRANSLATION.  69 

ships,  uii«l  grain,  the  best  thing  to  do  is  to  keep  them 
from  supplies  and  ^prevent  their  return. 

CHAPTERS  XXXI.,  XXXII. 

144.  1.  *From  the  fact  that  many  of  the  ships  were 
seriously  disabled,  he  suspected  ^hat  he  should  have  to 
use  the  timber  of  these  for  repairing  the  others.  (  2.  We 
see  a  larger  cloud  of  dust  ^lian  usual  in  that  direction* 
in  which  the  legion  marched./  3.  When  the  cohorts, 
which  were  on  guard  before  the^  gates  of  the  camp,  had 
set  out  *in  that  direction,  the  other  cohorts  immediately 
followed  them.  4.  While®  our  men  were  engaged  in 
reaping,  the  enemy,  who  were  skulking  in  the  woods, 
suddenly  attacked  them. 


r 


CHAPTERS  XXXIII.,  XXXIV.  y 

145^1.  At  first  they  ride  around  everywhere,^  and  I 
then^  work  their  way  in  among  the  horsemen,  where  they 
leap  down  from  the  chariots,  and  the  drivers  withdraw 
from  the  battleA  2.  They  can,  even  on  a  steep  downward 
slope,  rein  in  their  horses  when  at  full  gallop.  3.  When 
our  men  had  recovered  from  their  fear,  they  thought  it 
was  time  *to  provoke  a  battle.  4.  For  several  days  in  suc- 
cession the  enemy  were  prevented  by  a  storm  from  offer- 
ing* battle.  5.  There  is  a  great  opportunity  to  free  our 
country  forever,  if  we  drive  the  T?nmgiiqj^iit  ^f  t,b^  iglqii4,V  - 

'  CHAPTERS  XXXV.,  XXXVI. 

146)1 1.  Although'  the  enemy  can  escape  danger  by 
their  rapidity,  nevertheless  we  shall  give'  battle.  2.  The 
thirty  horsemen  (of  whom  mention  has  been  made  before) 


70  CiESAR  :    GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK   IV. 

pursued  tlie  enemy,  and  killed  several  of  them.  3.  The 
voyage  ought  not  to  be  exposed  to  the  ""^equinoctial  storm. 
4.  Although^  they  set  sail  at  midnight,  they  nevertheless 
reached  port  *in  safetyS 

]f  CHAPTERS   XXXVII.,  XXXVIII. 

147.  SL  If  you  Mo  not  wish  to  be  killed,  lay  down 
your  arnJs.  2.  About  six  thousand  men  assembled  ^for 
the  defence  of  the  three  hundred  whom  the  Morini  had 
surrounded.  3.  After  our  cavalry  came  in  sight,  the 
enemy  threw  down  their  arms  and  fled.  4.  We  have  no 
place  ^to  retreat  to.  5.  The  year  before  the  Morini  had 
used  the  swamps  as  a  place  of  refuge. 


Lge.V 


FOE   WEITTEN   TEANSLATIOK 


CHAPTERS   I.— VI. 

148^.  The  Suevi  are  by  far  the  most  warlike  of  all 
the  German  tribes.  From  boyhood^  they  are  trained  in 
the  practice  of  arms  and  in  hunting.  ^For  the  most 
part  they  live  on  milk  and  flesh,  but  not  much  on  grain. 
Although  the  climate^  is  very  cold,  they  bathe''  in  the 
^treams^^ 

\  2.  .They  do  not  import  horses  from  Gaul  at  a  high 
pw€e,  but  use  those  which  are  ^raised  at  home.  These 
horses  are  drained  to  stand  still  in  battle,  while  the 
horsemen  are  fighting  on  foo^>v 


FOR    WRITTEN    TRANSLATION.  71 

3.\  The  Ubii,  who  were  neax  the  Suevi,  and  who  were 
a  litJife  more  civilized  than  the  rest  of  the  Germans  be- 
cause Gallic  traders  visited  them,  were  tributaries  of  the 
Suevi ;  and  in  the  same  condition  were  the  CJsii)etes  and 
Tencteri,  who,  however,  were  finally  driven  out  of  their 
lands,  and  emigrated  into  regions  which  the  Menapii 
inhabitedX  ^ 

4. (These  latterjwere  unable  to  resist  them,  or  keep 
them^'from  crossing  the  Rhine.  Thus  a  tribe  of  Ger- 
mans came  into  Gaul,  and  the  Gauls,  who  were  always 
eager  for  novelty,®  invited  them  to  leave**  the  Rhine,  and 
roam  about  in  those  parts  of  Gaul  not  far  from  the  sea 
where  the  Rhine  empties.  This  was  what  Caesar  sus- 
pected would  happen,  and  he  determined  to  drive  the 
Germans  out  of  Gaull 

CHAPTERS  VII.— XIII.  -^ 

149.  l.SJhe  Germans  said  that  they  had  come  ^on  \ 
the  invitation  of  the  Gauls,  having  been  driven  out  of 
their  own  home,  but  that  they  would  be  friendly  to 
Cajsar  *if  he  would  allow  them  to  retain  the  lands  Vhich 
they  had  taken  in  war ;  nevertheless,  -if  the  Roman  peo- 
ple should  provoke  them,  and  makeS^r  ujhdu  them,  they 
would  resist  ^id  ask  for  no  quai-ter^ 

2.  Caesar  replied  *that  there  were  no  vacant  lands  in 
Gaul  Avhich  so"  great  a  multitude  could  settle  in,  but 
that  he  would  order  the  Ubii  to  allow  them  to  settle  in 
their  territories,  l Caesar  *kept  drawing  nearer  to  the 
camp  of  the  Germans,  and  they  %ept  sending  ambassa- 
dors to  him,  f^r  the  purpose,  as  he  thought,  of  causing 
delay  until*  their  cavalry,  ^v^hich  was  laway,  should  return. 

3.  Hbwever,  "before  these  did  return,  about  eight  hun- 


f 


72  C^SAR:   GALLIC   WAR,   BOOK  IV. 

dred  horsemen,  who  were  present,  made  an  attack  upon 
Caesar's  horsemen,  more  than  five  thousand  in  number 
and  threw  them  into  disorder.  '"As  soon  as  they  rallied, 
the  Germans,  ^as  usual  with  them,  dismounted,  and 
stabbing  our  horses  underneath  and  throwing  down  very 
many  of  our  men,  put  the  rest  to  flight.^ 

4.  After  this  battle  was  fought,  Csesar,  thinking  it  to 
be  ^the"height  of  folly  to  accept  any  terms  from  men^° 
who  through  treachery  and  deceit,  after  suing  for  peace, 
had  made  war  "without  provocation,  arid  realizing^^  how 
much  prestige  the  enemy  had  gained  among  his  men  by 
that  one  victory,  determined  to  give  battle  on  the  next 
day. 

CHAPTERS  XIV.— XVIII. 

/'''J.50.  1.  The  Germans,  greatly  alarmed  at  Caesar's  su^ 
den   arrival   before   their   camp,  were   perplexed   as   to 
j     whether^  they  should  take  up  arms  and  defend  them- 
selves or^  flee  to  the  river,  but  our  soldiers  burst  into 
\     their  camp  Vith  such  celerity  that  they  %ad  no  chance 
*— %o  deliberate. 

2.  A  few  of  them  "^made  a  brief  resistance,  but  when 
they  ''heard  the  shouts  of  our  men,  and  saw  their  own 
men  falling  in  all  directions,  they  ^abandoned  every- 
thing, rushed  out  of  the  camp,  and  fled  towards  the 
Rhine.  There  a  large  number  of  them  *were  slain, 
and  many  perished  in  the  river,  ^not  being  able  to  get 
across. 

3.  Having  finished  this  war,  Caesar  determined  that 
he  must  cross  the  Rhine  before''  the  Usipetes  and  Tenc- 
teri  should  unite  with  the  Sugambri.  ^Another  reason 
for  crossing  was  that  he  wished  the  Germans  to  under- 


FOR    WRITTEN    TRANSLATION.  73 

stand  that  the  Roman  army  'had  both  the  ability  and 
the  courage  to  cross  tliat  river. 

4.  Moreover,  the  Ubii  were  asking  him  for  aid,  because 
they  were  seriously  annoyed  by  the  Suevi,  and  Offering 
to  furnish  boats  "for  the  transportation  of  the  army. 
Cajsar  thought  it  '-inconsistent  with  the  dignity  of  the 
Roman  jieople  to  cross  the  river  in  boats,  and  so  he 
determined  to  build  a  bridge ;  ^and  this  bridge  was  com- 
pleted within  ten  days  after"  he  had  decided  upon  the 
V  plan. 

>  CHAPTERS  XIX.— XXIII. 

'I  151.  1-  Csesar  learned  from  the  Ubii  that  the  Suevi 
intended  to  awaif^his  arrival  in  a  place  which  they  had 
selected  HA  about  the  centre  of  those  regions  which  they 
held,  but,  having  accomplished  ever^'thing  for  the  sake 
of  which  he  had  crossed  the  Rhine,  he  did  not  pursue 
them,  but  withdrew  into  Gaul  and  broke  up  the  bridge./ 

2.  Although'  Caesar  knew  nothing  about  Britain  except* 
that  auxiliaries  were  fUrnished  to^  his  enemies'  from  that 
island,  still  he  decided  to  proceed  there*  in  order  to 
examine  into  the  character  of  the  people,  and  to  recon- 
noitre the  harbors  and  approaches.  But  since  he  could 
learn  from  traders  neither  what  the  size  of  the  island 
was,  nor  what  the  habits  of  the "  people  were,  nor  what 
harbors  there  were,  "befoEe_j]i4kiixg  tUe  attempt  ^*in  per- 
son, he  directed  (jraius  Volusenus  'to  make  a  thorough 
investigation. 

3.  Meanwhile  he  ordered  transports  and  galleys  to  be 
procured  from  all  quarters ;  and  while'  these  were  pro- 
curing, he  remained  among  the  Morini.  When  about 
eighty  transports  lia<l  been  collected,  —  enough'  for  con- 


/ 


74  c^sar:  gallic  war,  book  iv. 

veying  two  legions  over,  —  lie  qrd^4  the  soldiers  to  go 
on  board,  and  immediately  set  sail,  3 

4.  He  readied  Britain  in  about  ten  hours,  and  there  saw 
fhe  forces  of  the  enemy  marshalled  under  arms  on  the 

ffs,  which  in  that  place  are  very  %ear  the  shore. 
"Not  wishing  ^-to  land  there,  he  proceeded  seven  miles 
further,  and  stationed  the  fleet  off  an  open  and  level 
beach. 


Sth( 


/ 


CHAPTERS   XXIV.— XXX. 

152.  1.  The  difficulty  of  landing  was  very  great,  because 
the  enemy  were  on  the  beach,  and  because  ^they  would 
have  to  fight  hindered^  by  the  weight  of  their  armor  and 
by  the  motion  of  the  waves.  When  Caesar  observed  that 
his  men  did  not  fight  with  their  usuaP  alacrity,  he  ordered 
the  galleys  to  be  drawn  up  near  the  exposed  flank  of 
the  enemy,  and  weapons  to  be  hurled  from  them  against 
V     the  enemy. 

2.  This  manoeuvre'*  was  of  great  use  to  our  men,  for 
the  shape  of  the  vessels  and  the  nature  of  our  artillery^ 
so  startled  the  barbarians  that  they  halted  and  fell,  back 
aTittle. — 0»¥-4iiaiv^oiLe  from  one  ship  and  another  from 
another,  flocked  to  whatever  standards  they  first  fell  in 
with,  and  were  in  great  confusion  because  they  could 
neither  keep  their  lines,  nor  get  a  firm  footing. 
^  3:  The  enemy  kept  attacking  them  vigorously^ ;  but 
s  soon  as  they  had  all  reached^  dry  ground,  they  charged 
upon  the  enemy  and  put  them  to  flight ;  '•'but  they  could 
not  follow  them  far^"  because  they  had  no  cavalry. 

4.  The  ships  which  conveyed  the  cavalry,  "just  as 
they  were  approaching  Britain,  and  were  visible^^  from 
the  camp,  were  driven  back  by  a  sudden  storm,  some  to 


( 


FOn    WIMTTEN    TRANSLATION.  75 

the  plaoo  "they  Imd  started  from,  and  some  to  the  lower 
part  of  the  ishuuL^The  rest  of  the  ships,  both  galleys  and 
transports,  iu  \vnich  the  army  had  been  brought  over,  * 
were  disable  by  the  storm  and  by  the  high  tides.  The 
barbariaiiv^seeing  the  Romans  in  such  difficulties,  tried 
to  keep  thVm  from  supplies  in  order  to  prevent  their 
return.  * 


CHAPTERS  XXXI.— XXXVIII. 

153.  1.  Caesar  suspected,  from  the  fact  that  the  enemy 
had  stopped  giving  hostages,  that  they  were  forming 
*some  new  plan,  and  would  try  to  intercept  his  return 
to  the  continent.  Accordingly,  since  he  had  twelve  sMps 
which  were  entirely  disabled,  he  repaired  the  others  with 
the  timber  and  bronze  of  these^jbut  before  he  could  set 
sail,  ^while  his  men  were  engff^d  in  foraging  Vith  no 
suspicion  of  an  attack,  suddenly  he  saw  from  the  camp 
a  cloud  of  dust  in  that  place  where  the  men  of  the 
seventh  legion  had  gone  for  the  purpose  of  reaping  the 
graiiK  ^ 

2/Suspecting  that  the  enemy  were  assembling  to  make 
an  attack  upon  the  legion,  he  left  a  few  cohorts  to  guard 
the  camp,  and  set.  out  with  all  the  rest  of  his  army  to 
relieve  that  legionj 

3.  He  soon  found  that  a  few  had  been  already  killed, 
and  that  the  rest  were  much  alarmed  by  the  strange 
mode  of  fighting  of  the  charioteers ;  but  as  soon  as  he 
arrived,  the  enemy  halted,  and  his  own  troops  recovered 
from  their  alarm.  After  a  short  time  he  led  the  legions 
back  into  camp,  where  for  several  days  in  succession  he 
was  detained  by  storms. 


V 


76 


CiESAH:    GALLIC   WAK,    BOOK  IV. 


4.  When  the  weather  was  suitable,  he  drew  up  his 
forces  in  line  of  battle  before  the  camp,  and  the  enemy, 
having  collected  a  great  multitude  of  infantry  and  cavalry, 
came  against  him,  but  were  speedily  put  to  flight.  After 
a  fcAV  days  he  set  sail,  and  all  the  ships  reached  the 
continent  in  safety. 


NOTES. 


Id  the  Exercises  a  superior  figure  (e.g.,  Oauls«)  put  after  a  word  applies  to 
that  word  ulone;  put  before  a  word,  applies  to  two  or  more  immediately  fol- 
lowing. Literal  tranulutions  and  idioms  are  printed  in  Italics.  Cf.  =  compare; 
w.  =  with;  other  abbreviations  will  be  readily  understood. 

BOOK  I. 

1.  Chap.  I.     1.  The  expletive  "  there  "  is  not  expressed  in  Latin. 

2.  In  accordance  with.  3.  Pred.  noni.  4.  Pred.  ace.  6.  Among  them- 
Bclces.  6.  Least  ojlen.  7.  Weaken  the  mind.  8.  Note  that  cum  is  en- 
clitic. 9.  Quis,  the  interrog.  10.  Abl.  of  specification.  11.  Abl. 
of  separation.  12.  Germans  (ace.)  to  wage;  indirect  discourse, 
"that"  not  expressed  in  Latin.  13.  Takes  beginning  from.  14. 
Mare. 

2.  Chap.  II.  1.  N5n  with  the  interrog.  -ne  (nSnne)  introduces 
a  question  that  expects  an  affirmative   answer.     2.  Abl.  absolute. 

3.  To  persuade  one  to  make  =  to  persuade  to  one  that  he  may  [^might'] 
make.  4.  Are  you  able  ?  A  question  that  expects  a  negative  answer 
is  introduced  by  num.    6.  Cf.  praesto  with  praecSdo  in  chap.  1. 

6.  Abl.  w.  potior.  7.  Not  expressed.  8.  This  to  you.  9.  By  this; 
abl.  of  degree.  10.  From  one  part;  notice  the  order.  11.  Omit 
"  that  of."  12.  From  the  third  part.  13.  Things.  14.  A  result  clause ; 
ut  >v.  imp.  subj.  15.  Cf.  bellum  inierre  alictil  with  bellum  gerere 
Ciun  aliqud.     10.  Warring.     17.  Ourselves  to  have ;  ind.  discourse. 

3.  CiiAf.  III.      1.  Use  ut  w.  subj.     2.  Things.     3.  Abl.  of  time. 

4.  Triemiium.    5.  Cf.  ad  t^  rSs  cSnficiendas.    6.  See  2,  n.  3. 

7.  Indicate  the  question  by  the  enclitic  -ne  added  to  the  emphatic 
word,  and  put  that  word  at  or  near  the  beginning.  8.  Omit.  9.  Subj. 
after  quin;  pres.  following  primary  tense.  10.  Perf.  subj.  follow- 
ing primary  tense.  11.  Imp.  subj.  following  secondary  tense.  12.  .V^ 
to  be  about  to  hold ;  ace.  w.  f ut.  inf.  13.  What  case  follows  potior 
here  1  what  in  chap.  2  ?     14.  You  to  be  cUde. 


78  NOTES,    BOOK  I. 

4.  Chap.  IV.  1.  From.  2.  It  is  necessary  punishment  to  follow  yovt 
condemned.  3.  It  is  necessary  you  to  he  burned.  4.  Of  the  pleading  of 
the  cause.  5.  See  2,  n.  4.  6.  Lest  we  should  he  hurned,  negative  pur- 
pose; cf .  ne  diceret.  7.  Pres.  subj.,  hortatory.  8.  Sing.  9,  Abl, 
of  agent,  w.  a  (ab).  10.  Ind.  discourse.  11.  Resolved  [onJi  death  to 
himself. 

5.  Chap.  V.  1.  Are  you  prepared?  The  part,  is  used  adjectively 
like  divisa  est,  chap.  1,  line  1.  2.  Thing.  3.  See  1,  n.  8.  4.  Use 
the  verb  corresponding  to  the  noun  reditio.  5.  Cf.  ad  earn  rem 
paratos.  6.  A  purpose  clause;  ut  w.  imp.  subj.  following  second- 
ary tense.  7.  Use;  followed  by  what  case?  8.  Questions  introduced 
by  an  interrog.  pron.  or  adv.  do  not,  of  course,  require  -ne.     9.  See 

2.  n.  3. 

6.  Chap.  VI.  1.  Single.  2.  Tain.  3.  A  result  clause ;  ut  w. 
pres.  subj.  following  primary  tense.  4.  Use  the  positive  of  expe- 
ditius.  5.  What  two  constructions  follow  the  comp.  degree  ?  6. 
The  interrog.  adj.,  not  pron.  7.  When  two  things  are  spoken  of, 
use  alter.  8.  To  he  of  good  mind  ;  abl.  of  quality.  9.  Permit.  10.  Me 
to  he  ahout  to  compel.     11.  That  you  permit.     12.  Came  together  to. 

7.  Chap.  VII.  1.  Made  more  certain.  2.  See  1,  n.  9.  3.  Made  the 
Helv.  more  certain.  4.  It  is  in  mind  to  me.  5.  Cf.  n.  4.  6.  Is  it  per- 
mitted to  us  ?  7.  Use  the  poss.  adj.  8.  Who  should  say ;  a  rel.  clause 
of  purpose.  9.  Cf.  n.  6,  and  remember  that  "might"  is  in  ind.  dis- 
course. 10.  Nonne.  11.  A  conditional  sentence.  A.  306  ;  G.  597; 
H.  508.     12.  Cf.  n.  6.     13.  See  4,  n.  7.     14.  Abl.  of  time. 

8.  Chap.  VIII.     1.  Cf.  seciun.     2.  Gen.  of  quality  (measure). 

3.  Lito  height.  4.  Ace.  of  extent.  5.  Cf .  se  invito.  6.  Use  the  same 
construction  as  in  the  preceding  sentence.  7.  Denied  the  day  to  have 
come.  8.  Cf.  n.  7.  9.  Shall  have  used.  A  conditional  sentence.  A. 
307;  G.  597;  H.  508.     10.  Cast  down  from.     11.  Cur. 

9.  1.  Cf.  Sequanis  invitis.     2.  Cum  causal  w.  subj.     3.  Omit. 

4.  Cf.  n.  1.  5.  Marry  [a  woman]  =lead  into  marriage.  6.  Use  past 
tenses;  the  text  has  pres.  7.  Give  hostages  among  themselves.  8.  Hor- 
tatory subj.;  the  negative  is  ne.  9.  Cf.  n.  7,  and  notice  the  change 
of  person. 

10.  Chap.  X.  1.  Cf.  7,  n.  4.  2.  Omit.  3.  TAaf  lY  Aaye ;  a  substan- 
tive clause  of  result.  4.  A  conditional  sentence.  A.  307,  2,  b;  G. 
598;  H.  509.    5.  Put  in  command  of  =praeiicid,  w.  dat.    6.  After 


NOTES,  BOOK  I.  79 

an  expreision  has  been  commcntetl  on  two  or  three  times,  it  may  not 
be  referred  to  again  in  tlie  notes.  7.  Cf.  n.  6.  8.  Bj  means  of  hatUe. 
9.  Came  throwjh  to.     10.  Ace.  of  limit. 

11.  Chap.  XI.  1.  Express  this  purpose  clause  as  in  the  text.  2. 
Put  "ought"  in  the  perf.  indie,  and  "  to  have  been  stormed"  in  the 
pres.  inf.  This  difference  of  idiom  arises  from  the  fact  that "  ought " 
is  a  defective  verb.  3.  Cum  causal.  4.  Nothing  of  left.  5.  It  must 
not  be  waited  by  us  (dat.).  (J.  The  vocative  seldom  stands  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  sentence.    7.  Cf.  dum  .  .  .  pervenlrent. 

12.  Chap.  XII.  1.  Into  ivhich  part  [oftwo]!  2.  Judge.  3.  Indirect 
question.  4.  Remember  that  Latin  has  no  perf.  act.  participle  (ex- 
cept in  deponent  verbs).  Use  perf.  pass.  part,  in  abl.  abs.  5.  N5n 
solum  .  .  .  sed  etiam.  0.  Which  district  killed  the  consul,  that,  etc. 
7.  First  (adj.)  tcent.     8.  PublicUB.      0.  In  rr/iirh. 

13.  Chap.  XIII.  1.  Cf.  pontem  faciendum  curat.  Observe  the 
gerundive  in  agreement  with  the  object  of  cilrat.  2.  In  order  that. 
3.  Observe  that  the  time  expressed  here  is  time  within  which.  4.  In 
deciding  the  tense  of  the  inf.,  consider  whether  the  time  is  the  same 
with  that  of  the  main  verb,  or  earlier,  or  later.  5.  Use  the  fut. 
See  the  references  in  8,  n.  9.  6.  These.  7.  Those.  8.  Shall  have 
wished.  9.  Use  part.  10.  A  prohibition ;  nS  w.  perf.  subj.  11.  N6ve. 
12.  Noater. 

14.  Chap.  XIV.  1.  The  . . .  the  =  by  which  ...by  that.  2.  Use  the 
■ing.  3.  Feel  indignant  =  ftcar  AeariVy.  4.  A  condition  contrary  to 
fact,  [unreal]  pres.  time;  use  imp.  subj,  6.  Cf.  aibi  conscius. 
6.  A  dubitative  or  deliberative  question;  use  pres.  subj.  7.  Why 
we  should  be  afraid ;  ind.  question.  8.  That  [anything']  had  been  done 
by  me.  9.  For  the  tense  follow  the  rule  for  sequence.  10.  Boasted 
many  ^things].  11.  Use  the  perf.  12.  Sing.  13.  Cf.  secundiorSa 
rfia.  14.  When  is  qu6  used  in  a  clause  of  purpose  1  15.  Add  r6- 
rum,  as  in  the  text.     10.  Ctun  concessive.     17.  About  to. 

15.  Chap.  XV.  1.  Into  what  parts.  Cf.  12,  1,  where  two  direc- 
tions only  are  thought  of.  2.  Omit.  3.  Who  may  follow  up;  rel. 
clause  of  purpose.  4.  Agmen  or  acifia?  5.  Cf.  pauci  d6  noatrla. 
6.  By  means  of.  7.  Stand  more  boldly.  8.  Newest  line.  9.  The  text 
uses  distributives.    Why  would  cardinals  be  better  in  this  sentence? 

16.  Chap.  XVI.  Put  the  emphatic  word  between  n6  and  qul- 
dem.     2.  Abl.  of  place  or  rueaus.    3.  Oportot.    4.  From.    5.  Qufl- 


80  NOTES,    BOOK  I. 

lis.     6.  Abl.  abs.     7.  The  clause  with  quod  should  have  the  sub« 
junctive  because  the  reason  is  that  of  the  accusers,     8.  Cf.  ii.  7. 

17.  Chap.  XVII.  1.  Cf.  plus  possint.  2.  Diviliacus  himself. 
3.  A  rel.  clause  of  characteristic.  4.  Lest  lie  should  disclose.  5.  Cf. 
11 ,  n.  2.     Put  "  ought "  in  the  subj.,  because  dependent  upon  a  subj, 

6.  Are  about  to;  pres.  subj.,  periphrastic  form.     7.  Being  compelled  of 
necessity.     8.  What  [things']  are  done.     9.  Shall  be  able. 

18.  Chap.  XVIII.  1.  See  13,  n.  10.  A  prohibition  may  also  be 
expressed  by  noli  w.  inf.  2.  Cf.  pluribus  praesentibus.  3.  Use 
superlatives.     4.  Omit.     5.  Cf.  illo  licente.     0.  Cf.  suo  nomine. 

7.  Come  into  the  highest  hope.     8.  Cf.  regni  obtinendi. 

19.  Chap.  XIX.  1.  Cf.  13,  n.  1.  2.  Cf.  inscientibus  ipsis. 
3.  Enough  of  cause.  4.  Lest  L  offend.  5.  Of  all  things.  6.  Which. 
7.  That  he  icould  declare.     8.  Ind.  question. 

20.  Chap.  XX.  1.  Cf.  ne  .  .  .  statueret.  2.  Nemo.  3.  Takes 
more  of  pain.  4.  Omit.  5.  Am  least  able.  6.  Fraternal  love.  7.  Esti- 
mation of  the  people.  8.  Fut.  condition,  more  vivid  form.  See  the 
references  on  8,  n.  9,  9.  Fut.  condition,  less  vivid  form.  See  the 
references  on  10,  n.  4.  10.  That  he  make  an  end  of  weeping.  11.  Make 
an  end  of  entreating.     12.  All  suspicions. 

21.  Chaps.  XXI,  XXII.  1.  Qualis.  2.  Have  found  out.  3.  What 
of  your  design  there  is.  4,  By  which.  5.  Omit.  6.  Of  7.  Cum  w. 
imp.  subj.     8.  Highest  mountain.     9.  Cf.  18,  n.  1.     10.  Shall  have  seen. 

22.  Chaps.  XXIII,  XXIV.  1.  There  are  two  ways  of  expressing 
"must"  in  chap,  23;  find  them.  2.  Thoroughly  frightened.  Z.  More 
by  this.  4.  Into.  5.  In  the  middle  hill.  6.  On  the  highest  ridge.  7.  Up 
to  the  middle  hill ;  motion  towards  is  implied. 

23.  Chap.  XXV.  1.  Abl.  abs.  2.  For  a  hindrance;  dat,  of  pur- 
pose.    3.  Quod, 

24.  Chap.  XXVI.  1,  Use  the  impersonal  construction,  as  in  the 
text.  2.  The  ones  .  .  .  the  others.  3.  Use  num  quis,  4.  Much  night. 
5.  Advancing.  6.  Cf.  unus  e  filils.  What  abl,  form  distinguishes 
"daughters"  from  "sons"?  7,  Use  prep,  and  noun.  8,  Neve. 
9.   Other  thing.     10,  The  same  place  in  which. 

25.  Chap.  XXVII,  1.  Dat.  of  reference.  2,  Wien  they  had  met. 
3.  Weeping.  4,  Nunc.  5,  This  part,  had  better  be  rendered  by  a 
cum-clause.  6.  Tins  condition  may  well  be  expressed  by  the  abl. 
abs.     7.  At  first  night. 


NOTES,  BOOK  I.  ^1 

26.  Chap.  XXVIII.  1.  To  mc ;  dat.  of  reference.  2.  Soikl-  ihe 
oniissiun  of  connectives.  3.  Wlie.nce  they  had  started.  4.  Bj  which 
tve  mnif  endure  hunger.  5.  The  constructions  with  iubeS  and  Im- 
per5  are  both  found  in  this  chap.  G.  Make.  7.  Js  unwilling.  8.  / 
will  allow  the  Boii  requesting. 

27.  Chap.  XXX.  1.  Dat.  2.  Sought  punishments  from.  3.  Tam- 
etsi  w.  indie.  4.  Supine.  5.  That  tt  may  he  permitted  to  themselves. 
0.  N6  quis  w.  pres.  subj.     7.  To  whom  it  shall  have  been  ordered. 

8.  Ez  asa. 

28.  Chap.  XXXI.  1.  Is  it  permitted  to  us?  2.  Cf.  n.  1.  3.  Thing 
olttained.  4,  Those  [jhings'\  which.  6.  Come  into  torture.  6.  Of. 
7.  Factum  est  ut.  8.  Receive;  pres.  subj.  9.  Cf.  quo  minus  .  .  . 
essent.  10.  A  rel.  clause  of  characteristic  after  unus.  11.  Not 
inf.     12.  Of  each  noblest  Iman"]. 

29.  Chap.  XXXII.  1.  Adj.  for  adv.  2.  Thing.  3.  Reply  nothing. 
4.  Any  voice  at  all.  5.  Cf.  16,  n.  1.  0.  Omit.  7.  Why  should  the 
subj.  be  used  ?     8.  Put  in  the  pass.  form. 

80.  Chap.  XXXIII.  1.  After  "promise  "  the  fut.  inf.  (w.  subject 
ace.)  is  generally  used.  2.  For  a  care  to  me.  3.  That  he  might  put. 
4.  The  yEduans  to  be.  5.  Cf .  sibi  .  .  .  temperatures  .  .  .  quin  .  .  . 
ejdrent.  0.  To  which  things  it  must  be  met.  7.  Negative  result  is  ex- 
pressed by  ut  n6n  w.  subj. 

81.  Chap.  XXXIV.  1.  It  pleases  me.  2.  Middle  of  both.  3.  If 
there  were  any  need  to  me  from  you.  Condition  contrary  to  fact,  [un- 
real] pres.  time.  4.  If  you  wish  me  [m  respect  to']  anything.  5.  What 
of  business  is  there  to  youf  0.  It  seems  strange  to  me.  7.  Omit  "part 
of." 

82.  Chap.  XXXV.  1.  Affected  by  my  so  great  kindness.  2.  Cf. 
banc  .  .  .  gratiam  referret.  3.  A  common  thing.  4.  These  [things'] 
are.  6.  Use  the  poss.  dat.  6.  Cf.  Quod  posset.  7.  Quoniam 
w.  indie.     8.  Of  our  friends :  objective  gen. 

83.  Chap.  XX!XVI.  1.  Cf.  the  first  quoted  clause  in  the  chap. 
2.  /  am  accustomed;  use  the  perf.  3.  According  to  what  manner. 
4.  Ind.  question.  5.  Who  mahe ;  rel.  clause  of  reason.  6.  Remain 
in.     7.  Without. 

84.  Chaps.  XXX VII.  XXXVIII.  1.  Supine.  2.  Al.l.  abs.  3.  It 
must  be  hastened  bf  us  (dat.).  4.  .Tnin  themselves.  6.  It  cannot  be  re- 
nsted.    6.  A  cum-clause,  or  abl.  abs.     7.  Cf.  n.  3.    8.  For  use. 


82  NOTES,   BOOK  I. 

35.  Chap.  XXXIX.     1.  Had  frequently  come  together.    2.  Tails. 

3.  Another  assigned  another  reason  of  departing.     4.  That  I  may  avoid. 

5.  Use  interrog.  num.  6.  Who  from  them.  7.  Videbantur.  8.  What 
does  tlie  adj.  agree  with?  9.  Omit.  10.  Standards  to  he  carried. 
11.  "  That  not "  after  verbs  of  fearing  =  ut. 

36.  Chap.  XL.  1.  Impersonal  use.  2.  It  is  persuaded  to  me ;  cf. 
sibi  persuader!.     3.  Ace.  w.  inf.  because  it  is  a  fact,  not  a  purpose. 

4.  A  servile  tunndt.  The  antecedent  of  "who"  is  the  noun  implied 
in  the  adj.  5.  IIow  much  of  good.  6.  Cf.  35,  n.  1.  7.  Equal.  8.  Non 
solum  .  .  .  sed  etiam.  9.  Mal-e  power  of  himself.  10,  For  which 
method  .  .  .  by  that;  observe  carefully  the  Latin  order.  11.  Who; 
rel.  clause  of  reason.  12.  Nothing  moved  because  you  say.  13.  Carry 
the  standards. 

37.  Chap.  XLI.  1.  We,  the  chief  Jones'],  shall  return.  2.  Made 
.  .  .  judgment.     3.  Superlative.     4.  Remaining  legions.     5.  Was  ouis. 

6.  To  you. 

38.  Chap.  XLII.  1.  Cf.  id  .  .  .  licere.  2.  You  denied  it  to  me 
requesting.  3.  Cf.  ne  quem  .  .  .  adduceret.  4.  Reason.  5.  Omit. 
6.  Dat. 

39.  Chap.  XLIII.  1.  Large  enough.  2.  Cf .  dends.  3.  From  horses. 
4.  Omit.  5.  Cause  of  demanding.  6.  That  thing.  7.  Cf.  ipsis  cum 
Aeduis  inter cederent.  8.  Potential  subj.  9.  Cf.  populi  .  .  . 
consuetudinem  ut.     10.  See  38,  n.  0.     11.  Which. 

40.  Chap.  XLIV.  1.  Cf.  rogatimi  ...  a  Gallis.  2.  To  contend 
a  second  time.  3.  With  this  hope  that.  4.  Cf.  sui  muniendi  .  .  . 
causa.     5.  Because  you  interfere.     6.  Ut  non. 

41.  Chaps.  XLV,  XLVI.  1.  That  his  allies  be  deserted.  2.  Was 
of  3.  Each  most  ancient  time.  4.  Use.  5.  Cf .  diun  geruntur.  6.  Cf. 
pulsis  hostibus.     7.  Possit.     8.  Posteaquam. 

42.  Chap.  XLVII.  1.  Cf.  biduo.  2.  Some  one  from.  3.  But  that 
they  hurl.  4.  Cf.  Conloquendi  causa.  5.  More  by  this.  6.  Used 
.  .  .  much  (adj.).  7.  Lingua  Latina.  8.  What  .  .  . /or  =  quid. 
9.  Cf.  an  speculandi  causa  ? 

43.  Chaps.  XLVIII,  XLIX.  1.  Power  will  not  be  wanting  to  you. 
2.  Cf.  singuli  singulos.     3.  In  which  place.    4.  Thither. 

44.  Chaps.  L,  LI.  1.  See  16,  n.  1.  2.  This  is  the  cause  why  .  .  . 
because.  3.  Cf.  Utrum  .  .  .  necne,  where  the  question  is  indirect. 
Use  annon  for  "  or  not"  in  a  direct  question.  4.  Were  about  to  con- 
quer.    5.  A  deliberative  question. 


KOTES,   BOOK  I.  83 

46.  Chaps.  LII,  LIII.  1.  Cf.  chap.  52,  line  1.  2.  Follow  the 
order  of  the  text.  3.  From.  4.  Laboring.  6.  Abl.  of  means,  not 
place.  C.  Altera.  7.  Brought  great  pleasure  to  Casar.  8.  Cf.  44, 
n.  5.    Use  -no  ...  an. 


46.  Chaps.  I-V.  1.  See  1,  n.  7.  2.  Use  a  form  of  is.  3.  From 
which  things;  abl.  of  cause.  4.  Use  two  abl.  abs.  clauses,  or  clauses 
with  cum.  6.  Things.  6.  See  3,  n.  6.  7.  Atque.  8.  Part,  agree- 
ing with  the  two  subjects.  See  A.  187,  b;  G.  282;  H.  439,  2. 
9.  Cf.  inter  sS  fidem  dant. 

47.  Chai's.  V'I— X.  1.  In.  2.  Two  verbs  connected  by  "and" 
are  often  best  rendered  by  participle  and  verb  without  "  and."  Here 
put  the  first  clause  in  the  nbl.  abs,  3.  Rel.  clause  of  purpose. 
4.  That  he  might  intercept  (intercipio).  6.  Not  dat.  0.  Pres.  inf. 
\  Fut.  inf.  8.  On  which,  etc.  See  n.  3.  9.  See  46,  n.  4.  10.  When 
i  cond.  sentence  occurs  in  ind.  discourse,  always  consider  what  the 
direct  form  would  be ;  here,  1/  yon  shall  attempt  .  .  .  I  shall  prevent. 
Then  follow  the  rules  for  change  of  mood  and  sequence  of  tenses. 
11.  Use  qu5  on  account  of  the  comp.  "  more  easily."    12.  That  they 

would  JHtSS, 

48.  Chaps.  XI—XV.  1.  Note  the  difference  between  these  two 
"  thats."  2.  Deserved  so  well  of  them.  3.  Use  this  order,  —  "  Caesar, 
when  he  was  asked."  For  "said"  use  inquit,  inserted  in  the  direct 
quotation.  4.  Ind.  question.  5.  //  cannot  be  judged.  6.  Tarn. 
7.  Cf.  inopInantSs.  8.  Because  he  had  built.  9.  Let  him  not  de- 
spise. 10.  Replied  thus.  11.  Held  by  memory.  12.  Cf.  gravius 
ferre.  13.  A  condition  contrary  to  fact  retains  its  mood  and  tense 
in  ind.  discourse.     14.  Use  noun.     16.  See  47,  n.  10. 

49.  Chaps.  XVI-XX.  1.  See  48,  n.  3.  2.  iMrge  enough.  3.  Sub- 
junctive w.  quod.  4.  Sing.  5.  Cf.  n6  cdnierant.  0.  Sought  many 
[things'}.  7.  Cf.  naptum  .  .  .  conlocSsBe.  8.  Omit.  9.  Made  a 
Iteginning  of.  10.  Cf.  InscientibuB  ipsTs.  II.  Partitive  gen.  12.  To 
decide  concerning.  13.  Took  much  of  pain  from  this.  14.  Decide  any- 
thing more  severe.  16.  What  [things^  he  blamed.  16.  Not  inf.  17.  See 
20.  n.  12. 

50.  Chap**.  XXI— XXVI.  1.  What  of  design  iras  to  the  enemy. 
2.  HIc  or  ille?      3.  Since  he  did  not  know.      4.  Use  part.     6.  Cf. 


84  NOTES,   BOOK  II. 

sub  .  .  .  aciem  successerunt.  6,  Since  they  were  not.  7.  It  wa^ 
fought.     8.  Continually.     9.  Came  through  to. 

51.  Chaps.  XXVII— XXXI.  1.  Cf.  dum  ea  conquinintur.  Ob- 
serve the  tense.  2.  Gone  out  from.  3.  Whence  they  had  started.  4.  Cf. 
petentibus  Aeduis  .  .  .  concessit.  5.  An  equal  condition  .  .  .  and 
you  yourselves  are.  6,  With  this  design  that  they  might  ask.  7.  Not  inf. 
8.  Of.    9.  See  28,  n.  10.     10.  Cf.  in  eos  .  .  .  edere. 

52.  Chaps.  XXXII-XXXVI.  1.  Res.  2.  Use  adj.  3.  By  which. 
4.  Omit.  5.  Having  been  called.  C.  See  30,  5.  7.  Those  things  ivhich. 
8.  Observe  tlie  construction  with  postulo.  9.  Not  dat.  10.  The 
highest  things  of  both.  11.  Gravor.  12.  Partitive  gen.  13.  Frater- 
nal name  of  the  Roman  people.  14.  Would  be  far  away  from  them. 
15.  Use.     16.  Without. 

53.  Chaps.  XXXVII-XL.     1.  Which  things.    2.  Unite  themselves. 

3.  It  could  less  easily  be  resisted  to  them.  4.  Hasten  towards.  5.  Set 
out  for.  6.  Use  part.  7.  Note  that  what  follows  is  direct  discourse, 
while  the  passage  in  chap.  40  upon  which  it  is  based  is  indirect. 
8.  Depart  from;  pres.  subj.  (potential).  9.  Use  part.  10.  See  36, 
n,  10.     11.  Cf.  huic  legioni  .  .  .  maxime.     12.  ShaU  follow. 

54.  Chaps.  XLI-XLIV.    1.  Abl.  of  manner.    2.  Whose.    3.  Cum. 

4.  They  led  ten  apiece  (distrib.).  6.  From  horses.  6.  Most  friendly. 
7.  W^hen  it  was  come  through  to.    8.  Clause  with  quod.    9.  Of    10.  Dat. 

11.  What  would  be  the  form  of  this  condition  in  direct  discourse  ? 

12.  Nor  allow  any  Germans  more.  13.  Had  crossed  .  .  .  being  requested. 
14.  Interpello.     15.  If  he  shoidd  put. 

55.  Chaps.  XLV-LIII.  1.  Was  not  of.  2.  liather.  3.  Used. 
4.  Requested  a  conference  again.  5.  Gen.  of  gerundive.  6.  Used  .  .  . 
much.  7.  Make  power  of  fighting  to  him.  8.  Arrived  at.  9.  By  which 
they  might  cross. 


BOOK  II. 


56.  Chap.  I.  1.  Abl.  of  means.  2.  Abl.  of  agent.  3.  In  chang- 
ing  from  pass,  to  act.  think  of  the  literal  meaning  of  "inform." 
4.  Note  the  progressive  form  in  Eng.  5.  Not  the  dat.  6.  The  Eng. 
fut.  after  "fear"  is  expressed  by  the  Lat.  pres.  subj.  7.  Not  a  lit- 
eral translation  of  the  word  in  the  text ;  but  consider  what  Latin 


NOTES,   BOOK  H.  85 

word  expresses  about  that  idea.  8.  Cf.  n.  7.  9.  Observe  that  the 
word  in  the  text  is  in  the  comp.  degree. 

67.  Chap.  II.  1.  In  w.  abl.  2.  When  first.  3.  Dat.  of  posses- 
sor.   4.  To.    When  the  adj.  is  used  as  a  noun,  the  gen.  follows. 

6.  What  [things]  are  doing;  direct  question.  6.  Note  change  of 
tense.  What  effect  upon  the  dependent  verb?  7.  That  he  find  out. 
8.  Is  this  act.  or  pass.  ?  9.  //  ought  not  to  be  hesitated  (^doubted)  but 
that. 

68.  Chap.  III.  1.  Who  may  say ;  rel.  clause  of  purpose.  2.  Us 
and  all  ours.  3.  Pred.  adj.  agreeing  with  the  subject.  4.  United 
themselves.  C.  Observe  the  perf.  subj.  after  secondary  tense.  6.  Dis- 
suades {deters")  but  that  they  conspire. 

69.  Chap.  IV.  1.  Direct  question  2.  Indirect  question.  3.  Gauls 
to  hare  been  expelled;  indirect  discourse.  4.  Infinitive.  Other  con- 
structions after  "prevent"  may  be  used.  5.  A  rel.  clause  of  char- 
acteristic after  s51u8;  use  the  perf.  subj.    0.  Perf.  of  cognoscS. 

7.  Use  the  superlative.  The  Lat.,  as  you  will  observe,  is  very  free 
with  superlatives.    8.  Abl.  of  cause.     9.  Pred.  adj. 

GO.  Chap.  V.  1.  Came  together  to.  2.  Not  b6.  3.  Not  quantS 
opere.  4.  Use  the  fut.  5.  Shall  have  kept  .  .  .  apart.  6.  T'he.se 
^things']  were  ordered.  7.  What  mood  and  tense  commonly  follow 
poBtquam?  8.  Already.  9.  Gen.  of  quality  (measure).  10.  Alti- 
tudo  means  "depth"  as  well  as  "height." 

01.  Chap.  VI.  1.  Abl.  of  separation.  2.  Ttim.  3.  The  imper- 
fect of  repeated  action.  4.  Use  the  interrog.  num,  which  expects  a 
negative  answer.  5.  Quis,  the  interrog.  0.  Abl.  of  quality.  7.  Not 
gen.  8.  Conditional  sentence,  A.  307,  1.  a,  c;  G.  597 ;  H.  508.  Cf. 
60,0. 

62.   Chap.  VII.    1.  Put  in  the  same  case  with  "messengers." 

2.  Dat.  of  purpose,  or  of  tiie  "object  for  which."  3.  See  61,  n.  4. 
4.  Approadi.  5.  After  discSdd,  &  with  abl.  is  commonly  used. 
How  is  it  in  the  text?     0.  Abl.  of  distance,  or  abl.  after  comp. 

C8.  Chap.  VIII.  1.  Cf.  ad  aciem  Instruendam.  2.  Slopes  of 
side.  3.  From  either  part.  4.  Erlremr  trenches.  5.  Cur  or  quo  c6n- 
sUiS.  0.  S*Jdiers.  7.  That  they  might  lie  for  a  reserve.  8.  Condi- 
tional sentence,  A.  307,  2  ;  G.  598  ;  H.  509. 

64.  Chap.  IX.    1.  Mode  a  beginning  of  crossing.    2.  //  is  contended. 

3.  Plur.    4.  Omit.    6.  See  61,  n.  8.    6.  See  03,  n.  8;  or  this  may  be 


86  NOTES,   BOOK  II. 

regarded  as  a  condition  "  contrary  to  fact."  7.  With  this  design  that 
they  might  take.     8.  See  61,  n.  8. 

65.  Chap.  X.  1.  Sing.,  to  agree  with  numerus.  2.  Why  would 
Be  be  wrong?  3.  Use  the  interrog.  nonne,  which  expects  an  affirm- 
ative answer.     4.  Omit.    5.  It  is  persuaded  to  them.    6.  That  they  wait. 

66.  Chap.  XI.     1.  Departed  from.     2.   Caiiie    through   [fo]  home. 

3.  Similar  to  what,  etc.  4.  Thing.  5.  From  what  cause?  Note  the 
order  of  words  in  the  text.  6.  Fleeing.  7.  "Those  in  the  rear  "  ex- 
press by  one  word.  8.  Away  from.  9.  The  text  has  sub  [occa- 
sum], which  means  "towards"  or  "just  before."  10.  It  was  ordered 
to  them  that  they  stop. 

67.  Chaps.  XII,  XIII.  1.  Don't  omit  the  reflexive  pron.  2.  Ex- 
press this  concessive  clause  as  in  the  text.  3.  Not  gen.  4.  Into. 
5.  Appositive.     6.  Pred.  nom.     7.  Cum.     8.  Abl.  abs. 

68.  Chaps.  XIV,  XV.  1.  Make  words.  2.  Ind.  question.  3.  My- 
self to  have  known ;  ind.  discourse.  4.  Note  the  change  of  tense  from 
that  in  previous  sentence.  5.  Use.  6.  Express  this  phrase  by  the 
poss.  pron.  7.  Cf .  ab  Romanis  petienint  in  chap.  13 ;  a,  some- 
times abs,  is  used  before  te.  8.  Because  of  Ccesar's  honor.  9.  Him- 
self to  he  about  to  spare.  10.  Abl.  abs.  11.  Asked.  12.  The  change 
from  the  text  is  from  ind.  discourse  to  direct.     13.  Nullus. 

69.  Chaps.  XVI,  XVII.    1.  Ubi.     2.  From  or  out  of    3.  Together. 

4.  Custom.  5.  Nothing  (nihil)  of  trouble.  6.  To  attack.  7.  Futurum 
est  ut.  8.  Result  clause,  verb  in  pres.  subj.  9.  Whither  it  cannot  be 
entered;  impers. 

70.  Chaps.  XVIII,  XIX.     1.  Pred.  gen.  of  quality  (measure). 

2.  Has  itself  otherwise  than  (ac).  3.  Closed  the  whole  line.  4.  To  what 
limit?     5.  Of. 

71.  Chap.  XX.     1.  Cf.  Caesari  .  .  .  agenda.     2.  Which  things. 

3.  Were  for  help  to.  4.  Look  out  for  the  tense.  5.  Observe  carefully 
the  meaning  and  use  of  singulis  .  .  .  singulos.     6.  Through. 

72.  Chaps.  XXI,  XXII.  1.  Ordered  the  necessary  things.  2.  A 
prohibition  ;  express  by  ng  with  perf.  subj.  3.  Use  the  gen.  4.  Abl. 
abs.  5.  Not  further  than  whither  a  stone  (lapis)  can  reach  [he  thrown 
to'].     6.  Others  were  in  another  part.     7.  A  result  clause  with  ut. 

73.  Chap.  XXIII.  1.  Abl.  abs.  2.  Quibuscum,  interrog.  3.  At 
not  a  large  interval. 

74.  Chap.  XXIV.     1.  Together   with.     2.  To   what  jo/ace  =  quo. 


NOTES,   BOOK   II.  87 

8.  Opposite^  adj.    4.  Were  home.     5.  Others  into  another  part.    6.  Not 
act.     7.  Into  all  parts. 

75.  Chap.  XXV.  1.  Themselves.  2.  Many  and  severe.  3.  Nor 
antf.    4.  Not  the  abl.    5.  Signa  Inferre.     6.  Hope  to  them. 

76.  Chap.  XXVI.  1.  Bore  reversed  standards.  2.  Another,  the 
subject.  3.  Lest  they  be  surrounded.  4.  Resist  more  boldly.  5.  What 
[things']  are  doing  (being done)'i  6.  In  what  place  is  the  thing?  7.  Made 
nothing  of  left. 

77.  Chap.  XXVII.  1.  Note  change  of  tense  from  that  in  the 
text.  2.  Omit.  3.  Lying.  4.  Threw  back  the  intercepted  javelins. 
6.  It  ought  to  be  judged. 

78.  Chap.  XXVIII.  1.  Motion  is  implied  in  the  verb  conicere ; 
hence  in  with   the  ace.     2.  Nothing  safe.     3.  Used  mercy   towards. 

4.  Translate  this  sentence  twice,  first  with  iubed,  then  with  imperd. 
6.  Prevent  yourself. 

79.  Chap.  XXIX.  \.  Coming.  2.  Omit  " parts  of ."  3.  Observe 
the  different  words  for  "  make." 

80.  Chap.  XXX.  1.  Made.  2.  InrideS,  whicli  is  intrans.  in  the 
text,  is  sometimes  trans.  3.  Of  so  great  weight.  4.  The  adj.  is  sug- 
gested in  brevit£s.     5.  For  contempt. 

81.  Chap.  XXXI.  1.  Act.  or  pass.?  2.  The  direct  form  of  n6 
.  .  .  dSspoliaret.     .*>.  Praestat. 

82.  Chap.  XXXII.  1.  That  which.  2.  In  Nerviia.  3.  Hortatory 
subj. 

88.  Chap.  XXXIII.  l.Use  the  interrog. -ne.  2.  About  to.  3.  Use 
the  impers.  form,  as  in  the  text.     4.  Use  the  pres.  inf.  with  dSbuit. 

5.  Undo  or  qu5  ez  loc5.    6.  Quot. 

84.  Chap.  XXXV.  1.  Not  subj.;  why?  2.  Ace.  w.  fut.  inf. 
3.  Not  U.    4.  Ex. 


86.  Chaps.  I— V.  1.  Express  this  clause  without  si.  2.  See  56, 
n.  6.  3.  See  56,  n.  5.  4.  These  quod-clauses  are  to  be  regarded  as 
the  reasons,  not  of  the  writer,  but  of  those  who  were  conspiring. 
5.  Our  army  to  be  led.  The  Eng.  "  should  "  does  not  necessarily  im- 
ply the  Lat.  subjunctive.  6.  Themselves.  7.  See  57,  n.  2.  8.  Ind. 
question;  of.  57,  n.  5.  9.  Not  inf.  10.  Remember  that  the  conj. 
"  that"  in  ind.  discourse  is  not  expressed  in  Lat.     11.  Found  out  thus. 


88  NOTES,    BOOK   II. 

The  four  clauses  that  follow,  each  beginning  with  "  that,"  are  in 
ind.  discourse.  12.  Ferf.  subj.  of  cognosce.  13.  Omit.  14.  See 
for  models  the  beginning  of  chap.  5.     15.  A  purpose  clause  with  ut. 

86.  Chaps.  VI— XI.  1.  Remember  that  the  perf.  part,  of  a  depo- 
nent verb  has  an  active  sense.  2.  Which  town.  3.  Cf.  n.  1.  4.  Fero. 
5.  Ubi,  followed  by  perf.  indie.  6.  Omit  "to  see."  7.  Abl.  abs. 
8.  Use  part.  9.  A  transverse  trench  having  been  made,  etc.  10.  Conor. 
11.  Cf.  64,  n^7.  12.  HI.  13.  Omit.  14.  Cf.  de  flumine  transe- 
und5.  15.  Egredior.  16.  Cf.  qui  moraretur.  17.  Autem  (post- 
positive).    IS.  The  former. 

87.  Chaps.  XII— XVII.     1.  Omit.     2.  Retreat  =  se  recipere. 

3.  Use  ad  with  gerundive.  4.  Things.  5.  Put  the  first  two  clauses 
in  the  abl.  abs.  6.  Troops  having  been  dismissed.  Hereafter  sugges- 
tions to  put  clauses  in  the  abl.  abs.  will  be  infrequent.     7.  All  insults. 

8.  Observe    that    this   is    a  subordinate   clause   in   ind.  discourse. 

9.  Cf.  68,  5,  and  notes.     10.  If  any.     11.  Deinde.     12.  Numerus. 

13.  Nothing  (nihil)  of  trouble  to  the  JV.  would  be.  14.  While  (cum) 
it  was  coming. 

88.  Chaps.  XVIII-XXIII.  1.  Omit  "part  of."  2.  Which  time 
had  been  agreed  upon.  3.  Not  dat.  4.  With  all  forces.  5.  Nervian 
battle.  6.  Flo.  7.  Ubi  8.  Quickness.  9.  Hie.  10.  Cf.  in  opere 
occupatl.      11.  Superlative  of  longe.     12.  Not  inf.     13.  Talis. 

14.  Certus.     15.  Administro.     16.  Use  part. 

89.  Chaps.  XXIV-XXVIII.  1.  Not  ab.  2.  Thoroughly  fright- 
ened. 3.  Cf.  74,  n.  5.  4.  Cf.  rem  in  angusto.  5.  Cf.  desperatis 
nostria  rebus.  6.  For  aid.  7.  Those  exhausted  bj  wounds.  8.  Not 
subj.  9.  Omit.  10.  Since  they  thought.  11.  Subj.  in  a  rel.  clause 
of  reason. 

90.  Chaps.  XXIX-XXXV.  1.  Use  the  dat.  of  purpose.  2.  Ex- 
pressed in  the  verb.     3.  The  Lat.  word  is  formed  from  oppidum. 

4.  Omit.  5.  Was  approaching.  6.  The  following  clauses  are  in  ind. 
discourse,  the  conj.  "that"  being  omitted.  7.  Se  permittere. 
8.  An  ut-clause  in  app.  with  unimi.  9.  Considering  (pro)  his  own 
kindness  he  would,  etc.  10.  Ipsos.  11.  Consider  what  this  clause 
would  be  in  the  direct  form,  and  cf.  si  prius  quam  munmi  aries 
attigisset,  se  dedidissent.    12.  Find  a  phrase  in  the  text.    13.  E6. 


NOTES,   BOOK  III.  89 


BOOK   III. 

91.  Chap.  I.  1.  ]Vas  to  Ciesar.  2.  Gen.  of  gerund.  3.  Cf.  huic 
permisit  .  .  .  uti.     4.   Was  called.     6.  Of  which  one. 

1)2.  CiiAi'.  II.  1.  Result  clause.  2.  Cf.  neque  earn  pieniasi' 
mam.  3.  Fut.  indie.  4.  Cf.  accSdSbat  quod.  5.  Cf.  sibi  per- 
BuSaum  babSbant.  G.  This  clause  expresses  a  fact, not  a  purpose; 
hence  ace.  \v.  inf. 

93.  Chap.  III.  1.  Cf.  d6  frumento  .  .  .  provisimi.  2.  It  cannot 
be  come  for  aid.     3.  Not  a  clause  with  quod.     4.  Omit  "a  place  of." 

6.  It  pleased  the  larger  part. 

94.  Chap.  IV.  1.  Cf.  rSbus  conlocandiB  . . .  daretur.  2.  Nul- 
lus.  3.  Length  of  battle.  4.  Men  with  unimpaired  powers.  5.  NS  .  .  . 
quidem.     See  16,  n.  1.     6.  Chance  .  .  .  of  doing  nothing  of  which  things. 

7.  Perf.  of  consists. 

95.  Chap.  V.     1.  Xervian  battle.    2.  Clause  with  si.     3.  Erumpo. 
9G.  Chap.  VI.     1.  Neque  .  .  .  neque.    2.  Cf.  sui  colligendi. 

3.  Cf.  in  spem  .  .  .  vSnerant.    4.  Third  part.    5.  Alio  .  .  .  aliis. 

97.  Chap.  VIII.  1.  Atque  or  que?  Cf.  Silii  atque  Veia- 
nll,  and  VelSnius  cum  Silio  in  chap.  7.     2.  Prefer  to.    3.  Of 

98.  Chap.  IX.  I.  Have  perpetrated  on  ourselves.  2.  Quam  w. 
superlative.    3.  PlOiimiun  posse.     4.  Atque. 

99.  Chap.  X.  1.  Incited  Casnr  to  that  war.  2.  The  same  thing  is 
permitted  to  them.  3.  Cl  priusquam  .  .  .  conspirSrent.  4.  Use 
the  pass. 

100.  CuAP.  XI.  1.  Note  the  omission  of  ut.  2.  Negative  pur- 
pose; nfi.     3.  Gerundive  after  cur6. 

101.  Chap.  XII.  1.  See  96,  n.  1.  2.  For  agreement  of  rel.  w. 
two  antecedents,  see  A.  198,  a. ;  G.  616,  5;  H.  445,  3,  n.  1.  3.  Ace. 
of  extent.     4.  The  tide  lessening. 

102.  Chap.  XIII.     1.  Whole.    2.  Ad  w.  gerundive.     3.  Use  adj. 

4.  Omit.    5.  Use  part.    6.  For  agreenient  of  part,  see  A.  187,  b;  G. 
282;  H.  439,2. 

108,  Chap.  XIV.  1.  Cf.  neque  satis  .  .  .  cdnstabat,  etc.  Ob- 
serve change  of  tense.  2.  Ind.  (dubitative)  question.  3.  Remem- 
ber that  the  pass,  impers.  must  be  used.  4.  Cf.  dsus  .  .  .  Criperfi- 
tor.    5.  C5nspici5. 


90  NOTES,   BOOK   III. 

104.  Chap.  XV.  1.  Cf.  singulas  .  .  .  circumsteterant.  2.  Use 
inf.  3.  This  thing.  4.  Cf .  ad  negotium  conficiendum.  5.  It  was 
fought. 

105.  Chap.  XVI.  1.  Cf.  navium  quod,  etc.  2.  Whither  we  may 
betake  ourselves;  ind.  question.  3.  According  to  what  manner  we  may 
defend^  etc.    4.  Cf .  in  qu5s  . '.  .  vindicandum. 

106.  Chap.  XVII.  1.  Gerund.  2.  In  an  equal  place.  3.  Pass, 
inipers. 

107.  Chap.  XVIII.  1.  Pro.  2.  Use  oportet.  3.  Gladly  believe. 
4.  That  which.  5.  Cf.  non  prius  .  .  .  quam  ...  sit  concessum, 
and  observe  carefully  the  order  of  words.  In  the  text  the  primary 
tenses  are  used;  change  to  secondary.     6.  With  which  they  might  Jill. 

108.  Chap.  XIX.  1.  Negative  purpose.  2.  Arrived  at.  3.  To 
his  men  desiring.     4.  Form  a  noun  from  alacer.     5.  Plur. 

109.  Chap.  XX.  1.  Cannot  be  translated  literally.  2.  Whither 
when  he  had  arrived.     3.  Adhibeo. 

110.  Chap.  XXI.  1.  Is  placed.  2.  Note  the  force  of  the  diminu- 
tive ending.     3.  [/<]  to  be  perceived.     4.  Abl.  of  cause. 

111.  Chap.  XXII.  1.  Together  with..  2.  Not  recusaret.  3. 
Hitherto.     4,  Rel.  of  characteristic.     5.  Express  as  in  the  text. 

112.  Chap.  XXIII.  1.  Follow  the  text.  2.  Fred.  gen.  of  posses- 
sion. 3.  Omit.  4.  Enough  of  garrison.  5.  When  he  learned.  Q.  Felt 
the  same  thing. 

113.  Chap.  XXIV.  1.  Omit  "to  see."  2.  A  condition  in  ind. 
discourse.    3.  Omit.   4.  Cf.  exspeotari  .  .  .  iretur. 

114.  Chaps.  XXV,  XXVI.  1.  Change  to  the  active  form.  2.  Not 
in  vain.     3.  Prius  .  .  .  quam. 

115.  Chaps.  XXVII-XXIX.  1.  Cf.  longe  .  .  .  ac.  2.  Subj.  by 
attraction. 

116.  Chaps.  I— VI.  1.  Select  any  one  of  the  various  ways  of  ex- 
pressing purpose.  2.  It  teas  permitted  to  him.  3.  This  clause  de- 
pends on  "  to  go";  hence  takes  the  subj.  by  attraction.  4.  Because 
they  despised  .  .  .  and  thought.  5.  Abl.  abs.  6.  Cf.  n.  4,  but  vary  the 
expression  ;  a  cum-clause,  for  instance.  7.  Cf.  93,  n.  5.  8.  Resisted 
bravely.     9.  Cf.  resque  .  .  .  casum.     10.  W^hen  it  had  been  fought. 

117.  Chaps.  VII-XII.  1.  De  ea  causa,  quod.  2.  Unless  ivith. 
3.  Abl.  of  cause.     4.  Must  be  waged;   pass,  periphrastic.     5.  Cum. 


NOTES,   BOOK   IV.  91 

6.  n»(1.    7.  Cf.  iniiirlae  retentSrum  eqiiitum.    8.  Le$t  other  states, 
etc. ;  omit  "  the  fear.*' 

118.  Chaps.  XIII-XVII.  1.  Firmitudo  ;  abl.  of  quality.  2.  // 
could  not  be  injured  to  them.  3.  Note  the  force  of  ad  in  adicio. 
4.  Quoque,  following  emphatic  word.  5.  See  103,  n.  4.  6.  Imp.  in- 
die, of  customary  past  action.  7.  R§8.  8.  Move  themselves.  9.  Cf. 
neque  . . .  habfibant.  10.  See  105,  n.  4,  \\.  Most  severely.  12.  Abl. 
abs.     13.  Cf.  eo  absente  .  .  .  tengret. 

119.  CiiAi's.  XVIII-XXII.  l.Per.  2.  Made  that  the  enemy  be- 
lieve.    3.  Ahuut  to.     4.  It  ou(jht  to  hetjone.     o.  Because  of.     6.  And  also. 

7.  Cf.  terga  verterent.    8.  Ciim.     9.  Autem. 

120.  Chaps.  XXIII-XXIX.  1.  Vetua.  2.  Modus.  3.  Not 
timidly.  4.  Abl.  abs.  6.  From  the  decuman  gate.  0.  Ipse,  agreeing 
with  "camp."  7.  What  [o/*]  thing  was  doing.  8.  0/ necessity  ^topped 
work. 


BOOK    IV. 


121.  Chap.  I.  1.  Observe  singula  in  text.  2.  HIc  .  .  .  ille. 
3.  Omit.     4.  In.     5.  Are  made.     G.  Greatest.     7.  Adj.  of  eziguitas. 

122.  Chaps.  II,  III.  1.  Subj.  by  attraction.  2,  Omit.  3.  And 
.  .  .  nothing  —  nor  .  .  .  anything.  4.  Mollis.  5.  Cum.  6.  Tred  gen. 
of  quality. 

123.  Chap.  IV.  1.  All  things.  2.  Before  (piiusquam)  they 
crosse<l ;  time  simply,  with  no  idea  of  intention.  3.  Here  the  idea 
of  purpose  is  implied. 

124.  Chaps.  V,  VI.  1.  Cf.  nihil  .  .  .  conunlttendum.  2.  Form 
a  noun  from  mobilis.    3.  Necesse. 

126.  Chaps.  VII,  VIII.  1.  We  >.s/  (adj.)  make.  2.  Those  (dat.) 
whoever.  3.  And  ...  no  =  nor.  4.  N6  w.  pres.  subj.  6.  Cf.  dom5 
after  CiectSs,  but  use  prep.  0.  Not  subjunctive ;  not  in  ind.  dis- 
course.    7.  The  subject. 

126.  Chaps.  IX.  X.  1.  Afier  the  third  day.  2.  Caas&  w.  gerund. 
3.  From  which  nations  there  are. 

127.  Chap.  XI.  1.  Negalire  purpose.  2.  Make  faith  to  us. 
8.  Use  the  condition.    4.  Hither.    5.  Not  dlc5. 


92  NOTES,   BOOK  IV. 

128.  Chap.  XII,  1.  Fred  gen.  of  quality.  2.  Quod  w.  subj. 
8.  Cf.  fuga  desisterent.  4.  Subj.  or  indie?  5.  When  he  had  res- 
cued. 

129.  Chap.  XIII.  1.  0/  the  highest  folly.  2.  Those.  3.  Ultro. 
4.  Because  they  had.     5.  One. 

130.  Chap.  XIV.  1.  Use  fnterrog.  -ne,  followed  by  an.  2.  Their 
all. 

131.  Chap.  XV.  1,  Threw  away  .  .  .  abandoned  .  .  .  rushed,  not 
to  be  expressed  by  three  finite  verbs  witli  connectives.  2.  Despero 
may  take  the  ace.  or  abl.  w.  de.  3.  Use  part.  4.  Supplicia  crucia- 
tusque. 

132.  Chap.  XVI.  1.  Both  can  and  dare.  2.  Those  whom  I  have 
mentioned  above  to  have  crossed.     3.  To  do  that. 

133.  Chap.  XVII.  1.  Of  the  dignity.  2.  Otherwise.  3.  The  .  .  . 
the  —  hy  what  .  .  .  by  that.     4.  Supply  "  is." 

134.  Chap.  XIX.  1.  Adj.  agreeing  with  locum.  2.  Postea- 
quam  ;  with  perf.  indie. 

135.  Chap.  XX.  1.  For  great  use.  2.  Fut.  perf.  indie.  3.  //  ive 
shall  have  examined.  4.  The  direct  form  is  if  I  shall  have  summoned  ; 
change  to  plup.  subj. 

136.  Chap.  XXI.  1.  Priusquam.  2.  lubeo.  3.  Mando.  4.  Ex- 
pressed in  the  prefix  of  the  verb.  5.  Promised  liberally.  6.  Omit. 
7.  Not  the  pres.  8.  How  much  of  opportunity  is  given.  9.  Who  dare 
not;  rei.  clause  of  reason.     10.  Go  out  of  the  ship. 

137.  Chap.  XXII.  1.  Because.  2.  That  we  will  do.  3.  Ad.  4.  Cf. 
hue  accedebant.     5.  Quo  minus.    6.  What  of  long  ships. 

138.  Chap.  XXIII.  1.  Use  a  cum-clause.  2.  Dum,  followed 
by  what  mood  ?  3.  Higher  places.  4.  Maritime  affairs.  5.  This 
pres.  part,  must  not  be  rendered  literally. 

139.  Chap.  XXIV.     1.  Unless.     2.  Omit.     3.  In.     4.  Autem. 

140.  Chap.  XXV.  1.  Omit.  2.  If  not  =  unless.  3.  Carry  back 
the  foot.     4.  Atque. 

141.  Chap.  XXVI.  1.  Whatever  standards.  2.  See  118,  n.  6. 
3.  Singulares.  4.  Which  when  Coesar  observed.  5.  But  .  .  .  not  = 
neque. 

142.  Chaps.  XXVII,  XXVIII.  1.  Simul  atque.  2.  Gone  out 
of.  3.  Cum.  4.  Manner.  5.  It  cannot  be  pardoned  to  you.  6.  How 
is  this  idea  of  necessity  to  be  expressed?     7.  Whence  they  had  started. 


NOTES,   BOOK  IV.  93 

143.  Cuxrfi.  XXIX.  XXX.  1.  Was  ignorant,  n«8Ci5.  2.  Cf. 
ezercitiim  trausportaudum  curSverat.  3.  Made  fast  to  anchors. 
4.  Kel.  clause  of  purpose,  o.  Horsemen,  etc.,  are  wanting  to.  6.  Cut 
[theml^  njf  from  a  return. 

144.  CiiAPS.  XXXI,  XXXII.  1.  Eac  eo  quod,  2.  That  it  would 
be  necessaru  (neceaae).  3.  Than  custom  brings.  4.  Part.  6.  Into 
that  part.    0.  Dum,  w.  pres.  indie. 

145.  Chaps.  XXXIII,  XXXIV.  1.  Tfnough  all  parts.  2.  De- 
inde.    3.  Use  gen.  of  gerund.    4.  Omit. 

146.  Chaps.  XXXV,  XXXVI.  1.  Etsi,  w.  indie.  2.  Not  dare. 
3.  Storm  on  the  da  if  of  the  equinox.    4.  Use  adj. 

147.  Chap«.  XXXVII,  XXXVIII.  1.  Are  unwilling.  2.  That 
they  might  defend.     3.  Whither  we  may  betake  ourselves. 


148.  Chaps.  I— VI.  1.  Boys.  '  2.  Adverbial  ace.  3.  Places. 
4.  Use  pass.  6.  Born  among  them.  6.  So  trained  that.  7.  Use  inf. 
8.  Xew  things.     9.  Depart  from. 

149.  Chaps.  VII-XIII.  1.  Being  invited  by.  2.  Remember  that 
this  is  a  dependent  clause  in  ind.  discourse.  3.  See  125,  n.3.  4.  Xn 
lands  to  be  vacant.     6.  Imp.  indie,  of  continued  action.    0,  Dum. 

7.  They  resisting  again.     8.  According  to  their  custom,     9.  See  129,  n.  1. 
10.  Those.     11.  See  129,  n.  3.     12.  Sentio. 

160.  Chaps.  XIV— XVIII.  1.  -Ne  ...  an;  double  question,  de- 
pendent. 2.  So  quickly.  3,  No  space  was  given.  4.  Jiesisted  a  little 
while.    5.  Use  part.    0.  Since  they  were  not.    7.  Prius  .  .  .  quam. 

8.  It  was  added.     9.  Cf.  132,  n.  1.     10.  Promising.     11.  Ad  w.  ge- 
rundive.    12.  Not  of  the  dignity.     13.  Which.     14.  Quibus. 

151.  Chaps.  XIX-XXIII.  1.  About  middle  (adj.).  2.  Etai,  w. 
what  mood?  3.  Niai.  4.  Illo.  b.  Bpf ore  he  should  make.  (>.  Ipse. 
7.  To  explore  all  things.  8.  See  144,  0.  9.  .'l.<!  many  as  were  enough. 
10.  Narrow.     11.  Since  he  did  not  wish.     12.  E6  Sgredi. 

152.  Chaps.  XXIV— XXX.  1.  Use  impers.  construction.  2.  Put 
in  the  dat.  to  agree  with  the  agent  of  the  gerundive.  3.  Which  they 
were  accustomed  to  use.  4.  Rte.  6.  Tonnenta.  6.  Another  from 
another  ship.  7.  With  great  force.  8.  Stood  on.  9.  See  141,  n.  6. 
10.  Further.     11.  IH^n.     12.  i9^*ti.     \^.  Wlience  they  had  started. 

158.  Chaps.  XXXI-XXXVIII.  \.  Something  of  new  plan.  2.  Use 
abl.  abs.     8.  Nor  any  $uspicion  being  interposed. 


GRAMMATICAL   INDEX, 

WITH  REFERENCES  TO  THE  EXERCISES  FOR  ILLUSTRATION. 


References  are  not  given  for  constructions  of  continual  recurrence,  such  as 
subject  nominative,  direct  object,  and  the  liice,  and  only  a  few  are  Kiven  for  noany 
others  that  arc  used  frequently. 

The  grammars  referred  to  are  Allen  &  Qreenough's  (A.)i  Gildersleeve's  (G.)i 
and  Harkness's  (H.)*     [Note :  ff  =  and  following.] 


Ablative. 

Absolute.    A.  255 ;  G.  408-9;  H.  431.    See  Participles. 

•♦  In  accordance  tcith."    A.  253,  n.  ;  G.  3H8 ;  H.  41<>. 7,9;  20,  5 ; 

27,  10;  38,  7;  40,  1;  79,  10;  82,  1 ;  149,  3. 
0/  accompanimcut.     A.  248,  7 ;  G.  391 ;  H.  419. 1. 60,  1 ;  74,  1 ; 

86, 1 ;  88,  1 ;  100,  5. 
0/  af/ent.    A.  244>;  G.403;  H.415,  1. 4,  9;  9,  8;  18,  1;  22,  10; 

62,2;  56,2;  66,7. 
0/  cause.     A.  245 ;  (1.  40(>-7  ■  H.  416. 2. 15 ;  14.  6 ;  18,  8 ;  27,  4 ; 

46.2;  69,14;  62,4;  68,7;  88,2;  94,3. 

0/  comparison.     A.  247 ;  G.  399;  H.  417. 6,  (5,  8;  68,  1 ;  122,  5. 

0/ degree  {difference).    A.  250;  G.  400;   H.  423. 6,  5;  14,  1; 

37,10;  42,  L 
0/ manner.     A.  248;  G.401;  H.419,  III. 2,  15;   10,  2;  21,  10; 

32,2;  64.  1;  61,2;  66,  1;  67,9;  70,12;  108,1,5. 
0/  means.    A.  248,  8 ;  G.  403 ;  H.  420. 2,  12,  14 ;  8,  1,  15 ;  6,  1 ; 

8,12;  10,9;  12,2;  16,4;  21,4. 
0/ place.    A.  258,  4;  G.  384;  H.  425. 10,5;  17,8;  18,3;  22,7; 

26,  a    (Without  prep.)  16,  3;  23,  9;  73,  10;  106,  4. 

0/  price.    A.  252 ;  G.  404 ;  H.  422. 18,  9 ;  148,  2. 

0/ quality.    A.  251 ;  G.  402 ;  H.  419,  U. 6,  9;  7, 11;  18,5;  26,  10, 

86,  1;  42,0;  61.9;  94.3. 
0/  separation.    A.  243,  e;  G.  388;  H.  414. 7,  1;  16,  4;  22,  2; 

37, 10;  134,  2;  139,  3.   (Without  prep.)  1,  13;  6,  1;  9, 11;  16,  9; 

61,4;  64,10;  81,8;  86.4. 
0/  source.    A.  244 ;  G.  3«C ;  H.  415. 69,  6. 


96  GRAMMATICAL   INDEX, 

Of  specification.    A.  253;  G.  398;  H.  424. 1,  12;  2,  5,  9;  5,  4; 

39,  7;  44,  8;  98,4. 
Of  time.    A.  25G ;  G.  392 ;  H.  429. 3,  5 ;  6,  12 ;  7,  14 ;  10,  10 ;  13, 

4;  62,4;  66,3;  67,1;  84,4. 

With  fretus.     A.  254,  h,2;  G.  373,  R.  1 ;  H.  425,  1,  N. 119,  4. 

With  nitor,  etc.     A.  254,  6;   G.  403,  3;   H.  425,  1,  N. 13,  10; 

77,  1. 

With  opus.    A.  243,  e ;  G.  390;  H.  414,  IV. 38,  10. 

With  utor,  etc.     A.  249;  G.  405;  H.  421,  I. 2,  6;  5,  10;  16,  3; 

33,4;  41,6;  58,11;  68,5;  78,8;  113,3. 

Accusative. 

Adverbial.    A. 240;  G.331,R.  3;  H.  378,  2. 31,7;  36,11;  38,10; 

71,7;  148,1. 

Cognate.    A.  238,  6;  G.  331,  2;  H.  371,  II. 29,  4;  49,  3;  112,5. 

Direct  object.    A.  237 ;  G.  327 ;  H.  371. 

Of  extent.    A.  256-7;   G.  335  ff;   H.  379. {Space)  8,  3;  69,  9; 

86,  4;  138,  4.     {Time)  16,  6;  24,  7;  43,  1;  79,  9;  84,  8;  101, 

4;  145,4. 
Of  limit.    A.  258;  G.  M2,  410;  H.  380. 10,  10;  (Domum)  5,  6; 

53,3;  66,3;  79,4. 
Subject  of  inf.    A.  173,  2 ;  G.  341 ;  H.  536. 1,  15 ;  3,  18,  20;  8,  8 ; 

13,  5;' 14,5;  20,3;  21,7. 
Two  accusatives.     {Double  accusative). 

Same  person  or  thine/.     {Pred.  ace.)    A.  239, 1;  G.  334;  H.  373. 
1,  4;  3,  10;  10,  2;  28,  14;  33,  6;  49,  3;  52,  2;  88,  1. 

Person  and  thing.    A.  239,  2,  c;  G.  333 ;  H.  374. 16,  1. 

With  compounds  of  trans,  etc.    A.  239,  2,  b,  and  notes ;  G.  330, 
andR.l;  H.  376  and  note. 13,1;  40.7;  59,6;  65,1;  120,3. 

Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles. 
Agreement  with  nouns.    A.  186-7 ;  G.  281  ff ;  H.  438-9. 

Denoting  a  part.    A.  193;  G.  287,  R. ;  H.  440,  2,  n.  1. 21,  0 ;  22, 

7,9;  25,10;  37,4;  57,4;  59,5;  63,7;  76,8. 

For  adverbs.    A.  191 ;  G.  324,  R.  6 ;  H.  443. 12,  7 ;  29,  2 ;  37,  1 ; 

52,1;  74,  4;  104,4. 

For  nouns.    A.  188-9;  G.  195,  R.  1-A;  H.  441. 14,  7;  49,  3;  68, 

3;  60,7;  130,4. 
Adverbs.    A.  207 ;  G.  440 ;  H.  551  ff . 
Agreement.    See  Adjectives  and  Apposition. 

Of  relative  w.  antecedent.    A .  198  ff ;  G.  (516  f[ ;  H.  445  ff. 
Of  verb  w.  subject.    A.  204-D ;  G.  202,  281-3 ;  H.  460  ff. 


GRAMMATICAL  INDEX.  97 

Alius  .  .  .  alius.    A.  203;  G.  321;  11.450. 72,  7,  8;  74,  7;  76,4; 

89,  1 ;  96,  4. 

Alt  3r  .  .  .  alter.    A  203 ;  G.  321 ;  H.  459. 6,8;  24,  2 ;  28,  G. 

Amplius,  etc.,  without  quam.     A.  247,  c;  G.  311,  R.  4;  H.  417,  1,  n.  2. 
15,  S ;  62,  G ;  86.  1 ;  96,  5 ;  128,  1,  2. 

Antecedent  in  rel.  clause.    A.  200;  G.  617-8. 12,  7;  21,  10;  36, 

«J;  53,  4. 

Apposition.    A.  183-4;  G.  318-9;  H.  3G3. 46,  4;  49,  4;  61,  5;  53, 

4;  67,(5;  87.1;  107,2;  118,4. 

Atque  (ac),  et,  que.    A.  15(5,  a;  G.  477-9;  H.  554, 1.  2. 

A.tque  (ac)  for  quam.    A.  234.  a,  n.  2;  G.  646;  H.  459,  2. 61,  3; 

70,4;  98.5;  115,2. 

Conditional  Sentences. 

Pres.  and  past  {uothintf  implied).    A.  306;  {Logical)  Q.  697;  (First 

form)  II.  508. 7^  13;  106.  5;  140,  3;  147,  1. 

Pres.  and  past  {contrnnj  implied).   A.  308;  (  Unrtul)  G.  599;  {Third 

form)  U.  510. 14,2;  31,5,  G;  43,  4;  48,5;  64.8. 

Future  {more  vivid).     A.  307,  1,  a,  c;   {Loijii:al)   G.  597;    {First 

/orm)  H.  508. 8,0;  13.  G;  20.5;  24.  0;  60,  G;  61,  11;  64,7. 

Future  {less  vivid).    A.  307,2;  (Idml)  G.  598:  {Secoxd  form)  H. 

600. 10,3;  20,  G;  24.  10;  36,3;  52,2;  53,1,4:63,  12;  64.  G. 

In  indirect  discourse.    A.  3;i7;  G.  050;  H.  527. 47, 4;  48,  5;  54. 

3,4;  90,2;  113,3;  135,4. 

Conjtinctions.    A.  208;  G.  477  flf ;  H.  554-5.    See  Atque. 

Cum. 

Causal.  A  326;  G.587;  H.  617. 9,2;  11,  3;  50.  3;  89,  4;  104,  3. 

Concessive.    A.  313,  d;  G.  588;   H.  615,  lU. 14,  11,  12;  24,  4; 

64,3;  117,3;  122.5;  142.1. 
Temporal  {historic(d).    A.  325;  G.  686;  H.  521,  II. 21,  G;  25, 

2.4;  34.  G;  67.8;  79.3;  85.3;  87,4. 

Cum  (prep.)  enclitic.    A.  99.  e,  IW,  c;  G.  414.  R.  1;  H.  l&t,  6,  187,  2. 
1.11;  8.5;  8.2;  86,6. 

Dative. 

Ofaf/ent.    A.  232;  G.352;  H.388. 11,8;  29,  10;  34,  4;  36,  1; 

71. 1 :  106  6. 
Of  indirect  object.    A.  225  ff ;  G.  343  ff ;  H.  384  flf. 


98  GRAMMATICAL   INDEX. 

Of  possessor.    A.  231;  G.  349;  H.  387. 7,6,7;  31,  8;  32,  8;  57, 

5;  68,10;  91,1;  125,5. 
Of  imrpose  or  ohject.     A.  233;  G.  350;  H.  31)0. 23,  4;  30,  2;  31, 

4;  34,  8;  40,6;  45,5;  62,2;  63,  11;  75,2;  80,9. 

Of  reference.    A.  235;  G.  343,  R.;  H.  384.  4,  n.  2. 25,  1;  26,  2. 

With  adjectives.    A.  234;  G.  356;  H.  391. 9,6;  36,7;  47,1;  57, 

6;  63,4;  66,4;  86,2. 
With  compounds.    A.  228-9;  G.  346;  H.  386,  385,  II.  2. 2,  6; ,10, 

3,7;  20,5;  30,9;  35,8;  36,10;  61,8;  66,8;  75,9. 
With  special  verbs.    A.  227;  G.  345;  H.  385. 2,  3,  4,  8,  9;  3,  9, 

10;  9,  7;  23,  10;  27, 1;  31,  1;  37,  4;  56,  12;  81,  9;  142,  3. 

Debeo,  Past  tenses  of,  w.  pres.  inf.    A.  288,  a;  H.  537,  1. 11,  2; 

17,  3;  83,8. 

Dum  w.  pres.  indie.    A.  276,  3;  G.  572;  H.  467,  4. 41,  7;  51, 1 ;  144, 

4;  151,3. 

Dumw.  subj.  A.  328;  G.  574;  H.  519,  II.  2. 11.10;  129,1;  138,1; 

149.  2. 

Et  repeated  or  omitted.    A.  208,  6, 1 ;  G.  483,  2 ;  H.  554, 1.  6. 26,  3 ; 

47,4;  98,1;  102,3;  112,3;  116,4;  117,3;  140,2;  143,5. 

Genitive. 

Descriptive  (of  quality).    A. 215;  G.3G4;  H.396,V. 8,3;  60,12; 

80,  6,  10;  87,  3. 
Objective.    A.  217;  G.  361,  2;  H.  395,  III. 32,  10;  52,  3;  97,  4; 

117,3. 
Partitive.    A.  216;  G.  366  ff;  H.  397. 11,  7;  15,  3;  19,  4;  20, 

2;  21,3;  31,8;  36,5;  69,8;  76,12. 
Possessive.  A.  214,  1 ;  G.  360;  H.  396, 1. 
Predicate.    A.  214,  c;  G.  365;  H.  401-2. (Of  possession)  41,  4; 

55,  1;  112,  2.     (Of  quality)  70,  2;  80,  6;  122,  5;  128,  1;  129, 

1,  4;  133,  1;  150,  4.     (Of  price)  136,  3. 
With  adjectives.    A.  218;  G.  373;  H.  399. 14,  2;  21,  5;  31,  3; 

139,  5. 
With  some  verbs.    A.  219  ff;  G.  375  ff ;  H.  40(>  ff. (Reminiscor) 

13.  7;  (Interest)  60,  4;  (Paenitet)  124,  4;  (Potior)  3, 19. 

Gerund  and  Gerundive. 

Gen.    A.  298;  G.  429;  H.  542. 1,  543  ff. 2,17;  20,7.8;  35,4;  54, 

3;  64,2;  74,5;  126,2;  129,  3. 40,7;  70,11;  88,1. 

Dat.    A.  299;  G.  430;  H.  542,  II,  543  ff. 94,  1. 


GRAMMATICAL   INDEX.  99 

Ace.    A.  300;  G.  431.  ^V^',  II.  542,  III,  543  ff. (w.  prep.)  78,  5. 

8,  G,  7;  6,  7;  46,  .'5;  63,  2:  72,  2;  87,  1;  187,3.    {Oerundire 

w.  cQrO)  18,  1,  2;  19. 1.  2;  100.  3;  143,  2. 
Abl.    A.301;  G.4;M;  H.  542,  IV,  543  ff. 144.4. 66,  G;  86,3; 

88,2. 

HIc,  illo,  the  latter,  the  former.    A.  102.  n.  6;  G.  292,  R.  1;  H.  450.  2. 
18,  G;  66,2;  86,3. 

Imperative.    A.  2(59;  G.  259  ff;  H.  487. 15,  2;  25,  C;  26,  1;  32. 

(• ;   33,  9;  95,  5;   134,  2.     See  Subjunctive    (hortatory)   and 
Prohibitions. 

Imperfect  indicative  of  customary  and  repeated  action.    A.  277;  G. 
222;  H.4«J9,  II. 118,2;  141,2. 149,2;  152.3. 

Impersonal  verbs.    A.  145-G;  G.  199,  2;  H.  298  ff. 4.  '2.  :<.  7.  0, 

10;  16,  5,  G;  22,  2;  27,  7;  28, 1,  2;  81,  1;  71,  4,  5. 

Impersonal  xises ;  pass,  of  intrans.  verbs.    A.  14<».  d;  G.  VJi),  1;  H. 

.'501. 24.  1;  34,  4,  5,  7;  36,  1,  2;  60.  4;  64,  5;  66,  12;  83,  7; 

103,  3;  142,  2. 

Indirect  discourse  (OrfttiO  obllqua).    A.  330  ff;  G.651  ff ;  H.  522 

ff. 2,19,20;  3,18.20;  4,  10;  5,3;  6,  11;  47,3,4;  48.5;  85,4. 

Subordinate  clauses  in.    47,  4;  48.  5;  49,  1,  3;  62,  1,  3;  64,  3,  4; 

66,  1,  3;  85,  3,  4;  87,  2,  3,  4;  129,  5. 
See  Conditional  sentences. 

Infinitive. 

As  object.    A.  :j:«),  B;  G.  527 ;  H.  535.    See  Indirect  Discourse. 
As  subject.    A.  270;  G.  423;  H.  538. 1,  15;  2,  7;  8,  13;  4,  2,  3; 

7,G,7;  8.5;  30.5;  81,10;  93,3. 
Complcmcntanj.    A.  271;  G.  424;  H.  52.'M. 3.  20;  8,  10,  11;  11, 

3;  80,  G;  38,8;  40,5;  83,7;  86,3;  87,1;  119.4;  123.2;  153.1. 
Subject  of.    See  Accusative. 
Tenses  of.    A.  288;  G.  273  ff.  530;  H.  537. 

Locative.    A.  258,  4;  G.  412;  H.  425  ff. (Domi)  20,  3;  121,  2. 

Minus,  etc.,  without  quam.    See  Amplius. 

Neque  (nee)  for  et  nOn,  etc.    A.  15<J,  a;  G.  482;  H.  554.  I,  2. 

64,3;  76.  G;  92,4;  122,3;  126,2. 

Nfi  .  .  .  quidem.    A.  315,  6;  G.681;  H.  669,  UI,  2. 16,  2;  89,  7; 

34.3:  44.  1:  92.5;  94,4;  108.4. 


100  GRAMMATICAL  INDEX. 

Nominative. 

Predicate.    A.  176,  185;  G.  197;  H.  362. 1,  3;  54,  2;  67,  7;  111. 

1;  136,3. 
Subject.    A.  173,  a;  G.  194;  H.  368. 

Participles.    A.  289  ff;  G.  667  ff;  H.  548  fif.    See  Adjectives. 

Denoting  cause.    17,  7;  40,  2;  50,  1;  51,  3;  128,  2;  131,  5.    (Abl. 

abs.)  93,  4;  118,  4. 
Denotimf  circumstance.    45,5;  52,1;  77,7;  86,2;  88,2,3.     (Abl. 

abs.)  110,  2;  153,1. 
Denoting  concession.     Ill,  5.    (Abl.  abs.)  16,  8;  67,  3. 
Denoting  condition.    (Abl.  abs.)  8,  5;  9,  1,  4;  25,  7,  9;  34,  3;  41,  9. 
Denoting  manner.    25,  2.    (Abl.  abs.)  67, 10. 
Denoting  time.    13,  8;  38,  4;  66,  9.     (Abl.  abs.)  2,  2;  12,  4,  5;  18, 

2;  19.9;  68,8;  72,  5;  76,7. 
For  coordinate  verb.     50,  3;  73,  6;  95,  3;  113,  2;  150,  2. 
For  relative.     52,  2;  86,  2;  108,  2. 

reriphrastic  conjug-ation.  First.    A.  113,  b,  n.,  129;  G.  239;  H.  233, 
466,  N. 14, 11;  17,  5;  44,  5;  83,  5. 

Periphrastic  conjug-ation,  Second.    A.  113,  tf,  n;  G.  243;  H.  234. 
22, 1;  28, 13;  30,  9;  32,  4;  53, 1,  2;  57,  10;  71. 1;  81,  7. 

Postquam,  etc.,  w.  perf.  indie.    A.  324;  G.  563;  H.  518,  n.  1. 41, 

10;  60,8;  104,2;  134.4. 

Prepositions.    A.  152  ff ;  G.  417-9;  H.  432  ff. 

Priusquam  w.  Indic.  and  subj.    A.  327;  G.  576-9;  H.  520. 123,  4, 

5;  128.  4;   130.  2,  3;   136,  1. 99,  4;    107,  5;   114.  4;   150,  3; 

151,  2. 

Prohibitions.    A.  269,  o;  G.  256,  2;  H.  484,  4. 13,  9;  18,  2:  24,  8; 

32,7;  39,9;  41.8;  72,3;  81,8;  82,4. 

Pi'Onouns.    See  Agreement. 

Indefinite.    A.  202;  G.  300  ff ;  H.  189  ff. (Quis)  20,  5,  6;  24,  3; 

27,  9;  87,  2;  111,  4.      (Aliquis)  14,  2;  42,  2;  141,  2;  153,  1. 

(Ullus)  29,  5;  75,  6.     (Nullus)  68,  14:  94.  2.     (Quidara)  107,  1. 

(Quisquam)  111,  4.     (Quisque)  28,  14;  41,  5;  124,  2. 
Reflexive.    See  Sui  and  Suus. 

Purpose  clauses,    A.  317  ff ;  G.  543  ff ;  H.  497  ff. 

Pure  purpose  \v.  ut  or  ne.    3,  2;  4,  7;  5,  8;  13,  2;  23,  1;  26.  7; 
47,3;  63,9;  64.4. 


GRA3IMATICAL   INDEX.  101 

Relative.    7,  10;  16.  2;  31.  2;  43.  9;  47.  2;  85,  3;  86,  4.    (QuO  w. 

comp.)  14,  10;  28,  l>;  47.  5;  102.  1. 
Substantive.    2,  3.4;  3.1),  10;  6,  12;  6.  11;  20,  1;  67.  8;  76.  3. 

NS  aud  ut  w.  verbs  of  fearing.  19, 5;  36, 10;  66. 7. 8;  76, 5;  86, 1. 

Questions,  double.    A.  211;  G.  400-1;  H.  353. 36,  12;  44,  4,  6; 

66,  3;  130,  1;  150.  1. 

Questions,  indirect.    A.  210,  2,  334;  G.  4G2  ff;  H.  529,  I.  — 12.2; 
14.  4.  5;  19,  10;  20,  9;  21,  2,  3;  29.  C;  68.  3;  71,  4,  5;  76, 11. 

Questions  w.  -ne,  nOnne,  and  num.    A.  210,  a,  c;  G.  45G-8;  H.  35r, 

1.2. 3.  11,  12:  4.  T),  12;  6,  1,2,9.  13;  7,9,  12;  8,  10;  12,  2. 

2,1;  7,11;  9,3,6,7;  11.5;  65.7. 24,3;  35,(3;  61,7;  62,3. 

Quin.    See  Resxilt  clauses. 

Quisque  w.  superlative.    A.  93,  c;  G.  305;  H.  458, 1. 28, 14;  41,  5. 

QuO.    See  Purpose  clauses. 

Quod  (couj.).    A.  321 ;  G.  MO-2;  H.  510.  I,  II. 

With  indicative.    22,  4;  23.4;  34,  2;  40.9;  44.3;  48.2;  53,3;  85, 

2;  101,  3. 
With  subjunctive.    14,  8;  16,  8. 10;  29,  9;  53,  2;  64,  3;  128,  2. 
Restrictive.    32,  9. 
See  Indirect  discourse. 

Belative  clauses. 

0/  cause  or  reason.    A.  320,  e;  G.  636;  H.  517. 33,  6;  36, 10; 

87,3;  89,4;  136;  5. 
0/  chararteristic.    A.  320;  G.  634;  H.  503,  I. 17,  2;  26,  5;  28, 

10;  51,5;  111,3;  147,4. 
Sec  Purpose  clauses  ami  Result  clauses. 

Result  clauses.     A.  319,  332;  G.  553  ff ;  H.  500  flf. 

Pure  result  tc.  Ut  and  ut  n6n.    6,  3;  30,  10;  40, 10;  48,  1;  68,  10; 

72,  10;  80,0;  118, 1;  143,  1;  160, 1. 
Relative,  52,  2. 

Substantive.    2,  15.  9.  10;  10.  2;  28,  7,  H;  46,  2;  59.  11 ;  69,  10. 
With  quIn.    3,  14-17;  4,  11;  30,  7;  62.  2;  67,  10;  112.4;  125,  1. 
Per/.  $ubj.  in,  after  secondary  tense.    A.  287,  c;  G.  513;  H.  495,  VI. 

58.10. 

Sequence  of  tenses.    A.  285-7:  G.  510  ff ;  H.  401  ff. 

SinguU.    A.  96,  a;  G.  310;  H.  172.  3. 43.  5;  ^5,  1;  71.  G;  87.  4. 


102  GRAMMATICAL  INDEX. 

Subject.    See  Nominative  and  Accusative. 

Two  subjects  of  same  verb.    A.  205;  G.  281;  H.  463. 3,  4;  26,  3; 

46,4. 

Subjunctive. 

By  attraction.    A.  342;  G.  666;  H.  529,  II. 49,  1,  2;  115,  3;  116, 

1;  122,  1. 
Deliberative.     A.  268;  G.  468;  H.  484,  V. 14,  3;  44,  6;  45,  9; 

103,  2. 
Hortatory.    A.  266;  G.  256;  H.  484,  II. 4,  8;  7,  14;  9,  11;  12,  8; 

27,  9;  38,  6;  125,  3.    See  Prohibitions. 

Potential.    A.  311,  I,  II;  G.  250;  H.  485-6. 39,  7;  53,  4. 

Tenses  of.    A.  266  ff,  283,  308;  G.  271;  H.  478  ft. 

See  Cum,  Dum,  Indirect  discourse,  Indirect  questions,  Pri- 

usquam,  Purpose  clauses,  Quod,  Relative  clauses,  Result 

clauses. 

Sui  and  Suus.    A.  196;  G.  294-5;  H.  448-9. 52,  3;  65,  11;  67,  9; 

85,  2,  3;  86,  2,  3;  87,  2;  123,  2;  126,  1;  130,  4. 

Superlative  w.  quam.    A.  93,  6:  G.  317 ;  H.  444,  3. 30,  9;  98,  3. 

Supine  in  um.    A.  302 ;  G.  436 ;  H.  546. 11,1;  27,3;  34,2. 

Supine  in  a.    A.  303;  G.  437:  H.  547. 3,  13;  143.  5. 

Utrum  .  .  .  an.    See  Double  questions. 


i!rijt  Stuticnts'  Series  of  ILatin  Classics 


EXERCISES 


IN 


Latin  Peose  Composition 


FOR  SCHOOLS 


BY 

M.  GRANT   DANIELL,  A.M. 

Principal  op  Chaunct-Hall  School,  Boston 


Part  II. 

BASED  UPON  CICERO'S  CATILINE,  l.-IV.,  AND  ARCHIAS. 


LEACH,   SHEWELL,   AND   SANBORK. 
BOSTON.     NEW  YORK.     CHICAGO, 


NOTE.  —  These  Exercises  are  furnished  in  Parts,  or  in 
One  Volume. 


Copyright,  1889, 
BtM.  grant  DANIELL. 


NorfajooH  5Prcg0 : 

J.  S.  Gushing  &  Co.  —  Berwick  &  Smith. 

Boston,  Mass.,  U.S.A. 


CONTENTS. 


Exercises  for  Oral  Translation,  Catiline  I.     . 
Exercises  for  Written  Translation,  Catiline  I. 
Exercises  for  Oral  Translation,  Catiline  II.    . 
Exerciser  for  Written  Translation,  Catiline  II. 
ExEucisi-»  for  Oral  Translation,  Catiline  III. . 
Exercises  for  Written  Translation,  Catiline  III. 
Exercises  for  Oral  Translation,  Cathjne  IV.  . 
Exkrcisf^  for  Written  Translation,  Catiline  IV. 
Exercisf^  for  Oral  Translation,  Archias  . 
Exercises  for  Written  Translation,  Archias    . 


Notes   .... 

GRASniATICAI.  Indkx    . 


PAOK 

1 

9 
13 
20 
24 
32 
36 
43 
47 
54 

69 
71 


1/ . , 


\ 


CATILINE  I. 


CHAPTER  ly 

1,  1.  Did  not'  Ci'^line  abuse  t'h^J^^i^^ce  of  the  senate  ? 
2.  Ditlhis^rtfe^  audacity  damethem  ?  3.  nVas  he 
not  disturbed  by  the  guard  of  the  Pak^ine  ?  4.  The  sen- 
ate was  called  together  in*  a  strongly  fortified,  place. 
5.  *What  were  you  dpnSg  last  night  ?  6.  Do  you  think 
we  do  not  know  *JJ^rQ  you  were  ?  7.  Who  of  us  does 
not  know  *\vlaat  pi^injw  adopted  ?  8.  And  yet  you  are 
alive.  9.  Alive  ?.  Nay  more,  you  •are  taking  part  in  the  Joia<a/U4 
public  deliBer>tions.  10.  Are  we  doing  our  duty  by  the  amUa  U 
state  ?    11.  Brave  men  are  we,  if  we  ^kee^)  out  of  the  way  '^ 

of  the  fur/^d  the  weapons  of  thaxfellow.'*  12.  Each 
one  of  us  is  iniirflSiri'or  slaughter.  13.  Long  ago,  Cati- 
line, you  'ought  to  have   been   marked   for  slaughter. 

14.  Pray,   how   long   shall   you  be   plotting  our  ruin  ? 

15.  We,  the  consuls,  see  all  this.*"  16.  Long  ago  you 
"should  ha^  been  killed  by  the  consul's  hand.     17.  There 

was  once  sucn"  virtue  in  a  consul  *that  he  killed  a  rni^^***^'^^'**^ 
chievous  citizen  with  his  own  hand.     18.  "Ought  Cicero 
to  have  killed  CatiJine  with  his  own  hand  ?     19.  Have 
not  the  consuls  "farteS^^tiTtheir  duty  ?    20.  The  senate 
has  made  a  stern  decree  against  Catiline. 


Z  CICERO:    CATILINE  I. 

CHAPTER   II, 

2.  1.  ■'Let  the  consul  see  that  the  republic  receive  no  f, 
harm.     2.  Gracchus  was  a  man^  of  illustrious  ancestry.        i 

3.  The  senate  decreed  ^that  Gracchus  should  be  slain. 

4.  Now  ^for  twenty  days  you  have  suffe^oCatiline  to 
live.     5.  According  to  the  decree  of  the  senate  Catiline 
should  have  been  killed^  at  once.     6.  The  edge  of  your  ^ 
authority  is  ^owin^dull.     7.  Catiline  does  notg[Mndon 

his  effrontery,  but  p^sis^in  it.  8.  Cicero  desired  not  to^ 
seemnaSty^  9.  But  he  condemned  himself^  for''  his  inac-^ 
tivity.  10.  Daily^  the  number  of  the  enemv-increa^es. 
11.  TOuy^their.  conrmander  is  contriving  some^form  of 
ruin  for  the  s^e.  12.  I  rear  ^°it  will  be  said  that  I  ar- 
rested Catiline  too  ^a^^eTi  13.  I  am  not  afraid  that  any 
one  will  say  I  am  toocraeh^  14.  No  one  can  be  found  so 
e  Catiline  "as  to  dare  to  defend  him.  15.  ^-Does  any 
oiwmCnit  that  this  was  done  i^tmyJ^ILG.  As  long  as 
you  live,^^  you  will  be  beset  by  my  Strong  guards.  17.  You 
cannot  "take  a  step  against  the  republic.  18.  ^^ Although 
you  know  it  not,  we  shall  keep  watch  over  you. 

CHAPTER  III. 

3.  1.  What  is  there  ^that  a  private  house  can  keep 
within^  its  walls  ?  2.  ^Cease  to  think  of  that*  infamous 
purpose   of  yours.      3.  ^You    may  believe    the    consul. 

4.  Manlius  will  be  in   arms  on  the   ^25th   of  October. 

5.  Do  you  remember  that  Manlius  was  in  arms  on  the  25th 
of  October  ?  6.  Manlius  is  his  accomplice  and  tool  in 
these  ^reckless  schemes.  7.  Is  it  to  be  wondered  at  that 
I  was  deceived  ?    8.  Who  is  there  that  can  say  ^I  was  de- 


FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION.  3 

ceived  in  the  day  ?  9.  The  slaughter  of  the  nobility  was 
set  for  the  29th  of  October.  10.  Do  you  remember  *that 
many  of  the  chief  men  of  the  state  fled  from  Rome  *°to 
save  their  lives?  11.  Shall  you  be  satisfied  with  "the 
slaughter  of  us  who  remain?  12.  Can  you  deny  that 
Praeneste  was  fortified  by  my  order  ?  13.  On  the  first 
of  November  a  night  attack  was  made  upon  Praeneste. 
14.  I  not  only  hear,  but  even  see,  what  you  are  doing. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

4-.  1.  I  *keep  a  sharp  lookout  for  the  safety  of  the  state. 
2.  Pray  understand  that  I  know  where  you  were  last 
night.  3.  Several  of  the  confederates  in  your  *mad  vil- 
lany  assembled  ^n  Laeca's  house.  4.  There  are  certain 
men  here  in  the  senate  who  were  there  that  night.  5.  Do 
you  dare  to  deny  that  you, came  ^to  the  scythe-makers' 
quarter?  6.  The  Roman  senate  is  the  most  venerable 
council  in*  the  world.  7.  In  our  own  number  are  men* 
^who  are  plotting  the  Meath  of  all  of  us.  8.  These  men 
ought  to  be  butchered.  9.  Can  you  then  deny  that  you 
were  at  Ljeca's  ?  10.  Have  you  decided  whom  •to  take 
with  you  ?  11.  Presently  I  shall  go  out  myself.  12.  You 
said  that  '®my  being  alive  caused  you  a  little  delay. 
13.  You  found  two  knights  "to  kill  me  in  my  bed  before 
light.     14.  I  know  not  where  *^in  the  world  we  are. 

CHAPTER  V. 

5.  1.  Too  long  'have  the  gates  been  open.  2.  Since  the 
gates  are  open  and  the  camp  of  Manlius  is  longing  for 
you,  depart  from  the  city.    3.  Take  out  with  you  "as 


4  CICERO:    CATILINE  I. 

many  of  your  friends  as  you  can.  4.  You  will  free  me 
from  great  fear,  ^provided  you  cleanse  the  city.  5.  Ju- 
piter Stator  himself  is  between  "^you  and  me.  6.  As  long 
as  I  could  defend  myself  by  personal^  watchfulness,  I 
did  not  employ  a  public  guard.  7.  I  shall  defend  my- 
self ^without  exciting  any  public  commotion.  8.  As  often 
as  Catiline  attacked  Cicero,  he  resisted  him  ^by  his  own 
efforts.  9.  The  lives®  of  all  the  citizens  are  doomed^  to 
destruction.  10.  I  dare  not  yet  order  you  to  be  put  to 
death.  11.  But  I  do  bid  you  depart  from  the  city.  12.  I 
have  long  been  urging^  you  ^%o  drain  off  this  bilge-water 
of  the  [ship  of]  state.  13.  You  have  long  been  hesitat- 
ing^ to  do  "at  my  command  what  you  ought  to  have  done 
of  your  own  accord.  14.  If  you  ^ask  my  advice,  I  advise 
you  Ho  go  into  exile. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

6.  1.  There  was  nobody  in  the  city  Vho  did  not  fear 
Catiline.  2.  Who  is  there  ^that  does  not  hate  Catiline  ? 
3.  The  infamy  of  your  private  life-  clings  to^  your  repu- 
tation. 4.  After*  you  have  ensnared  a  young  man,  you 
offer  him  a  sword  for  his  ^reckless  daring.  5.  ^'Well  then, 
did  you  not  lately  clear  your  house  for  a  new  marriage 
by  the  death  of  your  former  wife  ?  6.  The  downfall^  of 
your  fortunes  is  impending.  7.  Do  you  know  that  no 
one  of  us  is  ignorant  of  this  ?  8.  On  the  *31st  of  Decem- 
ber you  stood  in  the  Comitiura,  ^weapon  in  hand.  9.  The 
fortune  of  the  Komaii  people  ^"stood  in  the  way  of  your 
^'frantic  attempt.  10.  ^When  I  was  consul-elect,  you 
aimed  ^%nany  a  thrust  at  me.  11.  There  is  no  one  of  us 
who  is  ignorant  that  your  dagger  has  by  some  chance 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  6 

slipped  from  your  hands.     12.  The  consul  will  wrest  that 
dagger  "out  of  your  hands. 

CHAPTER  VII. 

7.  1. 1  am  not  moved  by  hatred,  as^  I  ought  *to  be, 
but  by  pity.  2.  Who  out  of  this  great^  throng  does  not 
seem  to  be  afraid  of  you  ?  3.  Why !  You  are  looked 
upon  with  *liostility  by  all.  4.  As  soon  as  you  came 
into  the  senate,  you  saw  the  benches  emptied.  5.  Pray 
with  what  feelings*  do  you  think  'you  ought  to  bear  the 
thought'  that  your  parents  are  afraid  of  you  ?  6.  *If  my 
parents  were  afraid  of  me,  I  should  avoid  the  sight  of 
them.  7.  *If  my  country  hated  me,  I  should  fear  her 
power.  8.  Your  country,  though'  silent,  yet'  speaks  with 
you.  9.  You  alone  have  power  to  overthrow  the  laws. 
10.  But  now  I  am  wholly  in  fear  ^at  every  sound.  11.  '^'If 
you  depart,  you  will  deliver  me  from  this  fear.  12.  *If 
you  had  departed,  you  would  have  delivered  me  from 
this  fear.  l3.  No  plan  can  be  formed  against  the  coun- 
try that  is  inconsistent  with  your  villany.  14.  *If  my 
fear  were  groundless,  I  should  cease  to  fear, 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

8.  1.  ^If  your  country  had  spoken  thus  with  you,  she 
ought  *to  have  gained  her  request.  2.  He  gave  himself* 
into  custody.  3.  *To  avoid  suspicion',  he  was  willing  to 
dwell  at  my  house.  4.  Catiline  begged  Cicero  to  keep 
him*  at  his  house.  5.  If  you  were  willing  to  live  with 
me,  you  would  not  escape  suspicion.  6.  I  asked  him  to 
keep  me  at  his  house.    7.  He  said®  that  he  could  not'  be 


6  CICERO:    CATILINE  I. 

safe  in  the  same  house  with  him ;  8.  '^seeing  that  he  was 
in  great  danger  ^because  they  were  in  the  same  city. 

9.  Consign  ^that  life  of  yours,  ^Vhich  has  been  rescued 
from  deserved  punishment,  to  flight  and  solitude.  10.  If 
the  senate  had  decreed  it  ^^to  be  its  pleasure  that  he 
should  go  into  exile,  he  would  have  complied.  11.  ^If 
you  should  go  out  of  the  city,  you  would  free  the  repub- 
lic from  fear.  12.  The  same  men  whose  hands  I  have 
long  ^%ad  hard  work  to  keep  away  from  you  will  escort 
you  to  the  gates  "when  you  go. 

CHAPTER  IX. 

9.  1.  0  that  tho  immortal  gods  would  crush  you! 
2.  0  that  they  ^had  given  you  that  intention !  3.  0  that 
you  would  bring  your  mind  to  ^the  point  of  going  into 
exile !  4.  But  it  is  ^worth  the  cost,  provided  that  you 
go  into  exile.  5.  You  are  not  the  man,  Catiline,  ^to  be 
recalled  from  infamy  by  ^a  sense  of  shame.  6.  It  is  not 
to  be  expected  that®  reason  should  ever  recall  you  from 
madness.  7.  Provided  you  separate  yourself  from  good 
citizens,  take  yourself  off  to  Manlius.  8.  If  you  should 
proceed  straight^  into  exile,  you  would  kindle  ^a  flame 
of  odium  against  me.  9.  If  you  wish  to  make  war  upon 
your  country,  you  will  separate  yourself  from  good  men. 

10.  Why  should  I  invite  you,  Vho  have  agreed  upon  a 
day  with  Manlius  ?  11.  I  know  that  that  silver  eagle 
will  be  fatal  to  you.  12.  Can  you  longer  do  without 
that  eagle  ? 

CHAPTER  X. 

10.  1.  Sometime  ^that  unbridled  passion  of  yours  will 
bring  you^  sorrow.     2.  Did  nature  create  you  for  this 


FOR   ORAL   TRANSLATION.  7 

insane  passion  ?  3.  You  have  got  together  a  band  of 
ruffians,  'who  have  been  ^bereft  of  all  hope.  4.  You  revel 
in  delight  when  you  are  lying  on  the  ground.  5.  *You 
will  have  an  opportunity  to  plot  against  the  property  of 
peaceful  men.  6.  *You  had  an  opportunity  to  assail  the 
republic  when  an  exile.  7.  In  a  short  time  you  will  be 
exhausted  by  cold  and  hunger  and  want.  8.  So  much  I 
have  accomplished,  that  you  can  no  longer  commit  crime 
in  this  city.  9.  That  which  you  have  wickedly  under- 
taken is  robbery  rather  than  war. 

CHAPTER  XI. 

11,  1.  'Let  my  words  sink  deep  into  your  hearts  and 
minds.  2.  What  is  far*  dearer  to  you  than  your  life  ? 
3.  If  you  should  find  him  to  be  an  enemy,  would  you  allow 
him  to  depart  ?  4.  He  is  waited  for  as  a  commander'^  in 
the  camp  of  the  enemy.  5.  Can  you  suffer  him  to  be  let 
into  the  city  ?  6.  Are  you  prevented  by  the  custom  of 
our  ancestors  ?  7.  Men*  who  revolt  from  the  state  never 
hokl  the  rights  of  citizens.  8.  A  very  fine  *return  you 
are  making  to  me,  *\vho  have  raised  you  to  the  highest 
office  so  early.  9.  Will  you  through^  fear  of  odium  neg- 
lect the  safety  of  the  state  ?  10.  Wlien  Italy  is  laid 
waste  by  war,  you  will  be  consumed  ®in  the  flames  of 
odium. 

CHAPTER  XII. 

12.  1.  if  I  did  not  think  you  'held  the  same  views,  I 
should  *make  you  a  brief  reply.  2.  The  best  thing  to 
do  is  to  reply  briefly  to  these  solemn  words.  3.  If  I  had 
punished  Catiline  with  death,  I  should  not  have  dis- 
graced myself.     4.  Surely  *T  have  no  fear  of  polluting 


8  CICERO:    CATILINE  I. 

myself  with,  tlie  blood  of  this  parricide.  5.  I  have  always 
regarded  unpopularity  incurred  through  virtue  as  glory, 
not  unpopularity.  6.  There  were  some  who  did  not 
see  the  dangers  that  impended.  7.  If  I  saw  the  dan- 
gers that  threaten,  I  should  not  dissemble.  8.  Many 
will  strengthen  the  rising  conspiracy  ^y  dissembling. 

9.  There  are  some  who  do  not  believe  that  a  conspiracy 
is  forming.  10.  ^By  the  death  of  Catiline  alone  the  con- 
spiracy will  be  checked  for  a  little  while,  not  crushed 
forever.  11.  No  one  is  so  stupid  ^as  not  to  know  that 
the  conspiracy  cannot  be  crushed  by  the  death  of  one 
man. 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

13.  1.  Believe  us,  Catiline,  from  anxiety  and  fear. 
2.  Let  ^this  great  band  of  robbers  be  removed.  3.  But 
^let  not  the  danger  remain  in  the  vitals  of  the  republic. 
4.  ^If  you  drink  cold  vvater,  you  will  be  relieved  at  first, 
but  afterwards  ''will  suffer  much  more  violently.  5.  *Let 
a  wall  separate  the  bad  from  the  good.  6.  Finally,  ^let 
it  be  written  upon  the  brow  of  ''every  man  ^what  his 
sentiments  are  on  public  affairs.  7.  I  promise  you  this, 
conscript  fathers,  that  all  things  shall  be  brought  to  light 
and  laid  bare.  8.  ^Let  those  who  have  united^'^  with  Cati- 
line in  every  crime  depart  to  the  impious  war.  9.  Thee, 
0  Jupiter,  we  have  rightly  named  the  Stay  of  this  city. 

10.  ^^May  Jove  keep  this  man  away  from  his  altars  and 
temples  and  from  the  lives^^  of  the  citizens. 


y 


FOR  WRITTEN  TRANSLATION. 


FOR  WRITTEN  TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTERS   I.— III. 

14,  1.  Pray  how  long,  Catiline,  shall  you  abuse  our 
patience  ?  Your  plans  'are  all  exposed.  The  consuls 
hold  your  whole  conspiracy  -in  their  grasp.  They  know 
what  plans  you  adopt.  The  senate,  too,*  knows,  all  these 
things,  and  yet  you  are  alive.  Alive  ?  Nay  more,  you 
have  come  into  the  senate,  plotting  our  destruction,  and 
eager  to  lay  waste  the  whole  earth  with  fire  and  slaugh- 
ter, 

2.  Once  a  mischievous  citizen  was  slain  by  the  Ponti- 
fex  Maximus,  but  we,  consuls,  who  have  a  decree  of  the 
senate  against  you,  allow  you  to  live.  *For  twenty  days 
already  the  decree  has  been  shut  up  in  the  records,  *like 
a  sword  buried  in  its  sheath,  and  yet  you  do  not  abandon 
your  ^audacious  schemes. 

3.  I  desire  'to  be  merciful,  but  I  do  condemn  myself 
foi**  inactivity  and  negligence.  You  ought  to  have  been 
put  to  death  long  ago ;  but  for  a  particular  reason  I  have 
not  yet  ordered  that  to  be  done.  I  wish  you  to  live  as 
long  as  there  is'  any  one  who  ventures  to  defend  you. 

4.  But,  believe  me,  many  men  are  watching  you, 
'"although  you  know  it  not,  and  not  even  a  private  house 
can  keep  within"  its  walls  the  voice  of  your  conspiracy, 
You  are  "beset  on  every  hand.  Hemmed  in  by  my  guai*ds, 
you  cannot  '^take  a  step  against  the  "public  interest.  You 
can  do  nothing  that  I  do  not  immediately  find  out. 


f 


10  CICERO:    CATILINE  I. 

CHAPTERS   IV.— VI. 

15.  1.  Did  you  not  come  into  Laeca's  house  ^night 
before  last  ?|  Are  there  not  here  in  the  senate  certain 
men^  who  were  with  you  ?  0  immortal  gods,  Vhere  in 
the  world  are  we  ?  What  city  do  we  live  in  ?  Here, 
here,  in  this  most  venerable  council  in*  the  world,  are 
some^  who  are  ^partners  in  your  folly  and  wickedness. 

2.  Two  Roman  knights  promised  ^o  kill  me  that  very 
night,  but  I  discovered  the  "treacherous  design,  and  when 
they  came  in  the  morning  to  greet  me,  I  shut  them  out. 
*Such  being  the  case,  Catiline,  depart  from  the  city.  Pro- 
ceed to  the  camp  ^of  Manlius.  I  shall  be  relieved  of  great 
fear,  provided  that  we  ^°get  rid  of  this  dreadful  curse  of 
the  republic. 

3.  Why  have  I  not  yet  ordered  Catiline  to  be  put  to 
death?  Why  has  not  the  consul  ordered  the  public 
enemy  to  go  into  exile  ?  Why  has  not  Catiline  of  his 
own  accord  gone  from  a  city  where"  there  is  no  man  who 
does  not  fear  and  hate  him  ?  As  long  as  I  ^-am  alive,  he 
does  not  wish  to  go. 

4.  Disgrace  and  dishonor  cling  to^^  his  reputation. 
"Many  a  young  man  has  he  ensnared  by  the  allurements 
of  his  corrupting  arts.  He  has  heaped  crime  upon^^  crime. 
But  I  pass  by  what  pertains  to  his  private  embarrass- 
ments, and  come  to  what^*  concerns^'  the  life  and  safety 
of  us  all.  He  has  attempted  to  put  to  death  many  lead- 
ing men  of  the  state,  and  to  overwhelm  the  city  with  fire 
and  slaughter. 

CHAPTERS  VII.— IX. 

16.  1.  Pray  how^  can  you  bear  it  that^  no  one  out  of 
this  great^  throng  saluted  you  wJienyou  entered*  the 


I 


FOR   WRITTEN   TRANSLATION.  11 

senate  ?  J  Do  you  wait  for  the  reproach  of  words'  when\ 
you  are  overwhelmed  by  the  stern  judgment  of  silence  ?l 

\If  my  acquaintances  did  not  greet  me,  I  should  prefer  to 
avoid  their  sight  and  presence^  If  I  did  not  reverence 
the  authority  of  my  parents,  I  should  retire  ''out  of  their 

sig1T!!7 

2.  You  do  not  reverence  the  authority  of  your  country, 
which  is  the  common  parent  of  us  all.  rl'or  a  long  time 
you  Tiave  thought  of  nothing  but  her  death.  She  is 
wholly  in  fear  on  account  of  you  alone. '  *It  seems  that 
no  design  can  be  formed  against  her  without  you.  '  This 
must  not  be  Iwrne.  ^ 

b  3.  Ought  you  not  then  to  go  away  into  exile  ?  Do  you 
demand  a  decree  of  the  senate?^!  shall  not  'put  the 
question  to  the  senate,  and  yet  I  will  *"let  you  know 
what  the  senate  thinks  of  you/^  Begone  from  the  city, 
Catiline.  'Do  you  not  see  that  the  senate  is  silent? 
"Silence  gives  consent. 

4.  If  I  had  ordered  that  sterling  man,  Marcus  Mar- 
cellus,  to  go  into'exile,  the  senate  would  "with  perfect 
justice  have  laid  "violent  hands  upon  me,  but  ^*as  to  you, 
they  express  approval  ^y  their  very  silence.  It  is  not 
to  be  expected  that  you  should  ever  ^*reform  your  char- 
acter. "0  that  you  would  go  into  exile !  0  that  you 
would  separate  yourself  from  good  citizens  ! 

CHAPTERS  X.— XIII 

17.  1.  There  are  some  in  this  body,  conscript  fathers, 
who  think  that  I  should  be  acting  cruelly  and  tyranni- 
cally, Uf  I  should  punish  Catiline  with  death.  They  do 
not  see  the  dangers  that  threaten  us.'    They  do  not  even 


12 


CICERO:    CATILINE   I. 


believe  that  a  conspiracy  has  been  made.  But  my  coun- 
try seems  to  condemn  me  foi*^  inactivity,  *in  that  I  allow 
that  gladiator  to  live  a  single  hojut^ 

2.  ^Methinks  she  is  even  now  reproaching  me  ^for 
neglecting  the  safety  of  the  citizens  through  fear  of  un- 
popularity. If  I  should  permit  Catiline  to  go  from  the 
city  to  the  camp  of  Manlius,  as'^  he  purposes,  no  one  will 
be  so  stupid  as  not  to  admit  that  he  is  no  longer  a  citizen. 

3.  If  he  takes  with  him  his  whole  band  of  ruined  and 
desperate  men,  whom  he  has  collected  from  all  quarters, 
the  root  and  seed  of  all  evils  will  be  stamped  out  and 
destroyed.  For  a  long  time  the  city  %as  been  involved 
in  these  dangers,  but  'in  some  way  or  other  ^"all  evils 
have  come  to  maturity  in  the  time  of  my  consulship. 

4.  Bad  men  are  plotting  against  the  consul  in  his  own 
house,  surrounding  the  tribunal  of  the  city  prsetor,  be- 
sieging the  Senate-house  with  swords  ^n  their  hands, 
and^  preparing  torches  to  burn  the  city.  If  they  all 
depart,  and  follow  Catiline  out  of  the  city,  you  will  see 
the  whole  conspiracy  "laid  open,  and  not  only  that,  but 
also  crushed  forever. 


CATILINE  II. 


FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTER  I. 

18.  1.  At  last,  fellow-citizens,  Catiline  has  been  driven 
out  of  the  city.  2.  Or  he  has  departed  *of  his  own  ac- 
cord, threatening  this  city  with  fire  and  sword.  3.  ^o 
longer  will  that  monster  go  about  within  the  walls  of  the 
city.  4.  That  dagger  has  been  wrested  out  of  his''  hands. 
5.  He  is  broken  down  with  sorrow,  ^because  I  am  alive 
and  the  city  stands.  6.  He  is  prostrated  with  grief  *be- 
cause  the  blade  of  his  dagger  is  not  "stained  with  blood. 
7.  You  are  no  longer  in  fear  within  the  walls  •of  your 
houses,  8.  In  the  Forum  and  in  the  Campus  you  are 
safe,  fellow-citizens.  9.  The  city  rejoices  because  it  has 
"rid  itself  of  such  a  curse.  10.  Catilme  is  wailing  ^because 
the  city  has  been  snatched  from  his  grasp.® 


CHAPTER    II. 

19.  1.  If  there  is  any  one  who  thinks  that  Catiline 
^should  have  been  arrested  rather  than  flowed  to  go,  — 
that  is  not  my  fault.  2.  So  deatlly  a  foe  ought  long  ago 
to  have  been  put  to  death.    3.  'How  many  are  there  who 


14  H  ' ;  ' . :  '  •  ' ;  ^'ic^iio :  oatiline  ii. 

do  not  believe  what  I  report  ?  4.  How  many  do  you 
think  there  are  who  even  defend  Catiline  ?  5.  If  I  had 
thought  that  the  public  interest  required  his  death,  I 
should  have  removed  him  even  at  the  risk  of  my  life. 
6.  I  saw  that,  *if  the  fact  were  not  proved  to  your  satis- 
faction, ^I  should  be  overwhelmed  with  odium.  7.  Now 
we  can  fight  openly,  since  we  see  the  enemy  plainly. 
8.  ^Would  that  you  had  believed  what  I  reported !  9.  I 
^am  vexed  that  he  did  not  take  with  him  all  his  forces. 
10.  You  know  how  much  I  am  vexed  %t  his  having  gone 
Vith  too  small  a  retinue. 

CHAPTER    III. 

20.  1.  If  I  show^  those  desperate  old  men  the  edict  of 
the  praetor,  they  will  ^take  to  their  heels.  2.  I  utterly 
despise  those  who  are  flitting  about  in  the  Forum  shining 
with  ointment.  3.  I  ^wish  rather  that  they  had  deserted 
the  army.  4.  Eemember  that  I  know  to  whom  the 
Picenian  territory  has  been  assigned.  5.  Remember  that 
I  disclosed  all  their  plans  yesterday.  6.  You  are  greatly 
mistaken,  if  you  think  those  country  bankrupts  are  much 
to  be  feared.  7.  I  know  that  even'*  Catiline  was  ^alarmed 
and  fled.  8.  They  are  greatly  mistaken,  if  they  expect 
*^hat  Apulia  will  be  assigned  to  them. 


,  CHAPTER    IV. 

21.  1.  You  see  that  men  like  Catiline^  have  formed  a 
conspiracy  openly  against  the  state.  2.  ^Unless  indeed 
there  is  some  one  who  thinks  that  I  have  not  attained 
what  I  ^have  been  waiting  for.  -^S.  There  is  no  longer 


FOli    OKAL   TICAl-ISLATION.  15 

any*  room  for  severity ;  the  case  of  itself  demands 
clemency.  4.  If  they  go  from  the  city,  poor  Catiline  will 
no  longer  pine  *\vith  longing  for  them,  v  5.  'If  they  should 
set  out  by  the  Aurelian  road,  they  would  overtake  him 
towards  evening.  6.  0  fortunate  men/  if  they  do  over- 
take* him !  ^  7.  What  villany  'could  be  imagined  that  he 
did  not  devise  ?  8.  \There  was  never  such'*'  villany  in 
any  man  as"  in  him.  9.  There  was  no  scoundrel  in^  all 
Italy  whom  he  did  not  live  ^''on  intimate  terms  with. 


CHAPTER    V. 

22.  1.  Trained  by  the  practice  of  daring  crimes  'to 
endure  hunger  and  thirst,  he  is  proclaimed  as  most  brave 
by  his  boon-companions.  2.  And  yet  this  same  man  is 
using  up  the  aids  to  virtuous  living  in  ^reckless  profligacy. 
3.  Although  their  credit  has  failed  them,  their  profligacy 
remains.  4.  If  they  merely  mortgaged  their  property, 
they  might'  be  endured.  5.  But  they  are  *in  a  hopeless 
case,  because  they  ^waste  their  substance  in  riotous 
living.  6.  The  penalty  long  due  to  their  wickedness  is 
now  clearly  approaching.  7.  There  is  no  king  •for  you 
to  fear.  8.  ^We  have  to  contend  with  those  who  are  here 
in  the  city  with  us.  9.  By  whatever  means  I  can,  I  shall 
cure  what  can  be  cured.  10.  If  you  remain  in  the  city, 
look  out  for  the  doom  that  hangs  over  you. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

23.  1.  There  were  some  who  said  that  I  drove  Catiline 
into  exile.  2.  Who  is  so  timid  and  so  excessively*  modest 
that  he  cannot  bear  the  voice  of  the  consul  ?    3.  I  asked 


16  CICERO:    CATILINE   11. 

Catiline  whether^  I  had  ordered  him  to  go  into  exile  or 
not.  4.  I  ask  you,  fellow-citizens,  whether  or  not  you 
were  in  the  Forum  yesterday.  5.  I  will  show  in  what 
manner  the  plan  of  the  whole  war  ®was  mapped  out. 
6.  Why  do  you  hesitate  to  go  "^to  the  place  where  you 
have  long  been  preparing  ^to  go  ?  7.  When  I  asked  him 
what  he  ^was  doing  at  Lseca's,  he  hesitated.  8.  ''Of  course 
that  famous*  silver  eagle  was  sent  to  Massilia,  not  to  the 
camp  of  Manlius.  9.  Was  I  driving  into  exile  a  man 
who  had  already  entered  upon  war,  and  had  sent  forward 
arms  and  standards  ?  10.  Are  you  aware  that  he  had 
built  a  shrine  for  that  eagle  in  his  own  house  ? 


CHAPTER  VII. 

24.  1.  Catiline  has  suddenly  changed  his  mind,^  and 
abandoned  his  design  of  making  war.  2.  Not  only  has 
he  been  paralyzed  by  my  labors,  but  he  has  even  been 
despoiled  of  his  arms.  3.  ^It  is  said  that  I  have  sent 
into  exile  an  innocent  man  ^without  granting  him  a  trial. 
4.  There  are  some  who  think  him  not  bad,  but  unfortu- 
nate. 5.  I  am  thought  to  be  not  a  diligent  consul,  but  a 
cruel  tyrant.  6.  It  is  ^worth  while  for  me  to  be  thought 
a  tyrant,^  provided  Catiline  changes  his  course  from  war 
to  exile.  7.  It  is  worth  while  to  administer  the  Affairs 
of  state,  if  only  the  state  be  preserved.  8.  What  should 
you  say,  if  Catiline  were  commanding  an  army  of  the 
enemy  ?  9.  I  fear  this  much  more,  that  he  will  be 
hovering  around  in  arms  near  the  city.  10.  ^ut  since 
there  are  men  who  say  that  he  has  gone  to  Massilia, 
what  would  the  same  men  think  if  he  had  gone  to 
Manlius  ? 


FOR   ORAL   TRANSLATION.  17 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

25.  1.  Do  you  not  admit  that  you  are  an  enemy  ? 
2.  Those  who  remain  with  us  I  wish  not  so  much  to 
punish  as  to  restore  ^to  their  senses.  3.  I  have  said 
nothing  about  those=^  I  do  not  fear.  4.  If  you  are  will- 
ing to  listen  to  me,  I  will  give  you  the  medicine  of  my 
advice.  5.  The  forces  of  Catiline  are  made  up  of  six 
classes  of  men.  6.  The  appearance  of  those  men  who 
have  great  possessions  is  very  respectable.  7.  If  you 
were  rich,  would  you  hesitate  to  take  from  your  property 
and  add  to  your  credit  ?  8.  You  are  mistaken  if  you 
expect  new  accounts  from  Catiline.  9.  If  they  had  not 
been  struggling  ^o  meet  the  interest  by  means  of  the 
produce  of  their  farms,  they  would  be  better  citizens. 
10.  But  these  rich  men  do  not  seem  to  me  *likely  to  bear 
arms  against  the  republic. 

CHAPTER  IX. 

26,  1.  They  despair  ^of  gaining  honors  *in  a  tranquil 
state  of  the  republic.  2.  I  give  this  advice  to  them,  *ex- 
actly  the  same  as  to  all  the  rest.  3.  You  cannot  attain 
that  which  you  are  attempting.  4.  There  is  an  excellent 
spirit  in  the  better  classes,  great  harmony  in  the  multi- 
tude. 5.  Finally,  the  immortal  gods  will  render  aid  ^in 
person  to  this  fair  city.  6.  Do  they  expect  to  obtain 
that  which  they  covet  with  such*  a  detestable  spirit? 
7.  The  colonies  *as  a  whole  are  composed^  of  excellent 
men.  8.  But  these  are  colonists  who  *make  an  extrava- 
gant display  in  consequence  of  their  sudden  wealth. 
9.  If  you  wish  to  be  saved,  "you  must  call  up  Sulla  from 


18  •        CICERO:    CATILINE  II. 

tlie  shades.  10.  Those  who  themselves  have  fallen  into 
debt  have  forced  some  poor  and  needy  peasants  into  their 
former  hope  of  plunder. 

« 

CHAPTER  X. 

27.  1.  The  fourth  class  is  composed^  of  men  who  will 
never  ^get  their  heads  above  water.  2.  ^Some  of  them 
through  ^bad  management,  some^  through  extravagance, 
are  staggering  ^under  the  weight  of  debt.  3.  Since  they 
cannot  stand,  let  them  fall.  4.  But  let  not  ^their  nearest 
neighbors  know  it,  much  less  the  state.  5.  I  do  not  un- 
derstand this, — why  Catiline  should  think  these  swin- 
dlers will  make^  active  soldiers.  6.  Do  you  think  it  more 
disgraceful  to  perish  alone  than  with  ^the  multitude? 
7.  The  jail  cannot  hold  all  these  parricides,  assassins, 
and  criminals.  8.  The  last  class  is  composed  of  men  who 
are  ^''Catiline's  bosom  friends.  9.  Be  assured  that  this 
class  is  peculiarly"  Catiline's.  10.  What  do  these  poor 
wretches  want^^?  To  learn  to  brandish  daggers  and 
scatter  poison  ? 

CHAPTER  XI. 

28.  1.  It  is  a  war  greatly  to  be  feared,  since  Catiline 
has  such  a  famous  ^body  of  troops.  2.  Marshal  now 
against  his  body-guard  the  flower  and  strength  of  all 
Italy.  3.  Set^  that  wounded  gladiator  against^  your  con- 
suls and  commanders.  4.  That  outcast  and  broken-down 
band  of  ruined  men  ^is  no  match  for  your  garrisons  and 
armies.  5.  Your  forces,  garrisons,  and  equipments  ought 
not  to  be  compared  with  his  destitution  and  lack  of  all 
such  things.     6.  We  are  supplied  with  a  treasury  and 


FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION.  19 

with  revenues,  which^  he  lacks.  7.  On  the  one  side  con- 
tends honesty,  on  the  other  treachery ;  on  this  side  jus- 
tice, on  that  injustice.  8.  Finally  well-grounded  hope  is 
in  conflict  with  utter*  despair.  9.  In  a  contest  of  this 
kind,  may  the  immortal  gods  be  "on  our  side.  10.  Even 
if  'human  efforts  fail,  the  gods  will  compel  such*  vices  to 
be  overcome  by  these  most  excellent  virtues. 


>Q  CHAPTER  XII. 

29.  1.  If  you  will  defend  your  own  homes,  I  will  pro- 
vide ^i  sufficient  guard  for  the  city.  2.  I  have  informed 
the  colonies  about  Catiline's  nocturnal  sally.     3.  Although 

i  he  thought  the  gladiators  were  sure  for  him,  they  are 
'better  disposed  than  the  patricians.  4.  We  shall  easily 
keep  them  in  check  by  our  power.  5.  I  have  sent 
)  Metellus  ahead  either  to  crush  the  fellow,  or  to  check  all 
^  his  movements.  6.  Those  enemies  whom  Catiline  has 
left  in  the  city  %iust  be  warned  again  and  again.  7.  I 
cannot  forget  that  many  have  remained  in  the  city,  *or 
rather,  have  been  left  here  by  Catiline.  8.  I  shall  live 
with  you  or  die  for  you.  9.  If  I  detect  any  attempt 
against  the  city,  I  cannot  shut  my  eyes  Ho  it.  10.  If  any 
one  makes  any  disturbance  in  the  city,  he  will  find  me 
watchful. 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

30.  1.  I  alone  shall  be  your  leader  and  general,  'though 
acting  in  a  civil  capacity.  2.  I  will  so  conduct  this  cruel' 
war  that  there  shall  be  the  least  possible  confusion. 
3.  This  war  is  'such  a  treacherous  one  that  a  few  good 
men  may  i)erish.    4.  *Under  the  guidance  of  the  immortal 


20  CICERO:    CATILINE   U. 

(     gods,   the   danger  that   threatens   the   country  will   be 

\   checked.     5.  Relying  upon  the  ^niany  sut'c  tokens  of  the 

I  gods,  I  promise  that  j'ou  shall  all  be  safe.     6.  Formerly 

w  the  gods  were  wont  to  protect  us  from  afar.     7.  If  you 

]  beseech,  supplicate,  and  implore  them,  they  will  be  here 

/    in  person.     8.  The  city  which  is  the  most  beautiful  of  all 

/     will  be  defended  from  the  infamous  crime  of  desperate 

I      citizens. 

FOE   ^VRITTEN   TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTERS   I.— V. 

31.  1.  At  last,  fellow-citizens,  he  who  ^has  long  been 
plotting  the  ruin  of  the  state  within  the  very  walls^  of 
the  city,  Lucius  Catiline,  that  vile  corrupter  of  youth, 
that  leader  of  profligate  and  ruined  men,^  whom  all  good 
citizens^  fear,  has  been  driven  out  of  the  city,  which  seems 
to  me  to  rejoice  and  exult  that*  it  has  ^rid  itself  of  so 
eadly  a  foe. 

If  there  be  any  one  of  you^  who  asks  why  I  allowed 

^him^to  depart,  and  did  not  rather  arrest  him^  and  even 

put  him^  to  death,  remember  that  there  are  many  who  do 

not  believe  that  a  conspiracy  has  been  made.     ^My  desire 

^  was  to  force  him  from  secret  plots  to  open  marauding. 

^This  object  I  have  now  attained. 

3.  When  he  found  that  I  knew  all  his  plans,  which 
yesterday  I  disclosed  in  the  senate,  he  took  fright  and 
ran  away.     Now,  at  last,  there  can  be  no  one  ^who  does 


FOR    SVKlllhN    TKAN8LATION.  21 

not  believe  what  I  reported,  no  one  ''^to  defend  Catiline. 
I  "could  wish  indeed  that  all  his  boon-companions,  swin- 
dlers, poisoners,  assassins,  parricides,  had  followed  him. 
4.  But  these  remain.  '^Fortunate  will  be  the  republic, 
glorious  the  renown  of  my  consulship,  if  only  the  whole 
gang  follow"  its  leader  out  of  the  city.  Then  there 
would  be  no  one  '^for  us  to  fear,  for  such"  an  army  of 
profligates  as"  Catiline  has  gathered  together  is  not  to 
ije,  feared. 

CHAPTERS  VI.— IX. 

32.   1.  But  ^there  are  some  who  ask  ^whether  I  drove 

I  Catiline  into  exile  or  not.     These  men  do  not  know,  I 

\suppose,  that  when  he  came  into  the  senate  yesterday 

lot  one  senator  greeted  him,  but  everybody*  regarded* 

lim  as  a  most  cruel  enemy.     They  have  not  heard  that 

^disclosed  to  the  senate  his  whole  plan  of  warfare. 

2.  How  can  it  be  said  that  I  drove  him  into  exile, 
when*  all  the  senators  know  that  he  has  entered  upon 
war,  that  he  has  sent  to  the  camp  of  Manlius  arms  and 
military  standards,  and  even  his  silver  eagle  ?  Those 
who  'make  this  assertion,  who  believe  that  he  is  an  inno- 
cent man,  and  I  a  cruel''  tyrant,  that  banish  men  by 
threats  and  force,  are  attempting  to  raise*  a  storm  of 
^odium  against  me. 

:3.  "But  what  would  these  same  men,  who  assert  that 
Catiline  has  gone  into  exile  at^^  Massilia,  say  if  he  should 
turn  his  course  from  flight  and  exile  to  a  career  of  crime 
and  war?  AVtat  if  he  should  within  three  days  com- 
mand an  army  of  the  enemy  ?  AVhat  if  he  should  prefer 
to  be  killed  "in  partisan  warfare  rather"  than  live  in 
exile? 


22  CICERO:    CATILINE   II. 

4.  It  seems  ^^necessary  for  me  to  speak  now  about  the 
classes  of  men  from  which  the  forces  of  Catiline  are  pro- 
cured. First,  there  are  those  rich  men  who  are  ^'^deeply 
in  debt,  and  who  expect  from  Catiline  a  new  deal,  ^^by 
which  their  large  properties  may  be  saved.  Another 
class  is  composed  of  men  who  expect  to  gain  power  by 
the  very  confusion  of  the  state. 

CHAPTERS   X.— XIII. 

33.  1.  Since  this  is  so,  fellow-citizens,  I  have  so  man- 
aged affairs  that,  even  if  Catiline  should  make  raids  upon 
the  colonies  and  free-towns,  they  can  easily  be  defended. 
The  senate  has  been  summoned  to  arrange  what  remains. 
Finally,  I  cannot  forget  that  those  whom  Catiline  has 
left  in  the  city  are  our  enemies,  ^and  that  they  should  be 
warned  again  and  again  ^not  to  make  any  stir  in  the  city. 

2.  To  these  men  I  say,  "^Be  assured  that  the  consuls 
are  vigilant,  that  they  have  provided  *a  sufficient  guard 
for  the  city,  and  that  the  citizens  have  been  warned  to 
defend  their  homes  with  sentinels  and  guards.  You  can 
not  only  commit  no^  ^overt  act,  but  cannot  even  make  the 
slightest'  attempt  against  your  country  that  I  shall  not 
immediately  discover." 

3.  We  are  supplied  with  everything^  that^  Catiline 
lacks.  On  one  side  are  your  consuls  and  generals,  on 
the  other,  that  worn-out  and  wounded  gladiator ;  on  one 
side  the  flower  and  strength  of  all  Italy,  on  the  other,  a 
gang  of  shaineless  and  indecent  profligates ;  on  this  side 
the  cities  of  your  colonists,  on  that,  the  wooded  heights 
of  Catiline. 

4.  In  a  contest  of  this  kind,  who  can  doubt  that"  the 


FOR   WRITTEN  TR^VNSLATION. 


23 


immortal  gocls  will  defend  "in  person  this  fair  city  against 
the  impious  attacks  of  unprincipled  men  ?  Do  you, 
then,  fellow-citizens,  enter  upon  this  war  relying  not 
on  human  devices,  but  on  the  gods  themselves.  Under 
my  guidance  no  good  man  shall  perish,  but  all  villany 
shall  be  crushed. 


CATILINE  III. 


FOR   ORAL   TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTER  I. 

34.  1.  To-day,  fellow-citizens,  the  lives^  of  you  all  have 
been  snatched  from  the  jaws  of  fate.  2.  Great  is  the  love 
of  the  immortal  gods  for^  this  beautiful  city.  3.  Since^ 
the  city  has  been  preserved^  through  my  labors,  I  ought 
to  be  held*  in  honor  by*  yoji.  4.  ^h?  who  foiyided  this 
city  has  been  raised  to  ^a  place  among  the  immortal  gods. 
5.  ^A  few  days  ago  the  fires  ^hat  had  been  set  around 
the  temples  and  shrines  were  put  out.  6.  Since^  you  are 
ignorant  in  what  way  we  extinguished  these  fires,  I  will 
now  briefly  explain.  7.  That  the  citizens  might  know 
in  what  way  the  conspiracy  was  discovered,  the  consul 
explained  it*  to  them.  8.  Could  the  citizens  be  safe,  if 
Catiline  left  the  most  active  leaders  of  the  war  at  Rome  ? 


CHAPTER  II. 

35.  1.  At  that  time  I  Vas  spending  all  my  days  and 
nights  ^in  an  effort  to  find  out  the  cause  of  the  rebellion 
'in  Gaul.  2.  I  know  that  those  *who  remain  will  be  weak 
without  him.  3.  I  knew  that  those  Vho  remained  at 
Rome  were  spending  their  days  and  nights  *in  an  effort 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  25 

to  tamper  witli  the  ambassadors.  4.  Now  •!  have  such  a 
grasp  of  the  wliole'  subject  that  I  know  ^v^at  they  are 
doing  and  *what  plots  they  are  laying.  5.  When  you 
see*  with  your  eyes  the  crime  itself,  then  you  will  pro- 
vide for  your  safety  with  all  your  hearts.  C.  The  '**oppor- 
tunity  was  offered  to  the  ambassadors  to  kindle  a  war 
"beyond  the  Alps.  7.  Lucius  Flaccus,  a  brave  and 
patriotic"  man,  was  sent  with  the  Allobroges  to  the 
Mulvian  bridge.  8.  As  evening  drew  on,  Gains  Pomp- 
tinus,  '%ho  entertained  all  noble  and  generous  sentiments 
towards  the  state,  undertook  the  task.  9.  I  "make  con- 
tinual use  of  the  aid  of  several  young  men  from  Reate. 
10.  As  the  third  watch  had  nearly  passed,  these  brave 
men  made  an  attack  with  swords  upon  the  praetors. 


CHAPTER   III. 

36.  1.  The  seals  ^of  whatever  letters  were  found  in 
that  company  were  unbroken.  2.  *Just  at  dawn  Gabinius, 
*who  as  yet  suspected  nothing,  *was  arrested  and  brought 
before  me.  3.  Then  I  summoned  Statilius,  and  after  him 
Cethegus.  4.  Many  distinguished  men  of  the  state  de- 
cided' that  Gabinius  should  be  summoned.  5.  If  no 
discovery  •is  made,  I  shall  seem  to  have  brought  this 
great  disturbance  upon  the  state  without  cause.  6.  The 
letters  were  laid  before  the  senate  before'  I  opened  them. 
7.  ■!  shall  not  fail  to  lay  before  the  public  council  the 
matter  •just  as  it  is.  8.  I  said"  that  "I  would  not"*  fail 
to  collect  the  senate  "in  full  numbers.  9.  Meanwhile 
the  praetor  removed  from  Cethegus*s  house  "whatever 
weapons  were  there.  10.  I  said  that  I  would  not  open 
the  letters  before"  the  senate  had  convened. 


26  CICERO:    CATILINE   III. 

CHAPTER   IV. 

37.  1.  I  urge  you  to  declare  fearlessly  what^  you  know. 
2.  Though^  I  urged  Mm  to  declare  what  lie  knew,  he 
recovered^  with  difficulty  from  his  great  fear.  3.  Cati- 
line approached  the  city  with  an  army,  ^intending  to 
unite^  with  the  leaders  ^in  the  city.  4.  When  the  lead- 
ers have®  fired  the  city  in"  all  parts,  and  have  caused 
a  general^  massacre  of  citizens,  Catiline  will  be  at  hand. 
5.  An  oath  and  a  letter  to  their  nation  were  given^  to  the 
Gauls  by  Lentulus.  6.  ^''Orders  were  given  to  the  Gauls 
to  be  at  hand  with  cavalry,  when  the  citizens  had  fled" 
out  of  the  city.  7.  Lentulus  thought  that  the  sovereignty 
of  the  city  was  destined^-  to  come  to  him.  8.  In  accord- 
ance with  the  Sibylline  oracles,  Lentulus  is  ^^the  famous 
third  Cornelius.  9.  The  tenth  year  after  the  acquittal 
of  the  virgins  is  ^^destined  to  be  the  year  of  doom  to  this 
city.  10.  '^Lentulus  had  a  dispute  with  Cethegus  because 
the  latter  did  not  think  he  was  that  third  Cornelius. 


CHAPTER  V. 

38.  1.  I  entreat  ^you  to  cut  the  string  and  read  what^ 
is  written  on  the  tablets.  2.  Cethegus,  who  was  always 
fond  of  fine  cutlery,  ^ade  some  sort  of  reply  about  the 
swords  and  daggers  that  we  discovered  at  his  house. 
3.  Do  you  recognize  the  image  of  your  renowned  grand- 
father ?  ^I  do.  4.  I  showed  Lentulus  the  seal,  and  asked 
him  if*  his  grandfather  was  fond  of  fine  cutlery.  5.  I 
^old  him  that  that  image,  even  though  speechless,  ought 
to  have  called  him  away  from  such  wickedness.  6.  At 
first,  of  course,  he  said  that  he  did  not  wish  to  say  any- 


FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION.  27 

thing'  about  liis  handwriting.  7.  *\Vhat  have  I  to  do 
with  you?  What*  did  you  come  to  my  house  for*? 
8.  Though  he  always  had  excelled  not  only  in  genius, 
but  in  effrontery  and  rascality,  these  all  failed  him  at 
that  time.  9.  Contrary  to  the  expectation  of  all,  he  con- 
fessed that  he  had  talked  with  Volturcius  about  the 
letter.  10.  Catiline  knew  who  he  was,  from  ^°the  person 
he  had  sent  to  him.  11.  We  know  who  you  are,  from  the 
letters"  you  have  written  with  your  own  hand.  12.  At 
first  he  "refused  to  acknowledge  his  own  hand,  but  finally 
he  confessed.  13.  And,  not  to  be  tedious,  the  confession 
of  each  one  is  a  sure  proof  of  guilt.  14.  ^'See  to  it  that 
you  answer  briefly  and  consistently. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

39.  1.  The  senate  adopted  without  variation  the  vigor- 
ous and  resolute  opinions  of  its  leaders.  2.  ^The  senate 
decided  to  pass  a  vote  of  thanks  to  Cicero  in  the  strong- 
est terms.  3.  By  his  foresight  the  republic  was  freed 
from  the  greatest  perils.  4.  The  senate  praised  Flaccus 
and  Pomptinus,  -because  they  had  done*  brave  and  loyal 
service  to  the  consul.  5.  That  able  man,  my  colleague, 
removed  from  the  public  counsels  the  participants  in*  the 
conspiracy.  6.  When  Lentulus  has*  resigned"  the  praetor- 
ship,  ^et  him  be  delivered  into  custody.  7.  And  the  same 
decree  was  passed  against  Cethegus,  Statilius,  and  Gabi- 
nius,  "all  of  whom  were  present.  8.  Also  against  Cassius, 
^because  he  had  claimed  for  himself  the  charge  of  firing 
the  city.  9.  It  is  evident  that  Ceparius  was  engaged  in 
instigating*  the  shepherds  in  Apulia.  10.  And  also  a 
thanksgiving   was  decreed   in    these   words:   "^because 


28  CICERO:    CATILINE   III. 

Cicero  has  saved  the  republic."  11.  ^"That  thanksgiving, 
•which  was  decreed  on  my  account,  was  appointed  "because 
the  republic  had  been  saved.  12.  ^-We  had  some  scruples 
^^which  prevented  us  from  punishing  Lentulus,  ^^because 
he  "was  praetor. 

CHAPTER  VII. 

40.  1. 1  foresaw  that,  Hvhen  I  had  captured  the  leaders 
of  this  dangerous  war,  all  their  hopes  and  all  their  power 
Vould  collapse.  2.  We  ^stand  in  no  great  fear  of  the 
corpulence  of  Lucius  Cassius.  3.  Catiline  %as  the  ability 
and  the  courage  to  thwart  the  designs  of  the  consul. 
4.  Since  he  has  ^access  to  everybody,  he  %as  knowledge 
of  everything.  5.  There  is  nothing  Vhich  he  does  not 
personally^  attend  to.  6.  If  he  had  not  been  so  keen,  so 
bold,  so  crafty,  and  so  diligent  in  desperate  enterprises,^ 
we  should  not  have  feared  him.  7.  When  I  ^"was  trying 
to  drive  him  from  intestine  plots  to  open  marauding,  1 
wished  to  push  aside  from  your  necks  this  great"  weight 
of  evil.  8.  If  he  ha "".  not  known  everything,  he  would 
not  have  proclaimed  t.  ^  day  of  destruction  ^so  long  in 
advance.  9.  The  seal  is  a  proof  of  guilt,  and^^  the  letter 
also.  10.  If  I  had  not  thwarted  all  his  plans,  we  "should 
have  had  to  fight  with  him.  11.  ^^ After  he  was  removed, 
we  freed  the  republic  from  danger  with  the  greatest 
peace  and  tranquillity.  12.  ^^To  say  the  very  least,  we 
have  driven  him  from  the  city,  and  hold  ^'under  arrest 
the  other  leaders  of  the  conspiracy. 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

41.  1.  These  important  interests  were  pre-arranged  by 
the  immortal  gods,  but  they  have,  in  fact,  been  managed 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  29 

by  me.  2.  *It  hardly  seems  possible  that  I  could  have 
managed  everything,  ^but  for  the  will  and  direction  of 
the  gods.  3.  *In  fact,  they  offer  us  *such  ready  help 
that  wo  can  almost  see  them  with  our  eyes.  4.  We 
have  seen  at  night  torches  in  the  west;  thunderbolts 
*have  fiUlen,  and  the  earth  ^has  quaked.  5.  ®So  many 
of  these  things  have  taken  place  in  our  consulship  that 
the  gods  themselves  seem  to  have  predicted  the  war. 
6.  For,  surely,  you  remember  that  yonder*  Romulus  was 
struck  ***by  lightning.  7.  When  the  statues  of  the  god? 
were  thrown  down,  the  soothsayers  said  that  the  down 
fall  of  the  city  was  approaching.  8.  "If  we  do  not  ap. 
pease  the  gods  in  every  possible'-  way,  the  downfall  oi 
this  empire  is  at  hand.  9.  Nothing  that  tends  to  appeas- 
ing the  gods  must  be  overlooked  or  neglected.  10.  We 
have  "contracted  to  have  the  image  of  Jupiter  turned 
^*in  the  opposite  direction  to  what  it  was  before. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

42.  1.  ^At  this  point,  who  can  deny  that  the  immortal 
gods  control  everything  that  we  see  ?  2.  Who  is  so  in- 
fatuated *as  to  deny  that  slaughter  and  fire  are  preparing* 
for  this  city  ?  3.  Who  can  be  so  headstrong  *as  not  to 
perceive  that  these  crimes  were  planned  by  infamous 
citizens?  4.  *This  very  morning  did  you  not  see  that 
the  statue  of  Jupiter  had  been  set  up  so  as  •to  face  the 
Temple  of  Concord?  5.  Does  it  not  seem  incredible  that, 
hm  the  turning  of  the  statue  towards  you,  all  things  were 
brought  to  light  ?  6.  'If  they  should  attempt  to  oppose 
me,  they  would  be  worthy  of  the  severest'  punishment. 
7.  If  you  should  attempt  to  resist  the  immortal  gods, 


30  CICERO:    CATILINE   IH. 

you  would  be  taking  too  mucli  upon  yourselves.  8.  If  the 
immortal  gods  had  not  ^"^deprived  these  men  of  all  discre- 
tion, they  would  not  have  intrusted  so  great  interests"  to 
unknown  barbarians.  9.  The  Gauls  are  the  only  nation 
^-that  is  able  and  not  unwilling  to  make  war  upon  us. 
10.  Does  it  not  ^^arise  from  divine  interposition  that  they 
put  your  safety  before  the  hope  of  empire  offered  them 
by  our  enemies  ? 

CHAPTER  X. 

4:3.  1.  Wherefore,  fellow-citizens,  since^  you  have  been 
snatched  from  a  most  cruel  death,  celebrate  the  days  of 
thanksgiving.  2.  For  recall  all  the  just  honors  that  have 
been  rendered^  to  the  immortal  gods.  3.  Do  you  not 
yourselves  remember  the  dissensions  of  Marius  and 
Sulla  ?  4.  I  remember  that,  when  Octavius  was  consul, 
this  place  ^was  filled'^  with  heaps  of  corpses,  and  flowed'* 
with  the  blood  of  citizens.  5.  ^Of  all  these  dissensions, 
some  tended  to  the  destruction  and  some  to  the  altera- 
tion of  the  ^form  of  government.  6.  ^There  is  no  need  of 
saying  that  Sulla  avenged  the  cruelty  of  Marius's  victory 
with  great  loss  to  the  state.  7.  And  yet  those  men  were 
not  ^of  the  kind  to  desire  a  restoration  of  harmony,  but 
the  extermination  of  citizens.  8.  In  this  war,  the  most 
cruel  within^  the  memory  of  man,  you  have  been  saved 
without  any  bloodshed.  9.  All  ^°whose  safety  is  iden- 
tified with  that  of  the  city  are  regarded  as"  enemies. 
10.  Only^-  so  much  of  the  city  as  the  flames  cannot  reach 
will  be  saved. 

CHAPTER  XI. 

44.  1.  T'or  these  important^  services  I  require  from 
you  ^nothing  but  the  everlasting  memory  of  this   day. 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  31 

2.  Less  worthy  men  than^  I  ^may  be  charmed  with  mute* 
memorials  of  praise  and  honor.  3.  I  know  that  the  mem- 
ory of  my  deeds  will  become  established  in  the  records 
of  your  literature.  4  There  are  two  citizens  in  this  city, 
•one  of  whom  is  dumb,  the  other  silent.  5.  I  hope  that 
the  boundaries  of  your  empire  Vill  be  set  in  the  regions 
of  the  sky. 

CHAPTER  XII. 

45.  1.  Those^  who  wage  foreign  wars  'do  not  have  to 
live  with  those'  they  have  subdued.  2.  My  lot  is  not  the 
same  as'  yours,  because  I  have  enemies  *who  can  injure 
me,  while*  you  have  none.  3.  ^My  duty  it  was  to  see 
that  'you  were  not  harmed.  4.  Your  duty  it  is  to  see 
that  *no  harm  comes  to  me  from  those  audacious  men. 
r>.  I  have  great  support  among  good  citizens,  ®and  those 
who  have  secured  it  for  me  will  see  that  ®I  am  not 
harmed.  6.  If  all  the  assaults  of  domestic  foes  have 
been  repelled  from  you,  you  must  see  that  they  be  not 
turned  against  me.  7.  In  behalf  of  your  safety  I  have 
exposed  myself  to  serious***  danger.  8.  What  higher  step* 
is  there  "to  which  "I  care  to  ascend  ?  9.  For  what  odium 
can  be  incurred  "in  preserving  the  republic  that  will  not 
redound  to  my  glory  ?  10.  If  you  pray  to  yonder"  Jupi- 
ter, your  guardian,  you  will  be  in  perpetual  peace. 


32  CICERO:    CATILINE   III. 


FOE  writte:n^  teaxslatiok 


/ 


V 


CHAPTERS   I.— V. 

46.  1.  Fellow-citizens/  the  republic  is  saf^  Your 
wives,  your  children,  and  your  homes  have,  through-  my 
labors,  been  rescued^  from  fire  and  sword,  and  restored^  to 
you.  \And,  because  I  know  that  you  are  waiting  *to  learn 
^what  has  taken  place  since  Catiline  a  few  days  ago  burst 
out  of  the  city,  I  will  lay  before  you  the  whole  matter. 

2.  The  leaders  who  remained  in  the  city  %ried  to  tam- 
per with  the  ambassadors  from  Gaul,  for  the  purpose  of 
exciting  an  outbreak  ''beyond  the  Alps ;  and,  as^  they  were 
about  to  return  to  their  people  in  Gaul,  gave  them  a  let- 
ter of^  instructions  for  Catiline,  ^°which  they  were  to 
deliver  to  him  on"  their  way. 

3.  When  I  found  out  that  they  were  ^-laying  this  plot, 
I  saw  that  the  opportunity  was  offered  me  %f  getting 
such  a  grasp  of  the  whole  conspiracy  that  both  you  and 
the  senate  might  clearly  understand^*  it.  Therefore, 
since  I  used  the  aid  of  the  praetors,  Flaccus  and  Pompti- 
nus,  the  Allobroges  and  Volturcius  were  arrested  ^^just 
as  they  were  going  upon  the  Mulvian  bridge.  They  gave 
up  the  letters  to  the  praetors,  and  were  brought  back  to 
the  city. 

4.  Although  ^^t  was  the  opinion  of  many  distinguished 
men  ^^that  I  should  open  the  letters  before  submitting 
them  to  the  senate,  I  kept  the  seals  unbroken.  After 
Volturcius,  to  whom  I  had  given  the  official  pledge  by 


FOR  WRITTEN  TRANSLATION.  33 

order  of  the  senate,  had  disclosed  wliat'*  he  knew,  and 
the  Gauls  had  "given  evidence  regarding  Lentulus  and 
the  rest,  the  documents  were  brought  forwarj^ 

6.  Lentulus,  Cethegus,  Statilius,  each*  identified  his 
hand  and  seal.  The  letters  were  read.  Cethegus  was 
silent.  Statilius  confessed.  Lentulus,  though  at  first 
he  denied,  a  while  afterwards  confessed,  suddenly  and 
contrary  to  the  expectation  of  all,  ^'ou  being  asked  by  the 
Gauls  whether  he  had  not^  said  something  to  them  about 
firing  the  city. 

CHAPTERS  VI.— VIII. 

47.  1.  After  the  evidence  had  all  been  set  forth,  the 
senate  ^passed  a  decree  against  nine  of-  the  conspirators, 
that  they  should  be  ""*put  under  guard,  and,  because  Len- 
tulus was  a  prsetor,  it  was  decided  that  he  should  first 
resign  his  office,  ^so  that  there  might  be  no  *scruples  to 
prevent  his  being  punished. 

2.  •A  vote  of  thanks  to  me  was  passed,  because  I  had 
driven  Catiline  from  the  city,  and  held  'under  arrest  the 
infamous  leaders  of  this  most  accursed  war.  And  also 
the  senate  decreed  a  thanksgiving  to  the  immortal  gods 
in  my  name,  because  I  had  not  only  managed  the  Affairs 
of  state  successfully,  but  had  even  saved  the  state. 

3.  Now  there  is  no  longer  anything  "for  us  to  fear  j  for 
all  the  resources  of  Catiline,  and  all  his  hopes  will  col- 
lapse,  *"uow  that  he  has  been  driven  from  intestine  plots 
to  open  marauding.  "As  long  as  he  was  in  the  city,  ''we 
had  everything  to  fear ;  for  he  was  so  active,  so  bold,  so 
crafty,  so  alert  in  villany,  that  we  "could  have  met  and 
thwarted  all  his  designs  only"  "with  the  greatest  diffi- 
culty. 


34  CICERO:    CATILINE   III. 

4.  And  yet,  fellow-citizens,  ^^it  almost  seems  as  if  the 
immortal  gods  themselves  had  managed  all  these  impor- 
tant affairs  by  their  own  will  and  power.  For,  surely, 
^^it  does  not  belong  to  human  wisdom  to  have  foreseen 
all  that  has  happened  in  our  consulship.  Do  you  not 
remember^^  that  yonder  Eomulus  was  struck  by  a  thun- 
derbolt of  Jove,  and  that  other  images  of  the  gods  in  the 
Capitol  were  cast  down  ?  By  ^^such  things  as  these  the 
immortal  gods  proclaimed  the  downfall  of  the  city,  unless 
a  larger  statue  of  Jove  ^should  be  set  up  and  turned 
towards  the  Senate-house  and  the  Forum. 


CHAPTERS  IX.— XII. 

48.  1.  *Under  the  guidance  of  the  immortal  gods,  I 
resisted  those  men  who  attempted  to  set  fire  to  the  tem- 
ples and  shrines,  and  brought  to  light  everything  that 
they  had  planned  against  your  safety.  The  gods,  then, 
are  worthy  of  all  honor  ^for  saving  the  city  from  slaugh- 
ter and  fire  and  bloodshed. 

2.  If  I  should  say  that  I  had  done  these  things  alone, 
without  the  help  of  the  gods,  I  should  be  ^beside  myself. 
Does  it  not  seem  to  have  happened  providentially  that* 
Lentulus  was  so  foolish''  as  to  intrust  the  letters  to  Gauls, 
who,  though  they  might  have  kept  silent,  nevertheless, 
of  their  own  accord,  offered  us  the  proofs  of  Catiline's 
guilt«? 

3.  In  return  for  my  important^  services,  fellow-citizens, 
I  ask  for  no  mute  memorial  .of  praise,  but  that*  my 
deeds  may  be  cherished  in  your  memories,*  and  may  be 
perpetuated  in  the  monuments  of  your  literature.  But 
since  I  must  live  with  those^  I  have  subdued,  I  hope 


FOR   WUITTEN    T!;  W^I   \TION.  35 

that  tlie  protection  '"afforded   i)}    gooti  (utizens  will  be 
secured  to  me  forever. 

4.  "There  is  no  need  of  saying  that  there  is  such"  dig- 
nity in  the  republic  that  it  will  always  defend  me,  who 
have  voluntarily  offered  myself  to  all  "sorts  of  dangers 
for  your  safety,  from  the  assaults  of  intestine  foes. 
WTiatever'*  odium  has  been  incurred  by  me  JTi  preserving 
the  state,  will  injure  those  who  are  ill-disposed,  but  will 
"redound  to  my  glory. 


CATILINE  IV. 


FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTER  I. 

49.  1.  If  you  should  turn  your  eyes  towards  me,  you 
would  see  that  I  am  anxious  about  the  dangers  of  the 
state.  2.  Forget fuP  of  these  dangers,  I  think  only  of 
you  and  your  children.  3.  If  ^my  good  will  towards  you 
is  agreeable  in  your  sorrows,  you  will  not  forget  my  mis- 
fortunes.^ 4.  The  condition  of  the  consulshi])  is  "^that  I 
should  forget  my  own  safety  and  be  anxious  about  yours. 
5.  ^You  are  the  man  whose*^  house  has  never  been  free 
from  sorrow  and  suffering.  6.  Why  should  I  not  con- 
ceal' much  and  endure  much,  provided  that  I  remedy* 
many  evils  ?  7.  Why  should  my  couch,  that  is  devoted 
to  repose,  be'  never  secure  from  the  danger  of  death  ? 
8.  Why  should  not  this  be'  the  issue  of  my  consulship 
*that  I  may  rescue  all  Italy  from  devastation  ?  9.  If  I 
have  rescued  the  Vestal  virgins  from  bitter  outrage,  I 
rejoice.  10.  Why  should  Lentulus  think^  his  name  is 
designed  by  fate  to  overthrow ^^  the  republic  ? 

CHAPTER  II. 

50.  1.  Therefore,  conscript  fathers,  in  the  first  jjlace, 
cease  'to  have  a  thought  about  me.     2.  Secondly,  if  any- 


FOR   OHAL  TRANSLATION.  37 

thing  happt'iis-  tt)  iiu",  look  out  for  my  wife  and  childreu. 

3.  The  gods  will  requite*  you  ^according  to  your  deserts. 

4.  You  are  not  so  iron-hearted  'as  not  to  be  affected  by 
the  death  of  a  brave  man.  5.  "It  cannot  be  but  that  I  am 
affected  by  the  tears  of  a  loving  wife.  6.  If  anything 
happens'  to  me,  I  hope  the  republic  will  ^take  in  its  arms 
*that  little  boy  of  mine.  7.  I  hope  that  all  will  be  safe, 
rather  than  that  ^violence  shall  overwhelm  them.  8.  Con- 
sider all  the  storms  that  threaten,  if"  you  do  not'"  devote 
yourselves  to  the  safety  of  the  state.  9.  "It  is  not  Tibe- 
rius Gracchus  who  tampered  with  the  Allobroges  and 
called  out  the  slaves.  10.  Gains  Gracchus  did  not  form 
the  design  ''of  slaying  all  the  citizens.  11.  No  one  is  left 
**to  await  the  issue  of  this  day. 

CHAPTER  III. 

61.  1.  First,  *you  decided  that  'a  vote  of  thanks  to  me 
should  be  passed,  ^because  by  my  ability  and  diligence 
the  conspiracy  was  discovered.  2.  Secondly,  you  gave 
into  custody  Lentulus  and  the  rest  by  name.  3.  Lastly, 
you  decreed  a  thanksgiving  in  my  name,  ^an  honor  which 
no  one  in  a  civil  capacity  has  held  before  me.  4.  *It  be- 
longs to  the  consul  to  state  beforehand  that  we  have 
already  'formed  our  judgment  about  the  fact.  5.  Great 
madness  is  rife  in  the  republic,  and  certain  new  ills  are 
brewing.'  6.  You  must  determine  before  night  ®what 
order  to  pass  about  the  punishment  of  the  conspirators. 
7.  You  are  greatly  mistaken,  if  you  think  that  this  mis- 
chief has  not  covertly  worked  its  way  through  the  prov- 
inces. 8.  I  did  'not  by  any  means  lay  open  this  conspiracy 
by  forbearance*"  and  procrastination.'"    9.  Yesterday  you 


38  CICERO:    CATILINE   IV. 

decided  ^hvliat  reward  to  give  to  Yolturcius.  10.  Many 
men  are  implicated  in  this  atrocious^^  crime. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

52.  1.  Silaniis  Ms  of  the  opinion  that  the  death^  pen- 
alty ought  to  be  employed  against  bad  citizens.  2.  Death 
is  not  appointed  by  the  gods  as  a  punishment,  but  as  a 
necessity^  of  nature.  3.  Two  kinds  of  punishment  are 
made  use  of  in  this  republic,  death^  and  ^imprisonment  for 
life.  4.  Caesar  favors^  one,  Silanus  the  other.  5.  Has  not 
death  been  appointed  as  a  rest^  from  toils  and  miseries  ? 
6.  Ought  ^a  man,  who  has  attempted  to  deprive  his  fellow- 
citizens  of  life,  to  enjoy  life  ?  7.  A  philosopher  never 
meets  death  unwillingly,  a  brave  man  often  does^  even 
gladly.  8.  I  hope  I  ^shall  find  men  ^''for  whom  death 
itself  has  no  terrors.  9.  "Let  them  be  distributed  among 
the  free-towns,  if  you  wish  that  to  be  done.  10.  Let  us 
ordain  ^hat  no  one  shall  break  their  bonds.  11.  Let  it 
be   ordained   besides   that^^  their  goods   be   confiscated. 

12.  It  is  "inconsistent  with  the  dignity  of  the  free-towns 
to    lighten    the    punishment    of    these    impious    men. 

13.  Death  ^^would  have  had  no  terrors,  if  it  removed  all 
the  penalties  of  crime.  14.  If  death  should  take  away 
all  hope,  men  would  never  meet  it  willingly. 

CHAPTER  V. 

53.  1.  It  is  for  my^  interest  to  second^  the  proposition 
of  Gains  Caesar.  2.  It  is  for  Caesar's^  interest  to  follow 
the  popular  course.  3.  What  ^is  the  difference  between 
men*^  who  are  truly  popular  and  men''  who  wish  to  be 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  39 

regarded  as  popular  ?  4.  If  you  follow  the  course  that 
C'icsar  followed,  *!  am  inclined  to  think  you  wish'  to  be 
regarded  as  popular.  5.  If  you  *were  absent  day  before 
yesterday,  *I  ani  inclined  to  think  you  "did  not  wish  to 
consult  for  the  welfare  of  the  state.  6.  Now  no  one 
doubts  '"what  Csesar's  opinion  is  about  the  fact.  7.  But, 
indeed,  you  do  not  know  what  the  difference  is'  between 
a  suppHcatio  and  a  gratulatio.  8.  Can"  he  ^^ho  is  an 
enemy  to  the  republic  be  in  any  wise"  a  citizen  ? 
9.  More  trouble  "is  in  store  for  "the  man  who  contem- 
plates the  destruction  of  the  city.  10.  No  one  will  hesi- 
tate to  call  the  proposer  of  the  Sempronian  law  popular. 
11.  The  law  ordains  "that  hereafter  no  one  be  consigned 
to  darkness  and  chains.  12.  The  law  ordained  that'*'  the 
property  of  Lentulus  should  be  confiscated. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

54.  1.  The  proposal  of  Silanus  is  far^  milder  than 
Caesar's.  2.  ^May  I  enjoy  this  city  in  safety,  in  so 
far  as  I  am  not  actuated^  by  cruelty  in  punishing  so 
great  a  crime.  3.  ^Methinks  I  see  Cethegus  revelling  in 
your  blood.  4.  If  Lentulus  'is  on  the  throne,  and  Ga- 
binius  is  his  prime  minister,  then  Catiline  will  come  with 
art  army.  5.  Because  Lentulus  hoped  *to  be  king,  for 
this  reason  I  was  the  more  severe  against  him.  6.  If  I 
do  not  'inflict  the  severest  punishment  ui)on  him,  I  shall 
seem  too  lenient.  7.  *AVhen  your  house  is  set  on  fire  by 
a  slave,  do  you  not'  'inflict  punishment  upon  that  slave  ? 
8.  Should  I  not  seem  cruel  and  hard-hearted,  if  I  did***  not 
kill  the  slave  who  slew"  my  children  ?  9.  So  '^in  the 
case  of  Lentulus,  who  wished  to  butcher  our  wives  and 


40  CICERO:    CATILINE   IV. 

children,  if  Ave  put  him  to  death,  ^^shall  we  be  regarded 
as  cruel,  or  merciful  ?  10.  He  "aimed  at  murdering  one 
by  one  the  children  of  each  one  of  you.  11.  Does  a  man 
seem  to  anyone  brave  and  patriotic, ^^  who  confesses  that 
he  hopes  ^^to  be  king  ?  12.  You,  conscript  fathers,  have 
^"assigned  to  me  the  preservation  of  the  state.  13.  Are 
you  afraid  ^^of  seeming  too  severe  in  the  case  of  such  a 
monstrous  and  unholy  crime  ?  14.  Much  more  should 
you  be  afraid  ^^of  seeming  cruel  to  your  country  by  the 
remission  of  the  punishment. 

CHAPTER  VII. 

55.  1.  I  have  assistance .  enough  ^to  carry  out  ^he 
measures  that  you  decide  upon.  2.  ^Every  preparation 
and  every  provision  has  been  made  for  preserving  the 
common  fortunes  of  us  all.  3.  '*Xot  only  has  my  dili- 
gence been  indefatigable,*  but  the  desire  of  the  Roman 
people  to  retain  imperial  sway  has  been  much  greater. 
4.  The  Forum  is  the  only  place  ^in  which  there  is  a  suf- 
ficient guard.  5.  This  is  the  only  case  ®iii  which  knights 
and  senators  ''have  one  and  the  same  feeling.  6.  These 
are  the  only  men  Vho  cannot  be  reckoned  in  the  number 
of  citizens.  7.  Why  should  not  all  conspire*  for  the  com- 
mon safety  ?  8.  We  yield  to  them  superiority  of  rank 
^only  to  vie  with  them  in  patriotism.  9.  I  assure  you 
that  the  whole  multitude  of  free-born  citizens  is  present. 
10.  For  who  is  there  to  whom  any  evil  can  come  here- 
after ? 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

56.  1.  It  is  'worth  while  to  observe  that  even  the 
slaves  are  contributing  to  the  common  safety  ^as  much 


FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION.  41 

good-will  as'  they  cau.  2.  There  is  no  freedman,  'pro- 
vided he  has  obtained  the  privilege*  of  citizenship,  who 
does  not  judge*  this  to  be  his  country.  3.  •!£  you  were 
born  here,  should  you  judge  this  to  be  a  city  of  enemies  ? 
4.  There  is  no  one  of  these  men  whom  liberty  ha»s  not 
aroused  'to  the  defence  of  our  common  country.  5.  Is  it 
^vorth  while  to  attempt  to  tamper  with  the  feelings  of 
the  ix)or  and  ignorant  ?  6.  But  why  do  I  mention  the 
poor  and  miserable,  whose  labor  is  maintained  by  the 
tranquillity*  of  the  state?  7.  That  pander  of  Lentulus 
•could  not  find  a  man  so  wretched  in  fortune  ^"as  not  to 
desire  the  place  of  his  daily  toil  to  be  safe.  8.  If  the 
slaves  contributed  as  much  as  they  could  to  the  common 
safety,  i)ray  "what  would  the  f reedmen  have  done  ?  9.  If 
their  daily  gains  are  fostered  by  tranquillity,  pray  what 
would  happen  to  them  in  war  ?  10.  Have  you  not  heard 
that  Lentulus  hoped  to  be  able  to  arouse  those  whose 
gains  "depend  upon  numbers  of  citizens  ? 

CHAPTER  IX. 

67,  1.  My  life  has  been  spared  from  many  dangers 
for  the  safety  of  the  Roman  people.  2.  Do  you*  see  to 
it  that'  my  life  may  be  spared  *to  save  the  state.  3.  See 
to  it   that*  the   assistance  of  all  orders   fail   me  not.* 

4.  *Let  all  unite  with  mind  and  will,  with  heart*  and  voice. 

5.  Citizens  of  all  ranks  stretch  out  their  suppliant'  hands 
to  the  conscript  fathers.  6.  See  to  it  that  that  vestal* 
fire  be  eternal.  7.  This  day  "the  decision  must  be  made 
concerning  that  eternal  fire  of  Vesta,  concerning  the  tem- 
ples and  shrines  of  the  gods.  8.  Not  always  have  you 
had  leaders  mindful  of  you  and  forgetful  of  themselves. 
9.  This  day,  "for  the  first  time,  you  behold  all  men  of  all 


42  CICERO:    CATILINE  IV. 

ranks  "having  one  and  the  same  feeling.  10. 1  have  spoken 
these  words^^  in  order  that  I  might  seem  to  have  done  my 
duty  ^^as  consul. 

CHAPTER  X. 

58.  1.  Before  I  come  back  to  the  vote,  I  will,  say  a 
few  words^  about  the  great  multitude  of  enemies  that 
I  have  brought  upon  myself.  2.  But  if  at  some  time 
they  threaten  ^me  with  death,  I  shall  never  repent  of 
^what  I  have  done.  3.  For  I  have  attained  ^such  glory 
in  life  as*  no  one  else^  ever  did.^  4.  Other  men  you  have 
honored  with  great  praise  ^for  the  good  management  of 
public  affairs.  5.  ^Grant  that  Scipio  compelled*  Hannibal 
to  depart  out  of  Italy.  6.  ^Grant  that  two  cities  are  hos- 
tile to  this  republic.  7.  Is  it  a  greater  thing^  to  destroy 
Carthage  and  Numantia  than  to  save  Eome  from  the 
greatest  dangers  ?  8.  I  have  taken  care  that,  when  you 
%ave  gone  to  the  provinces,  you  may  have  ^a  place 
to  come  back  to.  9.  And  yet,  in  one  respect^^  victories 
abroad"  are  better  than  victories  ^^at  home.  10.  Intes- 
tine foes,  when  they  have  been  conquered,  can  never 
be  received  into  our  friendship.  11.  Wherefore  I  have 
brought  upon  myself  an  eternal  war  with  desperate  citi- 
zens. 12.  By  '^your  help  and  that  of  all  good  men,  these 
great^*  dangers  may  easily  be  averted  from  -me  and  mine. 
13.  This  harmony  ^^between  you  and  the  knights  can 
never  be  broken  by  any  force.  14.  No  force  can  be  found 
^^to  weaken  the  union  of  all  good  men. 

CHAPTER  XI. 

59.  1.  As  long  as  the  memory  of  my  diligence  ^is 
fixed  in  jour  minds,  I  shall  be  protected  by  an  impreg- 


FOR    WKITTKN    TUANSI.ATION.  43 

nablc-  ilefence.  'J.  My  little  soii^  will  have  protection 
enough,  if  you  will  remember  that  he  is  my*  son.  3.  I 
have  preserved  the  dignity  of  the  state  at  my  own  pe- 
culiar' risk.  4.  In  return  for  the  things  that  I  have  set 
aside  on  your  account,  I  ask  nothing  but"  protection  for 
my  son.  5.  Since  this  is  so,  conscript  fathers,  decide 
^vith  care  and  'with  vigor  *on  what  concerns  the  safety 
of  the  republic.  6.  As  long  as  I  live,^  I  will  maintain 
whatevei-*  you  decide  upon,  and  '"by  my  own  efforts  will 
carry  into  effect  your  decrees.  7.  You  have  a  consul  who 
will  obey  your  decrees.  8.  I  commend  to  you  the  tem- 
ples and  shrines  of  the  gods,  which'  will  have  protection 
enough,  if  you  "make  your  decision  with  care  and  with 
vigor. 


FOR  WRITTEN  TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTERS   I.— IV. 

60.  1.  'Conscript  fathers,  you  know  that  I  am  never 
free  from  the  danger  of  death  either^  in  the  Forum,  or* 
in  the  Senate-house,  or*  in  my  own  home,  oi**  even  in  this 
seat  of  honor ;  but  yet,  whatever  fate  awaits'  me,  I  shall 
endure  it  with  equanimity,*  provided  that  by  my  efforts 
safety  is  secured  to  you  and  to  the  Roman  people. 

2.  For  why  should  I  not  rejoice  'to  have  rescued  you, 
your  wives,  and  your  children  from  slaughter,  and  the 
Vestal  virgins  from  bitter  outrage,  even  if  the  immortal 
gods  should  will  *that  I  am  to  suffer  all  pains  and  hard- 
ships, and  even  death  itself?     Wherefore  it  1)elongs  to 


44  CICERO:    CATILINE  IV. 

you  to  cease  thinking^  of  me^  and  to  bend  your  ener. 
gies  ^to  defending  the  name  and  safety  of  the  Koman 
people. 

3.  You  have  heard  the  witnesses ;  you  have  heard  the 
confessions  of  the  accused ;  you  have  seen  clearly  that  a 
plan  has  been  formed  by  Lentulus  and  the  others  ^to 
arouse  the  slaves,  to  receive  Catiline,  to  destroy  this  fair 
city  of  ours,  and  to  lay  waste  all  Italy  with  fire  and 
sword,  so  that  no  one  may  remain^"  %o  bewail  the  ruin 
of  our  common  country. 

4.  Yesterday  I  asked  "for  your  judgment  about  the 
fact,  and  ^-for  your  decision  about  the  penalty.  To-day, 
before  night,  we  must  decide  what  is  to  be  done  with^^  the 
accused.  For  this  mischief,  which  has  spread  further 
"than  is  generally  supposed,  can  by  no  means  be  checked 
by  ^^forbearance  and  procrastination. 

5.  ^^It  is  the  opinion  of  Decimus  Silanus  that  the  con- 
spirators should  be  punished  with  death,  while^^  Gains 
Caesar  holds  that  death  was  not  appointed  by  the  gods 
as^^  a  punishment,  but  as  a  rest  f rom^^  toil  and  misery ; 
and  therefore  he  recommends™  confiscation  of  property 
and  imprisonment  for  life.  Life  alone  he  leaves  to  those 
impious  men. 

CHAPTERS  v.— VII. 

61.  1.  The  proposal  of  Gains  Caesar  is  Hhat  of  one 
^who  is  consulting  for  the  safety  of  the  people^  and  is,  as 
it  were,  a  hostage  for^  his  perpetual  good-will  towards  the 
state.  No  one  can  doubt  what  he  thinks  about  the  whole 
case  who  voted  a  reward  to  the  informer,  and  thanks  to 
the  investigator;  and  who,  though*  a  mild  and  gentle  per- 
son, consigns  Lentulus  to  perpetual  darkness  and  chains. 


FOR   WRITTEN  TRANSLATION.  46 

2.  Wherefore,  if  you  adopt  the  proposal  of  Silanus,  I 
shall  not  fear  the  charge  of  cruelty,  for  what  cruelty  can 
there  be  in  punishing  with  death  a  man  who  is  in  no 
sense*  a  citizen,  but  is  an  enemy  of  the  republic  ?  The 
proposer  of  the  Sempronian  law  himself  was  put  to 
death  by  command  of  the  people. 

3.  When  I  see  *in  my  mind's  eye  the  city  falling  in 
niin,  the  'wretched  heaps  of  unburied  citizens,  and 
Cethcgus  revelling  in  your  blood,  I  cannot  *think  of 
mercy  and  compassion  towards  the  guilty  wretches*  who 
have  wished  to  murder  us,  and  to  set  up  the  race  of  the 
AUobroges  on  the  ruins  of  the  city. 

4.  And  now,  lest  some  one  may  'be  apprehensive  '*'that 
there  is  not  help  enough  to  carry  out  the  measures  that 
you  decide  upon  to-day,  "I  will  say  that  every  prepara- 
tion has  been  made.  Tho  Roman  people,  through  their 
earnest  desire  to  retain  their  imperial  sv/ay,  ^have  aimed 
to  give  me  all  the  assistance  I  want. 


CHAPTERS  VIII.— XI. 

62.  1.  It  is  'worth  while  to  recognize  the  zeal  of  all 
citizens  of  all  ranks.  But  why  -should  I  mention  them  ? 
For  their  own  interests*  stimulate  them  to  defend  their 
country.  Even  the  slaves,  who  are  *not  citizens  at  all, 
*if  only  they  are  in  a  tolerable  condition  of  servitude, 
contribute  "all  they  can  to  the  safety  and  tranquillity  of 
the  state. 

2.  And  the  poor  and  ignorant,  'although  Lentulus 
•tried  to  tamper  with  them,  almost  outstrip  you  in  patri- 
otism.'  Indeed,  those  who  ''^are  dependent  on  their  daily 
gains  in  the  shops, — since,  ''when  the  shops  are  closed 


46  CICERO;    CATILINE   IV. 

their  gains  are  diminished, — have  no  desire  to  follow 
the  fortunes  of  men  who  are  trying  to  overthrow  the 
very  foundations  of  the  republic. 

3.  Such  being  the  case,  conscript  fathers,  see  to  it  that 
you  ^do  not  fail  in  your  duty  to  those  whose  help  has 
never  failed  you.  Our  common  country  is  beset  by  the 
torches  and  weapons  of  an  impious  conspiracy.  The 
lives^^  of  all  the  citizens  are  in  danger.  Desperate  men 
are  threatening  the  citadel  and  the  Capitol,  the  temples 
of  the  gods,  the  walls  of  the  city,  and  even  our  very 
homes  and  firesides  ;  and  %pon  you  rests  the  decision 
wiiether  ^^all  that  Ave  see  about  us  shall  stand,  or  the 
whole  republic  be  destroyed. 

4.  ^^I  may  lose  my  life,  for  I  have  undertaken  eternal 
war  against  the  enemies  of  the  republic ;  but  the  memory 
of  my  deeds  will  remain.  I  have  ever  been  mindful  of 
you  and  forgetful  of  myself ;  and  I  shall  not  hesitate  to 
execute  your  decrees,  even  if  the  violence  of  wicked  men 
shall  threaten  ^^me  with  death. 


ARCHIAS. 


FOR  ORAL  TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTER   I. 

63.  1.  I  do  not  deny  that  I  have  some'  talent.  2.  ^I 
have  had  some  experience  in  the  practice  of  oratory. 
3.  Aulus  Lioinius  ^has  a  right  to  claim  from  me  the 
advantage  of  my  training  in  the  liberal*  arts.  4.  ''In 
my  boyhood  these  studies  were  not  uncongenial  to  me. 

5.  When  I  recall  the  earliest  recollections*  of  childhood, 
I  see  that  my  mind  was  moulded  by  Aulus  Licinius. 

6.  I  entered  upon  the  study  of  oratory  ^with  him  for  my 
master.  7.  From  him  I  received  that  by  which  I  am 
able  to  help  him.  8.  Do  you,  perchance,  wonder  that  I 
have  said  this?  9.  I,  too,  have  ^another  kind  of  intel- 
lectual endowment.  10.  'Not  even  he  is  entirely  devoted 
to,  this  single  pursuit. 

CHAPTER   II. 

64.  1.  Does  it  seem  strange  to  you  that  I  am  speaking 
in  behalf  of  a  poet?  2.  It  is  not  strange  that  before 
these  'highly  educated  men  *I  should  adopt  a  new  method 
of  pleading.  3.  Since  the  praetor,  before  whom  the  case 
is  tried,  is  a  very  learned  man,  this  method  of  pleading 
will  not  be  disagreeable  to  him.    4.  I  know  that  it  'differs 


48  CICERO:    ARCHIAS. 

widely  from  the  custom  of  the  courts.  5.  I  shall  speak 
a  little  more  freely  about  poets  and  learned  men.  6.  I 
beg  of  you  "^to  speak  freely  about  the  pursuit  of  litera- 
ture. 7.  If  you  grant  me  this  indulgence,  it  will  not 
seem  strange  to  me.  8.  If  Licinius  is  not  a  citizen,  he 
ought  to  be  admitted.  9.  If  he  was  not  a  citizen,  he  ought 
to  have  been  admitted.  10.  Since  he  is  a  citizen,  he  ought 
not  to  be  excluded  from  the  list  of  citizens. 

CHAPTER   III. 

65.  1.  As  soon  as  Archias  devoted  himself  to  writing, 
he  quickly  excelled  all  others.  2.  In  boyhood  we  devote 
ourselves  to  the  study  of  composition^  3.  ^He  had  the 
good  fortune  to  be  born  at  Antioch,  a  once  populous 
city.^  4.  In  his  boyhood  he  was  so  trained  in  polite 
learning  that  %e  had  many  rewards  given  him.  5.  Greek 
arts  were  so  much''  cultivated  in  Italy  that  the  arrival  of 
Archias  was  quickly  noised  abroad.  6.  All  who  ^are 
competent  to  appreciate  talent  deem  Archias  worthy  of 
their  acquaintance.  7.  When  he  had  come  to  Eome,  a 
city  full  of  learned  men,  he  found  Marius  and  Catulus 
consuls.  8.  Lucullus  not  only  received  him  into  his 
home  when  he  was  a  youth,  but  also  was  intimate  'with 
him  in  his  old  age.  9.  When  he  had  written  of  the 
great  exploits  of  Marius,  he  was  very  agreeable  to  ^tliat 
famous  man.  10.  He  had  the  Luculli  so  closely^  bound 
to  him  that  he  ^received  the  highest  honors  from  them. 

CHAPTER   IV. 

66.  1.  When  he  had  withdrawn  from  Sicily,  he  came 
into  Italy.     2.  Heraclea  was  a  city  possessed^  of  the  most 


FOR   OKAL  TliANSLATION.  49 

favorable  privileges  and  treaty-rights.  3.  He  was  worthy 
through  his  own  merits  ^to  be  enrolled  as*  *a  citizen  of 
Heraclea.  4.  Since  he  declared  his  intention  to  the  prae- 
tor within  sixty  days,  he  was  enrolled.  5.  I  have  spoken 
of  ^nothing  but  his  domicile  in  Italy.  6.  Lucullus  did 
not  think,  but  he  knew,  that  Archias  was  enrolled  at 
Heraclea. nTt.  Can  you  deny  that  ambassadors  have  come 
^froni  Heraclea  on  account  of  this  trial  ?  8.  'Everybody 
knows  that  the  public  records  were  burned  in^  the  Italian 
war.  9.  Since  we  cannot  have  the  testimony  of  the 
records,  it  is  ridiculous  to  ask  for  it.  10.  Many  years 
'before  the  burning  of  the  registry  at  Heraclea,  he  had 
been  enrolled  at  Rome.  11.  Or  do  you  not  demand  the 
records  ?  Nay,  rather,  you  ask  for  ^nothi'^g  but  the 
records.  12.  You  do  not  think,  but  you  know,  that  they 
are  wont  to  be  tampered  with. 


CHAPTER  V. 

67.  1.  All  confidence  in  the  records  was  destroyed, 
because  they  were  kept  carelessly.  2.  Gabinius  was  not 
troubled  at  the  erasure  of  names.  3.  In  these  records, 
then,  you  see  the  erasure  of  a  single  name.  4.  *What 
reason  is  there  for  our  having  doubts  about  the  erasure, 
esi^ecially  since  ^letellus  was  'so  careful  that  he  went 
to  the  praetor  and  said  that  he  had  found  one'  ?  5.  Many 
ordinary  men  are  ^possessed  of  no  skill,  while  stage- 
performers  enjoy*  the  highest  reputation  for  genius. 
6.  *\Vhat  reason  is  there  why  the  Neajwlitans  should 
bestow  citizenship  on  ordinary  men  ?  7.  I  have  always 
•wished  to  Im)  a  Neapolitan.  8.  He  did  not  use  the  rec- 
ords  of    the   Neapolitiuis,  because   he  always    'wished 


50  CICERO:    ARCHIAS. 

to  be  a  Tarentine.  9.  Archias  was  not  assessed  by  the 
last  censors,  because  he  was  with^  the  army  in  Asia. 
10.  Since  ^up  to  that  time  he  had  conducted  himself  as 
a  citizen,  he  was  rated  according  to  our  laws.  11.  Such 
being  the  case,  ^what  reason  is  there  for  his  hesitating  to 
make  a  will  ? 

CHAPTER  VI. 

68.  1.  I  ask  of  you  why  you  are  so  charmed  with 
Aulus  Licinius.  2.  Could  our  minds  bear  such  a  strainy 
if  he  did  not  supply  us  Vith  means  to  relieve  thei|^ 
3.  If  we  did  not  cultivate  our  minds,  ^we  could  nj^be 
supplied  With  material  for  speaking,  amid  such  a  variety 
of  topics.  4.  Why  should  you  ^be  ashamed  ^of  having 
devoted  yourself  to  these  studies  ?  5.  I  have  not  :o 
buried  myself  in  literature  ^as  to  bring  nothing  out  of 
it  to  the  general  advantage.  6.  I  assign  ^as  much  time 
to  managing  my  own  affairs  as*'  you  do  to  early  banquets. 
7.  Who  would  justly  blame  you,  if  you  should  assign 
some'  time  to  ball-playing  ?  8.  The  daily  attacks  of  un- 
principled men  must  be  regarded  ^as  of  slight  conse- 
quence in  ^the  pursuit  of  glory.  9.  If  I  had  not  ^%ried 
to  secure  glory  and  honor,  I  should  not  have  devoted 
myself  to  these  studies.  10.  Why  should  I  be  ashamed 
"of  exposing  myself  to  so  many  struggles  for  your  wel- 
fare ?  11.  ^-While  studying  the  portrayals  of  excellent 
men,  left  us  by  the  Greek  and  Latin  writers,  we  train 
our  own  minds  to  emulate  them. 

CHAPTER  VII. 

69.  1.  There  have  been  famous  men  who  were  not 
trained  in  literature.      2.  ^What  I  am  to  assert  about 


FOR   ORAL  TRANSLATION.  51 

those  men  who  ^had  no  learning  'may  be  relied  upon. 

3.  We  extol  with  praises  those  men  whose  'valiant  deeds 

have  been  *the  theme  of  history.     4.  It  is  certain  that 

"natural  ability  without  learning  has  often  been  effectual 

*in  gaining  glory.     5.  Some  one  will  ask:  "What?    Does        -^ 

learning  without  natural  ability  have  much^  weight?" 

6.  Do  we    seek   pleasure    alone    from   these   pursuits? 

7.  The  relaxation  ^afforded  by  these  studies  is  "adapted 
to  all  times  and  all  ages.  8.  If  they  did  not  nurture  our 
youth,  nevertheless,  in  my  opinion,  they  would  charm 
our  old  age. 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

70.  1.  'It  seems  as  if  you  ought  to  admire  the  skill 
and  grace  of  Roscius,  even  though  you  are  a  rustic. 
2.  Who  of  you  is  so  rude  *as  not  to  admire  skill  and 
grace  in  others,  even  though  he  does  not  have  them  him- 
self ?  3.  ''It  seems  as  if  a  man  *of  such  excellent  skill  and 
grace  ought  not  to  die  at  all.  4.  But  Roscius  could  not 
recite*  on  the  spur  of  the  moment  a  great  number  of 
verses.  5.  And,  ®if  he  were  recalled,  he  could  not  "treat 
the  same  subject  with  change  of  words  and  .xpressions. 
6.  When  Archias  writes  *with  care  and  thought,  ''we  pay 
the  most  diligent  attention  to  him.  7.  '"We  are  told 
by  the  most  learned  men  that  poets  are  inspired  by  an 
enthusiasm  that  is  almost  divine.  8.  Why  should  we 
not  admire  a  noet  "who  has  ..otained  the  glory  of  the 
writers  of  oKt^  9.  Shall  I  not  defend  Archias  in  ever)' 
way  ?  10.  Does  he  not  seem  to  \ye  commended  to  us 
by  some  gift  and  endowment  of  the  gods  themselves? 
11.  Are  not  you,  gentlemen  of  the  jury,  who  are  listen- 
ing to  me  80  abtentively,  moved  by  the  voice  of  poets  ? 


52  CICERO:    ARCHIAS. 

12.  Let  this  name  of  poet  be  held  in  reverence  among 
men  ^of  such  refinement. 

CHAPTER   IX. 

71.  1.  Shall  we  reject  Archias,  who  has  devoted  all 
his  talent  to  celebrating  the  glory  of  the  Koman  people  ? 
2.  When  a  young  man,  he  touched  upon  the  Cimbric 
campaign^  of  Gains  Marius.  3.  Marius  was  not  so  disin- 
clined to  the  Muses  that  he  ^was  not  glad  to  hear  the 
Cimbric  campaign  celebrated  in  verse.^  4.  They  say  that 
Marius  said  he  ''was  very  glad  to  hear  the  voice  of  a  poet 
celebrating  his  fame.  5.  ^When  Themistocles  was  asked 
whose  voice  he  ^liked  best  to  hear,  he  said,  "His  by 
whom  my  own  valor  ^is  best  set  forth."  6.  We  are  espe- 
cially fond  of  ''a  man  by  whose  genius  we  think  our 
deeds*  can  be  celebrated.  7.  AVhat  musician  do  you  like 
best  to  hear?  8.  The  Mithridatic  war  was  carried  on 
^with  greatly  varied  fortunes  by  land  and  sea.  9.  ^"The 
sinking  of  the  fleet  off  Tenedos  was  celebrated  by 
the  genius  of  Archias.  10.  "Our  fame  is  celebrated  by 
those  through  whose  genius  the  triumphs  of  our  generals 
are  extolled.  11.  Not  only  Lucullus,  but  also  the  name 
of  the  Roman  people,  is  honored  by  the  praises  of  Archias. 
12.  By  the  strategy  of  Lucullus,  a  most  friendly  city  was 
rescued  from  the  assaults  of  the  king. 

CHAPTER  X. 

72,  1.  You  are  greatly  mistaken,  if  you  think  Greek 
is  read  less^  than  Latin.  2.  If  we  admit  to  citizenship  a 
man  of  Rudise,  we  certainly  ought  not  to  reject  a  Hera- 
clean.     3.  Our  glory  and  fame  have  extended  ^as  far  as 


FOR   ORAL   TRANSLATION.  63 

our  arras  have  reached.  4.  This  our  Archias  writes  of 
our  achievements  in  Greek  veree.*  5.  Fortunate  are  the 
Roman  people  *in  having  found  Archias  as  the  herald  of 
their  fame,  0.  0  fortunate  Alexander,  *to  have  stood 
by  the  tomb  of  Achilles !  7.  0  fortunate  young  men,  *to 
be  able  to  read  Latin  poetry'!  8.  When  Pompey  pre- 
sented Theophanes  with  citizenship,  the  soldiers  ap- 
proved, just  as  if  they  'shared  in  the  glory.  9.  And  so, 
I  suppose,  if  Archills  had  not  been  presented  with  citi- 
zenship by  Lucullus,  he  *could  not  have  obtained*®  it  from 
Sulla.  10.  I  will  bestow  a  reward  upon  you,  but  on  con- 
dition "that  you  write  nothing  hereafter.  11.  The  genius 
and  merit  of  Archias  are  worthy*^  of  the  greatest  reward. 
12.  He  who  desired  an  epigram  to  be  made  upon  him 
by  a  poor  poet  would  not,  I  suppose,  have  sought  for 
Archias. 

CHAPTER  XI. 

73.  1.  It  cannot  be  disguised  that  ^every  good  man  is 
influenced  by  a  desire  for  celebrity.  2.  Philosophers 
decry  glory,  but"  write  their  names  in  their  books. 
3.  Even'  the  great  Fulvius  consecrated  the  spoils  of 
Mars  to  the  Muses.  4.  ^In  a  city  in  which  poets  are 
honored  by  generals,  we  ought  not  *to  be  averse  to  the 
welfare  of  poets.  5.  My  own  love  of  glory  is  perhaps 
too  ardent,  but  yet  it  is  an  honorable  one.*  6.  I  have 
never  written  treatises  on  the  contempt  of  glory. 
7.  Many  things  I  did,  'with  your  co-operation,  for  the 
welfare  of  this  city.  8.  'If  glory  be  withdrawn,  what 
other  thing  is  there  *for  us  to  desire  ?  9.  If  the  soul 
looked  not  forward  into  the  future,  what  reason  is  there 
•for  us  to  distress  ourselves  with   so  many  cares  and 


54  CICERO:    ARCHIAS. 

labors  ?     10.  The  soul  does  not  limit  its  thoughts  by  the 
same  boundaries  that  determine  the  period  of  our  lives. 

CHAPTER  XII. 

74.  1.  Are  we  ^so  narrow-minded  as  to  think  that  every- 
thing is  to  die  with  us  ?  2.  Those  who  are  engaged  in 
public  affairs  never  draw  a  quiet  breath,  even  to  the  last 
moment.  3.  Do  you  not  prefer  to  leave  a  representation 
of  your  mind  rather  than  of  your  body  ?  4.  ^Do  not  be 
^so  narrow-minded  as  to  wish  to  leave  no  representation 
of  your  virtues.  ^  Wherefore,  gentlemen  of  the  jury, 
we  beg  of  you  to  preserve  a  man  of  such  talent  that  he 
is  sought  after  by  the  most  distinguished  men.  6.  You 
ought  to  preserve  one  who  is  of  that  class  of  men  that 
is  always  considered  sacred.  7.  Wise  men  think  that 
what  we  do  in  life  ^remains  in  our  consciousness  after 
death.  8.  I  am  sure  that  you  will  take  in  good  part 
what  I  have  said.  9.  He  whp  holds  the  court  will  take 
in  good  part  what  I  have  said  that  is  ^foreign  to  the 
usage  ^of  the  court.  10.  Receive  this  man  under  your 
protection,  for  he  will  leave  you  an  everlasting  memorial 
of  praise. 


FOE  WRITTEN  TRANSLATION. 


CHAPTERS   I.— V. 

75.  1.  Aulus  Licinius  Archias  was  born  of  a  noble 
family  at  Antioch,  a  city^  once  populous  and  wealthy,  and 
abounding  in  men  ^of  the  highest  learning.     In  boyhood 


KMi;    WIM'rrKN     pi:  \\>il,  \TION.  .)0 

he  was  traiiUMi  m  polite  icariiiiig;  and  aiterwurds,  "iuiviiig 
devoted  himself  to  writing,  he  was  thought  worthy  of 
the  acquaintance  and  hospitality  of  many  persons  both 
in  Italy  and  Greece,  i 

/2.  When  he  had  come  to  Rome,  in  the  consulship  of 
Marius  and  Catulus,  ^vhile  still  a  young  man,  he  ^became 
acquainted  with  many  distinguished  men,  who  treated* 
him  with  the  greatest  respect  both  on  account  of  his 
genius  and  learning,  and  on  account  of  his  ^native  worth. 
Not  only  *was  his  aeciuaintance  cultivated  by  those  who 
could  furnish  him  with  the  noblest'  subjects  ^"for  his  pen, 
but  also  by  those  who  were  eager  to  listen  to  him. 

(S.  Although  he  had  had  a  domicile  in  Rome  for  many 
years,  and  afterwards  had  been  enrolled  as  a  citizen  at 
Heraclea,  "a  city  having  the  most  favorable  privileges 
and  treaty-rights,  he  was  accused  by  a  certain"  Gratius, 
under  the  Papian  Law,  "on  the  ground  that  he  was  not 
a  Roman  citizen.  Now"  the  Papian  law  enacted'^  that 
all  foreigners,'*  who  'Hiad  not  been  admitted  to  citizenship 
either  in  Rome  or  in  an  allied  state,  should  be  ejected 
from  the  city. 

4.  Cicero  pleaded  the  cause  of  his  friend  before  the 
court,  and  easily  proved  by  the  evidence  of  LucuUus,  and 
of  the  Heraclean  deputies  who  came  to  Rome  for  the  sake 
of  attending'*  the  trial,  that  Archias  was  a  Roman  citizen 
under  the  law  of  Silvanus  and  Carbo.  A  large  part  of  his 
oration  is  devoted  to  celebrating  the  praises  of  literature 
and  polite  learning. 

CHAPTERS   VI.— IX. 

76.  1.  Some  one  'may  ask  why  I  am  so  greatly  charmed 
with  these  studies.     Because  they  are  'adapted  to  all 


56  CICERO:    ARCHIAS. 

times,  all  ages,  and  all  places ;  because  they  relieve  my 
mind  ^when  it  is  weary  with  the  din  and  strife  of  the 
Forum ;  because  by  means  of  them  this  ''oratorical  ability 
^is  improved ;  and  because  I  am  able  ^to  study  the  por- 
trayals of  eminent  men,  which  authors  have  left  us  in 
their  books.  Setting  these  examples  before  me,  I  can 
educate  my  mind  and  judgment  by  the  very  contempla- 
tion of  excellent  men. 

2.  Do  you  ask  whether'  all  our  great  commanders  have 
been  trained  in  literature  ?  Not  all ;  for  there  have  been 
men  of  such  pre-eminent  ^natural  ability  that,  even  with- 
out the  aid  of  learning,  they  ^have  shown  themselves  not 
only  brave  and  wise,  but  well-balanced  and  dignified. 
But  it  is,  nevertheless,  certain  that  learning  ^°is  of  great 
assistance  in  the  cultivation  of  character.^^ 

3.  We  all  have  been  accustomed  to  admire  Koscius, 
but  he  won  our  affection  by  the  activity  of  his  body; 
and  shall  we  not  also  admire  Archias  for  the  wonderful 
activity^^  of  his  mind  ?  Why,^^  he  can  recite  on  the  spur 
of  the  moment,  ^''without  writing  a  single  word,  most 
excellent  poetry ^^  on  the  very  events  that  are  taking 
place  ^^around  him.  Other  accomplishments^''  depend 
upon  instruction  and  rules  and  method;  the  poet  ^%as 
his  power  from  nature  itself. 

4.  ^^Let  the  men  of  Colophon  claim  Homer  for  their 
own ;  this  Archias  belongs  to  us,  by  his  own  desire  and 
by  our  laws.  His  voice  we  ^^like  to  hear,  because  he 
celebrates  the  name  and  fame  of  the  Koman  people. 
Grant  that  our  own  Ennius  was^-  dear  to  the  elder 
Africanus ;  is  not  Archias  ^dearly  loved  by  that  distin- 
guished general,  Lucius  Lucullus,  who  opened  Pontus 
to  the  Koman  people,  and  routed  the  innumerable  forces 
of  the  Armenians  ? 


FOR  WRITTEN  TRANSLATION.  57 

CHAPTERS  X.— XII. 

77.  1.  Alexander  the  Great  had  with  him  many  histo- 
rians of  his  exploits,  for  he  knew  that,  if  he  had  no  one 
Ho  be  the  herald  of  his  valor,  his  name  *would  be  buried 
in  the  same  tomb  that  'should  cover  his  body.  And  so 
our  own  "  Magnus  "  awarded  a  prize  to  the  historian  of 
his  achievements,  Theophanes  of  Mytilene.  His  sol- 
diers, too,  as  if  they  *had  a  share  in  liis  glory,  approved 
the  act. 

2.  When  Sulla  was  in  Spain,  he  bestowed  citizenship 
upon  many  of  the  Spaniards;  and  would  he  have  rejected 
Archias,  *if  he  had  sought  his  favor  ?  He  who  was  so 
eager  •to  have  his  actions  celebrated  in  verse  that  he 
lent  an  ear  to  the  poor  poets  of  Cordova,  would  not,  I 
suppose,  have  sought  for  the  genius  and  ability'  of 
Archias. 

3.  It  must  be  admitted  that  even*  those  philosophers 
who  write  treatises  on  the  contempt  of  glory  are  them- 
selves," nevertheless,  influenced  by  the  love  of  praise; 
and,  in  fact,  •the  best  men  are  most  attracted  by  glory. 
I  do  not  hesitate  to  confess  to  you  that  I  myself*  desire 
no  other  reward  for  my  toils  and  dangers  in  your  behalf 
than  the  eternal  heralding  of  my  virtues. 

4.  Wherefore,  since  Archias  has  done  honor  in  his 
verse  to  the  achievements  of  the  Roman  people  and  of 
your  generals ;  since  he  has  promised  '''to  give  an  eternal 
record  of  praise  "to  you  in  view  of  your  recent  perils ; 
and  since  he  is  "{possessed  of  such  a  genius  that  he  is 
courted  by  our  most  distinguished  men,  I  entreat  you, 
gentlemen  of  the  jury,  to  receive  him  under  your  pro- 
tection, 8o  that  he  may  seem  to  be  relieved  by  your 
htnnanity,  ratner  than  injnvd  by  your  severity. 


NOTES. 


In  the  EzercUet  a  superior  figure  (e.g.,  Daily*)  put  after  a  word  appllea  to 
that  word  aloot-;  put  before  a  word,  applies  to  two  or  more  immediMtely  foi- 
lowini;.  LitentI  intnalHtions  and  idioms  are  priiiU'd  iu  Italics.  Cf .»  compare ; 
w.o  with;  otber  abbreviations  will  be  readily  understood. 

CATILINE   I. 

!•  Chap.  I.  1.  The  interrogative  ndnne  is  not  used  in  this 
chapter,  but  the  very  strong  nihilne,  or  non  without  -ne.  2.  This 
sentence  may  be  put  in  tlie  active  form,  as  in  the  text.  3.  Into. 
4.  Direct  question.  5.  Ind.  question.  6.  Become  a  sharer  of.  7.  Not 
subjunctive.  8.  Omit.  0.  Remember  that  "ought"  is  in  the  past 
tense,  and  "to  have  been  marked"  in  the  present.  10.  These  [things]. 
11.  Cf.  n.9.    12.  That.    13.  A  result  clause.    \A.  Been  wanting. 

2,  Chap.  II.  1.  The  direct  form  of  cdnsul  vidSret .  .  .  cape- 
ret.  2.  Omit.  3.  A  purpose  clause.  4.  Xow  the  twentieth  daij  you 
tufftr.  5.  Use  the  perfect  inf.,  and  compare  with  1,  13  and  16  and 
notes.  6.  "  Him.<«elf  "  is  strongly  emphatic.  Observe  that  the  em- 
phasis in  Latin  is  given  to  the  subject,  not,  as  in  Eng.,  to  the  ob- 
ject. 7.  Of.  8.  Observe  the  two  expressions  for  "daily."  9.  Omit 
"form  of."  10.  Lest  I  he  said.  11.  Who  dares.  12.  Num  quia. 
13.  Fut.  tense.     14.  Move  yourself.    15.  You  not  perceiving. 

8.  Chap.  III.  1.  Rel.  clause  of  characteristic.  2.  By  means  of. 
3.  Forget.  4.  "That  of  yours "  =  iflte.  5.  It  is  permitted  to  you. 
6.  The  Roman  method  of  reckoning  and  expressing  dates  should 
be  learned.  7.  Use  the  abstract  word  "  audacity."  8.  Change  to 
the  active  form,  as  in  the  text.  9.  Ind.  discourse.  10.  For  the  sake 
of  saving  themselves.     11.  Our  slaughter. 

4.  Chap.  IV.  1.  Watch  sharply.  2.  Madness  and  villany.  3.  In 
w.  ace.  4.  Among  the  scythe-makers.  5.  Of.  0.  Omit.  7.  Rel.  of 
characteristic;  antecedent  indefinite.  8.  Our  death  of  all.  9.  Pres. 
subj.  10.  Because  I  was  alive,  a  little  of  delay  was  to  you.  11.  Rel. 
of  purpose.     12.  Of  the  natioHs. 


60  NOTES,    CATILINE   I. 

5.  Chap,  V.  1.  Verb  in  the  pres.  tense.  2.  Cf.  tuos  .  .  .  quam 
plurimos.  3.  A  conditional  clause  w.  dum  modo.  4.  Me  and  you. 
5.  Private.  6.  Abl.  abs.  7.  Through  himself.  8.  Life.  9.  Called. 
10.  XJt  w.  subj.     11.7  commanding,     12.  Consult  vie. 

6.  Chap.  VI.  1.  See  3,  n.  1,  and  4,  n.  7.  2.  Affairs.  3.  In. 
4.  When.     6.  Cf.  3,  n.  7.     6.  But  what?     7.  Use  the  plural.     8.  See 

3.  n.  6.  9.  With  a  weapon.  10.  Opposed.  11.  Madness.  12.  Not  a 
cum-clause.     13.  Many  thrusts.     14.  F7-07n  the  hands  to  you. 

7.  Chap.  VIL     1.  By  which.     2.  Omit  "to  be."     3.  So  great. 

4.  Hostile   eyes   of.     5.  Mind.      6.  Ought   to   be    borne  by  you   (dat.). 

7.  Omit.  8.  Conditional  sentence;  A.  308;  G.  599;  H.  510.  9.  What- 
ever may  have  sounded.  10.  Conditional  sentence;  A.  307,  1,  a.  c; 
G.  597;  H.  508. 

8.  Chap.  VIII.  1.  See  7,  n.  8.  2.  Pres.  inf.  after  past  tense  of 
debeo.     3.  See  2,  n.  6.     Cf.  tu  te  ipse.    4.  For  the  sake  of  avoiding. 

5.  Bum,  to  avoid  ambiguity.  6.  "Say  ...  not"  =  deny.  The  Latin 
prefers  nego  to  dlco  non.     7.  Who  was;  a  rel.  clause  of  reason. 

8.  Quod  w.  subj.,  why  1  9.  See  3,  n.  4.  10.  Express  this  rel.  clause 
by  a  participle.  11.  To  please  itself.  12.  Conditional  sentence;  A. 
307,  2  ;  G.  598 ;  H.  509.     13.  With  difficulty  keep.     14.  Going. 

9.  Chap.  IX.  1.  Note  change  of  tense.  2.  Omit  "the  point  of." 
3.  Of  so  great  (value).  4.  A  result  clause ;  it  may  be  changed  to  the 
active  form,  as  in  the  text.  5.  Omit  "a  sense  of."  6.  Ut.  7.  By 
a  straight  [road'].     8.  Omit  "a  flame  of."     9.  A  rel.  clause  of  reason. 

10.  Chap.  X.  1.  See  3,  n.  4.  2.  To  you.  3.  See  8,  n.  10.  4.  Aban- 
doned by.    5.  Cf .  habes  ubi  ostentes. 

11.  Chap.  XI.     1.  A  translation  of  quae  dicam  .  .  .  mandate. 

2.  By  much.  3.  Pred.  nom.  4.  Omit.  5.  Favor  you  are  returning.  6.  Re- 
member that  the  relative,  or  rather  the  verb  of  which  it  is  subject, 
takes  the  person  of  the  antecedent.     7.  On  account  of.    8.  By  the  fire. 

12.  Chap.  XII.  1.  Felt  the  same  [thing].  2.  Reply  a  few  [things] 
to  you.  3.  I  do  not  fear  lest  I  pollute.  4.  Cf .  credendo.  5.  Abl. 
abs.     6.  Who  does  not  know. 

13.  Chap.  XIII.     1.  So  great.     2.  Ne  w.  perf.  (or  pres.)  subj. 

3.  Conditional  sentence ;  A.  306 ;  G.  597 ;  H.  508.   4.  Will  be  afflicted. 

6.  Hortatory  subj.  6.  See  n.  5,  and  use  the  perf.  tense.  7.  Each 
one.  8.  What  he  feels.  9.  See  n.  6.  10.  Joined  themselves.  11.  Op- 
tative subj.     12.  Use  the  sing. 


NOTES,   CATILINE  II. 

14,  CiiAis.  l.-III.  1.  Lie  open.  2.  Bound  fast.  3.  Quoque. 
4.  Sow  the  twentieth  day.    5.  As  if  buried ;  omit  "a  sword."    0.  St-e 

3,  n.  7.  7.  Observe  the  ace.  w.  inf.,  where  we  might  have  the  nom., 
the  subject  of  the  inf.  being  the  same  as  that  of  the  leading  verb. 
8.  Of,  9.  Shall  he.  10.  Express  this  concessive  clause  by  a  part. 
II.  See  3,  n.  2.  12.  Held  on  all  sides.  13.  See  2,  n.  14.  14.  The 
various  renderings  of  rSs  publica  should  be  carefully  noted. 

15,  Chaps.  IV.-VI.  1.  On  the  former  night.  2.  Omit.  3.  Follow 
the  text.  4.0/.  b.  Sharers  of.  6.  Fut.  inf.  after  "promised." 
7.  Iiuddiae.  8.  Since  these  things  are  so.  9.  Manlian.  10.  Escape; 
put  in  the  subj.  after  dum  modo.     11.  In  which.     12.  Shall  live. 

13.  In.  14.  Many  young  men.  15.  By.  16.  Those  ^things']  which. 
17.  Pertains  to. 

IG.  Chaps.  VII.-IX.    1.  With  what  mind.     2.  Quod.    3.  So  great. 

4.  Came  into.  5.  T7ie  voice.  6.  Away  from  their  eyes.  7.  Use  the 
pres.  tense  after  iam  difl.  8.  Make  "design"  the  subject  of 
"seems."  9.  Refero.  10.  }fake  that  you  know.  11.  While  they  are 
silent,  they  approve.     12.  With  the  best  right.     13.  Force   and  hands. 

14.  D6.  15.  ir7ii7«  they  jare  silent.  16.  Correct  yourself.  17.  Cf. 
ntinam  .  .  .  duint. 

17.  Chap!*.  X.-XIII.  1.  A  conditional  sentence  in  ind.  discourse. 
In  such  cases  always  consider  what  the  direct  form  would  be. 
2.  Omit.  3.  Of.  4.  Because.  5.  She  seems  to  me  to  reproach.  0.  Be- 
cause I  neglect.  7.  Whither.  8.  See  10,  n.  7.  9.  /  know  not  in  what 
voay.  10.  Cf.  omnium  scelerom  .  .  .  mSLturit&a  .  .  .  firilpit. 
11.  Not  only  laid  open,  but  also  crushed. 


CATILINE  II. 


18.  Chap.  L  1.  Ipse.  2.  Nod  iam.  3.  To  him;  dat  of  ref- 
erence. 4.  Do  you  see  any  reason  for  the  subj.  in  this  clause? 
5.  Bloody.    6.  Use  the  adj.     7.  Thrown  up.     8,  .Taws. 

19.  Chap.  II.  1.  Use  oportet.  2.  fimittS.  3.  Cf.  Bed  quam 
.  .  .  crfiderent,  and  observe  change  of  tense.  4.  The  thing  not  hav- 
ing  been  proved  to  you.  5.  Instead  of  fut.  pass,  inf.,  use  fore  ut  «. 
pres.  tubj. ;  if  woxdd  happen  that  I,  etc.    6.  Cf.  utinam  .  .  .  fidux- 


62  NOTES,    CATILINE   II. 

isset.     7.  Bear    it   severely.     8.  Because   he   has  gone.     9.   Too   little 
accompanied. 

20.  Chap.  III.  1.  Shall  have  shown.  2.  Profugio.  3.  Malo. 
4.  Ipse.     5.  Observe  the  asyndeton.     6.  See  19,  n.  5. 

21.  Chap.  IV.  1.  Should  "Catiline"  be  in  the  gen.  or  dat.  ? 
2.  Follow  the  text  in  repeating  si.  3.  The  Latin  has  no  separate 
form  to  express  the  English  progressive.  4.  Omit.  5.  Abl.  of 
cause.  6.  The  various  forms  of  the  conditional  sentence  should  by 
this  time  be  easily  recognized,  and  need  not  be  further  referred  to 
in  these  notes.  7.  Ace.  in  exclamation.  8.  What  tense  ?  9.  Note 
change  of  tense.  10.  So  great.  11.  Hoio  great.  12.  Prep,  omitted 
before  tota.  13.  Familiarly ;  but  there  is  no  objection  to  the  super- 
lative. 

22.  Chap.  V.     \.  In   [respect   fo]   enduring;   abl.    of   gerundive. 

2.  Profligacy  and  recklessness.     3.  Possum.     4.  To  be  despaired  of. 
6.  Find  the  sentence  of  which  this  is   a  pretty  free  translation. 

6.  Whom  you  may  fear.     7.  It  must  he  contended  by  us. 

23.  Chap.  VI.  1.  Expressed  in  the  prefix.  2.  Note  the  omis- 
sion of  "  whether."     3.  Primary  tense,  depending  on  "  will  show." 

4.  Thither,  whither.     5.  Omit,     6.  Pluperf .  tense  denoting  prior  action. 

7.  /  suppose.     8.  Expressed  in  ille. 

24.  Chap.  VII.  1.  Not  animus.  2.  Use  the  personal  construc- 
tion;  I  ain  said  to  have  sent.    Z.  Uncondemned.    4t.  Of  so  much  [value']. 

5.  Put  in  the  ace.  (pred.)  to  agree  with  the  omitted  subject  of  the 
inf.    6.  Res  publica.     7.  Cf.  sed  cum  sint  .  .  .  dlcerent. 

25.  Chap.  VIII.  1.  Themselves  to  themselves.  2.  Those  ichom' 
the  relative  must  be  expressed  in  Latin.  3.  With  the  interest 
4.  About  to. 

26.  Chap.  IX.  1.  Ace.  -w.  inf.  2.  The  republic  [being]  tran 
quil.  3.  One  and  the  same  which.  4.  Present.  5.  So.  6.  AU  together 
7.  Omit.     8.  Display  themselves  too  insolently.    9.  Express  by  the  pass. 

27.  Chap.  X.  1.  Omit.  2.  Emerge.  3.  These  partly.  4.  Badltf 
managing  business.  5.  Partly.  6.  In  debt.  7.  Not  only  [not]  the  state 
but  not  even,  etc.  8.  Become.  9.  Many.  10.  Of  (from)  Catiline's 
embrace  and  bosom.     11.  Adj.     12.   Wish  for  themselves. 

28.  Chap.  XI.     1.  Omit  "a  body  of."    2.  Set  against  =  oppose  to. 

3.  Does  not  respond  to.     4.  Abl.     6.  Of  all  things.     6.  With  us.    7.  The 
desires  of  men.     8.  So  great. 


NOTES,    CATILLNE    III.  63 

29.  Chap.  XII.  1.  Enough  of  guard.  2.  0/ better  m!nd ;  abl.  of 
quality.      3.  Use   the   pass,   periphrastic   conj.      4.  Atque  adeo. 

5.  Omit. 

80.  Chap.  XIII.  1.  TogfttuB.  2.  Use  the  superlative.  3.  So 
treacherous.  4.  The  immortal  gods  [being'}  leaders.  5.  3/any  and  not 
doubtful.  

81.  Chaps.  I.-V.  1.  Of.  16,  n.  7.  2.  Not  murus.  3.  Omit. 
4.  Quod.  5.  See  18,  n.  7.  6.  Vestrum,  not  vestri,  is  the  form 
that  is  used  partitively.  7.  /  wis/ied.  8.  Which  Ithimj}.  9.  Cf. 
qui  quae  ego  dSferrem  non  crSderent  in  chap.  II.  10.  Rel.  w. 
pres.  subj.  11.  Potential  subj.  12,  Use  the  exclamatory  phrase. 
13.  Fut.  perf.     14.  Whom  we  should  fear.     16.  See  21,  n.  10,  11. 

32.  Chaps.  VI.-IX.  1.  Such  expressions  as  this  are  very  com- 
mon, and  do  not  need  frequent  comment.  2.  Cf.  hiisset  necne, 
and  observe  that  "  \?hetlier  "  is  not  there  expressed.  3.  Each  one. 
4.  Looked  upon.  5.  To  be  rendered  by  cum  causal.  6.  Sai/  this. 
7.  Use  the  superlative.  8.  Ezcitd.  0.  Cf.  the  sentence  Bed  cum 
Bint  hominSa  .  .  .  dicerent  ?  and  note  change  of  tense.  10.  Jo. 
11.  Use  the  part.  12.  Expressed  in  the  word  for  "prefer."  13.  That 
it  must  be  si)oken  by  me.    14.  In  great  debt.    15.  A  rel.  clause  of  result. 

88.  Chaps.  X.-XIII.  1.  Who  should,  etc.  2.  Negative  purpose. 
3.  Knour;  fut.  imperative   of  sci6.      4.  See   29,   n.  1.      5.  Omit. 

6.  Factum.     7.  Least.    8.  All  things.     9.  Abl.     10.  Quin  w.  pres. 
•ubj.     11.  Present. 


CATILINE   III. 


84.  Chap.  I.  1.  Sing.  2.  Use  the  prep.  3.  Not  cum.  4.  Omit. 
6.  Among.  6.  Omit  *'«  place  among."  7.  Follow  the  order  of  the 
text.     8.  Translate  this  rel.  clause  by  a  participle. 

85.  Chap.  II.  1.  What  tense  ?  2.  In  that  that  I  might  find  out. 
3.  Gallic.  A.  Subordinate  clause  in  ind.  discourse.  5.  Cf.  n.  2. 
6.  /  so  comprehend.  7.  TdtUB.  H.  W/ml  thei/  are  plotting.  9.  Shall 
havt  seen.  10.  Cf.  facultfttem  .  .  .  obUtam  .  .  .  ut.  11.  TronsaU 
pin*.  12.  Translate  by  two  words.  13.  Cf.  qui  omnia  .  .  .  sentf- 
rent.     14.  Uu  continuallif. 


64  NOTES,    CATILINE  III. 

36.  Chap.  III.  1.  Of  the  letters  ivhatever,  etc,  2.  When  now  it  was 
dawning,  o.  See  34,  n.  8.  4.  Use  part,  and  verb,  instead  of  two 
verbs.  5.  It  pleased  many,  etc.  G.  Express  as  a  completed  act  in 
f ut.  time.  7.  Prius  .  .  .  quam.  8.  Cf .  me  esse  factunim  ut  .  .  . 
non  .  .  .  deferrem.  9.  Untouched.  10.  "  Say  not"=  denij.  11.  See 
n.  8.  12.  Crowded.  1'^.  If  anything  of  weapons  was.  14.  Prius  quam 
w.  subj. 

37.  Chap.  IV.  1.  Those  [things']  which  =  such  [things]  as. 
2.  Cum  concessive.  3.  Do  not  omit  the  reflex,  pron.  4  With  this 
design  that.     5.  Use  the  adj.     6.  Shall  have.     7.  From.     8.  Boundless. 

9.  Observe  the  gender  of  the  part.  10.  It  was  ordered.  11.  Plup. 
subj.,  representing  the  fut.  perf.  indie,  of  the  direct  form.  12.  Ne- 
cesse.  13.  Ille.  14.  The  fated  gear.  15.  Cf.  Cethego  cum 
ceteris,  etc. 

38.  Chap.  V.  1.  That  gou  cut.  2.  Cf.  37,  n.  1.  3.  Replied  some- 
tliing.  4.  Kepeat  the  verb  of  the  question.  5.  Whether.  6.  Said  to 
him.  7.  Quidquam.  8.  Cf.  quid  sibi  esset  cum  eis.  9.  On 
account  of  what  thing.  10.  That  [one]  whotu  ;  the  relative  must  not 
be  omitted  as  in  English.  11.  Cf.  n.  10.  12.  Denied  that  he  ivould. 
13.  Take  care. 

39.  Chap.  VI.  1.  It  pleased  the  senate  that  (ut)  thanks  should  he 
rendered.  2.  Observe  in  the  text  the  several  quod-clauses.  3.  Given. 
4.  Of.  5.  See  37,  n.  6,  6.  Abdicated  [himself]  from.  7.  Hortatory 
subj.  8.  Who  all.  9.  Use  noun.  10.  Cf.  quae  religio  .  .  .  ea 
religione.  11.  Abl.  abs.  12.  There  ivas  to  ns  a  scruple.  13.  Bg 
which  the  less  we  should  punish.     14.  Rel.  clause  of  reason. 

40.  Chap.  VII.  1.  A  sub.  clause  in  ind,  discourse.  2.  Fore 
ut,  w.  subj.  3.  Do  not  great! g  fear.  4.  Both  can  and  dares.  5.  The 
approaches  of  all.  6.  Knows  all  [thijigs].  7.  Rel.  of  characteristic. 
8.  Ipse.  9.  Things.  10.  Conative  imperfect.  11.  So  great.  V2.Bg 
so  much  before.  13.  And  also  =  atque.  14.  See  A.  308,  c ;  G.  599, 
3;  H.  511,  2.     15.  Abl.  abs.     16.  That  I  mag  sag.     17.  Arrested. 

41.  Chap.  VIII.  1.  So  great  things.  2.  /  hardly  seem  to  have 
been  able  to  manage.  3,  Without  ■=  sine.  4.  Vero  should  not  come 
first  in  the  sentence.  5.  So  present,  agreeing  with  "  they."  6.  Have 
been  hurled.     7.  Has  been  moved.    8.  Which  [things']  so  many.    9.  Hie. 

10.  From  heaven.  11.  If  not  =  unless.  12.  Omit.  13.  Cf.  slgnum 
coUocandum  .  .  .  loc5verunt.     14.  Opposite  than  (atque). 


NOTES,  CATILINE  lU.  65 

42.  Chap,  IX.  1.  Here.  2.  Who  denies.  3.  Passive.  4.  Who 
does  not  perceive.  5.  This  day  in  the  morning.  0.  To  be  turned  totvitrds. 
7.  A  1)1.  ahs.  8.  The  models  for  this  and  the  two  following  condi- 
tional sentences  may  easily  be  found  in  the  text.  0.  Greatest. 
10.  Taken  all  discretion  from  these  men  (dat.).  11.  Things.  12.  Kel. 
clause  after  ftnus.     13.  Happen  divinely. 

48.  Chap.  X.  1.  Quonlam.  2.  Held.  3.  Pres.  inf.  A.  Use  hut 
one  verb  for  "  filled  "  and  "  flowed."  5.  Cf.  omnfis  .  .  .  virds  par- 
tial, etc.,  remembering  that  "dissensions"  is  the  subject.  0.  lie- 
public.  7.  It  need  not  be  said.  8.  Of  that  kind  that  they.  9.  After. 
10.  Who  can  be  safe,  the  city  [6ejn^]  safe.  11.  In  the  number  of. 
12.  Omit. 

44.  Chap.  XI.  1.  So  great.  2.  Nihil  praeterquam.  3.  Quam. 
4.  Potential  subj.  6.  Make  this  word  emphatic  by  its  position. 
6.  Of  whom  one.     7.  It  will  be  that;  fore  ut,  with  pres.  subj. 

45.  Chap.  XII.  1.  Cf.  miW  .  .  .  vivendum.  2.  Cf.  38,  n.  10. 
3.  Which.  4.  Consider  this  a  rel.  clause  of  result  =  "  such  that  they 
can."  5.  Omit.  0.  Mine.  7.  It  was  not  harmed  to  you ;  impers.  use  of 
the  pass.  8.  //  is  not  harmed  to  me.  See  n.  7.  9.  Which  who  have 
secured;  cf.  quam  qui  neglegunt.  10.  Very  great.  11.  Whither. 
12.  It  pleases  me.     13.  Abl.  abs.     14.  That. 


46.  Chaps.  I.-V.  1.  What  is  the  usual  position  of  the  vocative  ? 
2.  By  means  of  or  because  of.  3.  For  the  agreement  of  the  part,  see 
A.  187,  b;  G.  282;  H.  439,  2.  4.  A  purpose  clause.  5.  Ind.  ques- 
tion. 6.  This  may  be  expressed  by  the  conative  imperf. ;  were  tam- 
pering with.  7.  Use  the  adj.  8.  When.  9.  And.  10.  Rel.  clause  of 
purpose.  11.  Ex.  12.  Plotting  this.  13.  Tfuit  I  should  so  grasp. 
14.  For  the  person  of  the  verb  see  A.  205,  a;  O.  283;  II.  403,  II,  1. 
16.  When  now.  10.  It  pleased.  17.  Ace.  w.  inf.  18.  Those  [^things] 
vhich  ;  rel.,  not  interrog.  clause.  10.  Testimdnium  died.  20.  Omit. 
21.  Use  part,  or  cum-clause.    22.  Not  something  —  nothing. 

47.  Chaps.  VI.-VIII.  1.  Decreed.  2.  Ex  3.  Mivtred  into 
custody.  4.  In  order  that.  6.  Cf.  religld  .  .  .  quo  minus,  etc. 
6.  Cf.  grfttiae  .  .  .  agtmtor.  7.  Arrested.  8.  RSa  pablica;  ust>  the 
expression  but  ()n<'e  in  the  clause,  iiniialini;  bene  gestS  .  .  .  c5n- 
•ervfttA  rA  pablicA.    9.  Which  wt  may  fear.    10.  Hi  nee.    11.  Quam 


DO  NOTES,    CATILINE   IV. 

diu.  12.  Use  the  pass.  13.  Were  able  to  meet.  14.  Omit.  15.  Super- 
lative of  difficulter,  or  cum  w.  abl.  16.  Use  the  personal  con- 
struction; the  immortal  gods  seem  to  have  managed.  17.  It  is  not  of. 
18.  Hold  in  [by']  memory.  19,  These  so  great  things.  20,  See  37,  n,  11. 
48.  Chaps.  IX.-XII.  1,  Abl.  abs.  2.  Who  saved;  rel.  clause  of 
reason,  3.  Stricken  in  mind.  4.  Ut.  5.  Form  the  adj.  from  the 
adv.  dementer.  6.  Scelus.  7.  See  44,  n,  1.  8.  Use  the  sing, 
9.  Cf.  38,  n,  10.  10,  In.  11.  See  43,  n.  7.  12.  That.  13.  Omit  "  sorts 
of."     14.  If  any.     15.  Be  strong  for  glory  to  me. 


CATILINE   IV. 


49.  Chap.  I.  1.  Part,  agreeing  with  "I."  2.  Imitate  vestra 
erga  me  volmitas.  3.  What  case  follows  obliviscor?  4.  A 
result-clause.  5.  Cf.  ego  sum  ille  consul.  6.  To  whom.  7.  Po- 
tential subj.,  as  in  quid  laeter.  8.  Subj.  of  proviso,  as  in  paria- 
tur.     9.  Fatal.     10.  Use  the  noun. 

50.  Chap.  II.  1.  To  think.  2.  Put.  perf.  3.  Gratiam  refero. 
4.  Imitate  pro  eo  Sc  mereor.  5.  Rel.  clause  of  result.  6.  Nor 
atn  I  not  affected.  7,  Embrace.  8.  That  my  little  son.  9.  In  the  same 
construction  as  "all  will  be  safe."  10.  If  not  —  nisi.  l\.  Not  T. 
Gracchus  tampered,  etc.   12.  That  he  should  slay.    13.  Ad  w.  gerundive. 

51.  Chap,  III,  1.  Imitate  ceteros  .  ,  ,  dandos  censuistis. 
2.  Omit  "a  vote  of,"  3.  This  causal  clause  naturally  seems  to 
express  the  reason  of  those  who  passed  the  vote.  4.  Which  honor, 
object  of  "  held,"  5.  It  is  of  the  consul.  6.  Judged.  7,  Miring ; 
pass.  8.  What  you  may  decree.  9.  By  no  means.  10.  Use  the  gerund, 
11.  Cf.  n.  8.     12.  So  great. 

52.  Chap.  IV.  1.  Censeo.  2.  Of  death.  3.  Pred,  nom.  4,  Ap- 
position. 5.  Perpetual  chains.  6.  Faveo,  foil,  by  the  dat.  7.  He. 
8.  Omit.  9.  Put.  inf.  10.  By  whom  death  itself  is  not  feared.  11.  Hor- 
tatory subj.  12.  Lest  any  one.  13.  Ut.  14.  Not  of  the  dignity. 
15.  Was  not  to  be  feared.     See  40,  n.  14. 

53.  Chap.  V.  1.  Abl,  sing,  fern,  of  mens.  2.  Follow.  3,  Gen. 
4.  Note  the  two  meanings  of  interest  in  this  chap.  5.  Those.  6.  1 
know   not   whether.      7.  Subj.    of   ind,    question.      8.  Indie.     9.  Were 


NOTES,   CATII.INK    IV.  U7 

unwniimj.  lu.  Wind  C(psar  judys.  11.  Use  the  interrog.  -ne. 
12.  Manner.  13.  Contraho.  14.  Jlim.  16.  See  62,  n.  12.  10.  See 
62,  n.  13. 

54.  Chap.  VI.  1.  By  much.  2.  So  let  it  be  permitted  me  to,  etc.^ 
a*  I  am  not.  3.  Moved.  4.  /  seem  to  m  if  self  to  see.  6.  Shall  be  king 
(^=  reign).     0.  That  he  should  be  king  (=  reign).     7.  Take  punishment 

from.  8.  Abl.abs.  0.  Use  the  interrog;.  nonne.  10.  Should.  ll.Subj. 
hy  attraction.  12.  In.  13.  In  the  double  question  use  utruin  .  .  . 
an.  14.  Cf.  id  Sggnint  ut  .  .  .  coUocSrent.  15.  Lnring  [<>/']  his 
country.  10.  See  52.  n.  9.  17.  Cf.  attribuit  nos  tnicldand5s. 
18.  Lest  you  seem. 

55.  Chap.  VII.  1.  Ad  w.  gerundive.  2.  Those  [things']  tvhich. 
3.  All  Ithings}  hai-e  been  prepared.  4.  Cum.  5.  Highest.  0.  A  rel. 
clause  after  bSIub  takes  the  subj.  7.  Feel  one  and  the  same  [thing']. 
8.  Totential  subj.     9.  So  .  .  .  that  we  may  vie. 

56.  Chap.  VIII.  1.  TTie  price  of  the  labor.  2.  So  much,  how  much. 
3.  Who  has  obtained ;  rel.  clause  of  proviso.  4.  Fortune.  6.  Subj., 
why  ?  0.  This  conditional  clause  may  be  expressed  by  a  part. 
7.  See  65,  n.  1.  8.  Easte.  9.  Could  find  no  one.  10.  Who  did  not 
desire.     11.  Cf.  quid  .  .  .  futiirum  fuit.     12.  Are  sustained  by. 

67.  Chap.  IX.  1.  To  be  expressed  emphatically.  2.  Ut.  3.  For 
saving.  4.  Negative  purpose.  6.  Hortatory.  0.  Zeal.  7,  Make  this 
word  agree  with  "  citizens.''  8.  Of  Vesta.  9.  It  must  be  decided. 
10.  First.     11.  Cf.  66,  n.  7.     12.  Omit.     13.  Consular. 

58.  Chap.  X.  1.  Omit.  2,  Death  to  me.  3.  My  deeds.  4.  So 
great  .  .  .  how  grfat.  6.  Other.  0.  Of  the  republic  welt  managed.  7.  Cf. 
■it  Sclpid  clSrus.  8.  Perf.  subj.  9.  Whither  you  may  return. 
10.  Flare.  11.  External.  12.  Domestic.  13.  Follow  the  text,  vestrd 
bondrumque,  etc.  14.  See  44,  n.  1.  16.  Of  you  (=  your)  and  of, 
etc.     10.   Which  may  weaken. 

59.  Chap.  XL  1.  Fut.  tense.  2.  Very  safe.  3.  Dat.  of  pos- 
sessor. 4.  Put  this  word  in  an  emphatic  position.  6.  Alone.  0.  Un- 
less. 7.  Use  the  adverbs.  8.  Concerning.  9.  Sec  66,  n.  2.  10.  Through 
myself.     11.  Decide. 


«0.  Chaps.  I.-IV.     1.  See  46,  n.  1.    2.  Aut.     3.  Is  proposed. 
4.  Translate  by  two  words.    6.  Ace.  w.  inf.    0.  A  purpose  clause  w. 


68  NOTES,   ARCHIAS. 

ut.  1 .  It  is  yours.  8.  To  think.  9.  See  55,  n.  1.  10.  Be  lejl.  11.  Whai 
you  thought.  12.  What  you  decided.  13.  De.  14.  Than  opinion. 
15.  See  51,  n.  10.  16.  Silanus  decides,  —  censeo  followed  by  ace. 
w.  inf.     17.  Autem.     \^.  For  the  sake  of.     19.0/     20.  Orders. 

61.  Chaps.  V.-VII.  1.  Of  him.  2.  Express  this  rel.  clause  by 
the  part.  3.  Of.  4.  Omit.  5.  Modus.  G.  In  mind.  7.  Follow  the 
text;  wretched  and  unburied  heaps.  8.  Cogito.  9.  Vereor.  10.  Does 
Cicero  here  use  ut  or  ne  non  after  a  verb  of  fearing  ?  11.  Omit 
"  I  will  say  that."     12.  Agere  ut. 

62.  Chaps.  VIII.-XI.  1.  See  56,  n.  1.  2.  Potential  subj. 
3.  Res.  4,  Not  at  all  =  in  no  manner.  5.  Who  are  in;  a  rel.  clause 
of  proviso.  6.  How  much  they  can.  7.  Translate  by  a  rel.  clause. 
8.  Use  the  imperf.  of  attempted  action.  9.  Love  of  country.  10.  See 
56,  n.  12.  11.  Abl.  abs.  12.  Are  not  wanting.  13.  Sing.  14.  You 
must  decide.  15.  All  these  [things'].  16.  Grant  that  I  lose;  cf.  sit 
Scipio  clarus.     17.  See  58,  n.  2. 


ARCHIAS. 


63.  Chap.   I.     1.  Aliquid.     2.  Cf.   in  qua   .    .    .   versatum. 

3.  Ought.  4.  Best.  5.  This  sentence  may  be  turned  in  imitation  of 
a  qua  .  .  .  abhomiisse;  rny  boyhood  did  not  shrink  from,  etc.  6.  Sing. 
7.  Abl.  abs.;  he  being  leader  to  me.  8.  A  certain  other  power  of  genius. 
9.  Cf.  ne  nos  quidem,  etc. 

64.  Chap.  II.     1.  Superlative.    2.  Ace.  w.  inf.    3.  Abhorreo. 

4.  Ut  w.  subj. 

65.  Chap.  III.  1.  Writing.  2.  It  happened  to  him.  3.  What 
case  ?  4.  He  was  presented  with  many  rewards.  5.  Omit.  6.  Cf . 
aliquid  .  .  .  iudicare.  7.  To  his  old  age.  8.  See  37,  n.  13.  9.  Was 
treated  with. 

66.  Chap.  IV,  1.  Omit.  2.  Who  should  be  enrolled ;  a  rel.  clause 
after  dignus.  3.  A  Ileraclean.  4.  Nothing  else  unless.  5.  Should 
the  preposition  be  expressed  or  not  1  6.  All  know.  7.  Cf.  ante 
civlt§.tem  datam. 

67.  Chap.  V.  1.  What  is  there  that  ice  ma;/  doubt  ?  2.  Of  so  great 
carefulness ;  abl.  of  quality.     3.  Repeat  the  noun.     4.  Use  the  same 


NOTES,  AKCHiAJS.  69 

word  for  '' possessed  of"  and  "enjoy."    6.  Cf.  n.  1.    Q.  Cf.  n6  .  .  . 
voluit.     7.  Cum  ur  apud  ?    B.  lam  twn. 

68.  Chap.  VI.  1.  Wherelwith']  we  mai/  relieve  them.  2.  [/r]  conld 
not  be  supplied  to  ua  what  we  may  sjyeak ;  fullowing  Buppetere  .  .  . 
dIc&muB.  3.  Impersonal  verb.  4.  If  you  have  devoted.  [>.  Ut. 
0.  Put  the  relative  clause  first;  quantum  .  .  .  tantimi.  7.  All- 
quid.  8.  Parvl.  1).  Use  the  gerundive.  10.  Expeto.  11.  Cf. 
n.  4.     12.  Pres.  part. 

69.  Chap.  VII.  1.  Cf.  est  certum.  quod  respondeam.  2.  Were 
uithout  learning.  3.  Plur.  of  virtus.  4.  Handed  down  w  letters. 
A.  N&tflra.  Q.  For  glory.  7,  Multum.  S.  0/ these  studies  ;  ohjec- 
tive  iien.     9.  Of. 

70.  Chap.  VIII.  1.  Use  the  personal  construction ;  you  seem  to 
owe  [ou</Af],  etr.  2.  lliat  he  does  not  admire.  3,  Cf.  n.  1.  4.  Abl.  of 
quality ;  cf.  animo  tarn  agrestl.  5.  DIco.  C.  Use  part.  7.  Say 
the  same  thing.  8.  Use  adverbs.  9.  Cf.  mS  .  .  .  dlligenter  atten- 
ditis.  10.  We  receive  from.  11.  Rel.  clause  of  result  =  "  such  a 
poet  as  has  attained."     12.  Use  the  noun  formed  from  hum&nus. 

71.  Chap.  IX.  l.RSs.  2.  Did  not  hear  gladly.  3.  Plur.  4.  Heard 
most  gladly.  6.  Follow  the  order  of  the  text;  Themistocles,  when,  etc. 
.  .  .  said.  6.  Observe  that  the  quotation  is  direct ;  use  the  indie. 
7.  Him.     8.  Cf.  ea   quae   gesserit.     9.  In  great  variety.     10.  The 

fleet  sunk.     11.  Carefully  observe  the  order;  put  the  rel.  clause  first. 

72.  Chap.  X.  1.  Adv.  2.  To  the  same  place,  whither;  the  rel. 
clause  preceding.  3.  Cf.  noster  hic  MSgnus.  4.  See  71,  n.  3. 
5.  Who  have  found.  0.  Cf.  n.  5.  7.  Verses.  8.  Were  sharers  of.  9.  Was 
not  able  to  obtain.  For  the  indie,  in  this  class  of  conditional  sen- 
tences, see  A.  308,  c;  G.  599,  3;  H.  611,  1,  n.  3.  10.  Accipio. 
11.  That  nothing  =  lest  anything.     12.  Neut.  plur. 

73.  Chap.  XI.  1.  Each  best.  2.  Ipse.  3.  In  which  city  .  .  .  in 
that.  4.  To  shrink  from.  6.  Omit,  0.  At  the  same  time  with  you. 
7.  Abl.  abs.     8.  Which  we  may  desire.    9.  Why  we  shoiJd  be  distressed. 

74.  Chap.  XII.  1.  Of  so  small  mind.  2.  A  prohibition;  use  the 
perf.  subj.    3.  Is  present  to,  adsum.     4.  AUfinus  ft.     5.  Adj. 


75.   Chaps.  I.-V.     1.  I^oc.  abl.,  in   apposition  w.  the  locatire 

Antioch."      2.    Most    learned.       3.    Since    he    had    devoted    himself. 


70  NOTES,    ARCHIAS. 

4.  Even  then.  5.  Cdgnosc5.  G.  Afiicio.  7.  Nature  and  merit. 
8.  Change  to  the  active.  9.  Greatest.  10.  Not  to  be  translated 
literally.  11.  Cf.  n.  1.  12.  Quidam.  13.  Quod.  14.  Autem. 
15.  Sancio,  foil,  by  ut.     16.  AUenus.     17.  Subj.     18.  Omit. 

76.  Chaps.  VI.-IX.  1.  Potential  subj.  2.  See  69,  n.  9.  3.  Omit 
"  when  it  is."  4.  Express  by  two  nouns.  5.  Cresc5.  6.  Intueor. 
7.  Use  -ne.  8.  See  69,  n.  5.  9.  Exsto.  10.  Aids  much.  11.  Virtus. 
12.  Abl.  of  cause.  13.  Quid.  14.  When  he  has  written  no  word. 
15.  Verses.  16.  Omit.  17.  Res.  18.  Valeo.  19.  Cf.  sit .  .  .  sanc- 
tum .  .  .  nomen.  20.  7s  ours.  21.  Cf.  71,  n.  4.  22.  Subj. 
denoting  concession.     23.  Exceedingly. 

77.  Chaps.  X.-XII.  1.  Rel.  clause.  2.  Use  fore  ut  w.  subj. 
3.  Pi  up.  subj.  4.  See  72,  n.  8.  5.  Use  the  part.  6.  [/f]  to  he  written 
about  his  deeds.  7.  Virtus.  8.  Ipse.  9.  Each  best  [man"].  10.  Ace. 
w.  f ut.  inf.     11.  7  0  your  recent  perils.     12.  Abl.  of  quality. 


(7 


GRAMMATICAL  INDEX, 

WITH  REFERENCES   TO   THE    EXERCISES    FOR    ILLUSTRATION. 


References  are  not  given  for  construcUons  of  continual  recurrence,  auch  aa 
aubject  nominative,  direct  object,  and  the  lil^e,  and  only  a  few  are  given  for  many 
otberH  that  are  used  frequently. 

The  grammara  referred  to  are  Allen  &  Grecnough's  (A.),  Gildersleeve'a  (G,), 
and  Harkncss's  (H.).     [Note:  ff=  and  following.] 


Ablative. 

Absolute.    A.  255 ;  G.  408-9 ;  H.  4.31.    See  Participles. 

"  In  accordance  tcith."     A.  253,  n.  ;  G.  398 ;  H.  41«>. 2,  T) ;  6,  13 ; 

87,8;  61,2;  76,3,4. 

0/ accompaniment.    A.  248,  7 ;  G.  391 ;  H.  419,  L 28,  5.  8. 

Ofauent.    A.  246;  G.403;  H.  415, 1. 14,2;  22.  1 ;  29,  7;  41, 1; 

64,7. 
Of  cause.    A.  245;  G.  406-7;  H.  416. 11,  9;  18,  5.  G;  21,  4;  27, 

2;  61.4;  67,2. 

Of  comparison.    A.  247;  G.  399;  H.  417. 11,  2;  60,4. 

Of  degree    {difference).     A.  260;  G.  400;  H.  423. 11,2;  40,8: 

64, 1 ;  64,  5. 
Of  manner.    A.  248;   G.  401;  II.  410,  III. 10,  4;  16,  1;  19,5; 

28,5;  26.6;  39,2;  40,  11;  43,6;  57,4. 
Of  means.     A.   248,  8;  G.  403;  H.  420. 1,  17;  2,  UJ;  3,  1 ;  6,  6; 

6,5;  11,6,10;  82.2;  88,  11;  69,1. 
Of  place.    A.  258,  4;  G.  384;  H.  425. 4.4,13;  6,2;  6.  1:  11,4; 

86,  9;  66,  1.     (Without  prep.)  8,  10;  21,  6;  71,  8. 
Of  quality    (characteristic).    A.  251;  G.  402;  H.  419.  II. 2,2; 

29,3;  66.2;  67,4;  70,3,12. 
Of  separation.     A.  243.  c ;   G.  388 ;  H.  414. 6,  11 ;  6.  12 ;  9,  6.  7 : 

11.7;  80,  8.     (Without  prep.)     6,  4;  9,  12;  18,  1;  24,  2;  28,  6; 

88. 3;  89.3. 

Of  tperification.    A.  263 ;  G.  308 ;  H.  424. 88.  8 ;  48.  2 ;  66,  7. 

Of  time.    A.  266:  G.  392:  H.  429. 8,4,6,13;  4,2,4;  6,8;  10.7: 

88,3;  84,5;  41,4;  48,4;  67.7. 
With  contentus,  etc.    A.  254,  6,  2;  G.  373.  R.  1 ;  H.  421,  III. 

8.11;  67,5. 


72  GBAJVOIATICAL  INDEX. 

With  digrnus.    A.  245,  «,  1 ;  G.  398,  2 ;  H.  421.  III. 42,  G ;  48,  1; 

66,  6  ;  72,  11. 
Withtretns.    A.  254,  b,  2;  G.  373,  R.  1;   H.  425,  1,  n. 30,  5; 

33,4. 
With  utor,  etc.    A.  249;  G.  405;  H.  421,  I. 1,  1;  5,  6;  35,  9; 

52.6;  54,2;  57,10;  64.2;  67,8. 

Accusative. 

Adverbial    A.  240;  G.  331,  R.  3;  H.378,  2. 1,  3;  69,5;  76,2. 

Cognate.    A.  238,  b;  G.  331,  2;  H.  371,  II. 12,  1;  38,  2;  55,  5. 

Direct  object.    A.  237 ;  G.  327 ;  H.  371. 

In  exclamation.     A.  240,  d;    G.  MO;   H.  381. 21,  7;   31,  4; 

72,  5. 

0/  extent.    A.  256-7;  G.  335  fE;  H.  379. (Time)  2,  4;  14,  2. 

Of  limit.    A.  258;  G.  342,  410;  H.  380. 23.  8;   24,  10;  65,  7; 

75,2;  (Domum)  65,8. 
Subject  of  inf.    A.  173,  2;  G.  341;  H.  536. 2,  8. 13;  3,  8;  12,  9; 

20,3,4.7;  21,1;  27,5;  31,2;  39,9. 
Two  accusatives.    (Double  accusative.) 

Same  person  or  thing.    (Pred.  ace.)    A.239,  1;  G.  334;  H.  373. 

12.5;  13,9;  24,6;  32,2;  56,2,3. 

Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles. 
Agreement  icith  nouns.    A.  186-7;  G.  281  ff ;  H.  438-9. 

For  adverbs.    A.  191 ;  G.  324,  R.  6 ;  H.  443. 7,  10. 

Fornouns.    A.  188-9;  G.  195,  R.  1-4;  H.  441. 49,  6;  51.  10; 

52.11;  55,2;  58.1;  72,1. 

Adverbs.    A.  207;  G.  440  ;  H.  551  ff. 

Agreement.    See  Adjectives  and  Apposition, 

Of  relative  w.  antecedent.    A.  198  ff ;  G.  616  ff ;  H.  445  ff. 
Of  verb  w.  subject.    A.  204^ ;  G.  202.  281-3 ;  H.  460  ff . 

Alter  .  .  .  alter.    A.  203;  G.  321;  H.  459. 44,  4  ;  52,  4. 

Antecedent  in  rel.  clause.    A.  200;  G.  617-8. 39,11;  68.6;  71.10; 

72.3;  73,4. 

Antequam  and  priusquam.    A.  327 ;  G.  576-9;  H.  520. 36, 6 ;  58, 

1. 36,10;  46,4. 

Apposition.    A.  183-4;  G.  318-9;  H.  363. 1,  15;  10,  6;  39.  5;  46. 

3;  52,  3;  65,  7. 

Atque  (ac),  et.  que.    A.  156,  a ;  G.  477-9;  H.  554. 1.  2. 

Atque  (ac)  for  quam.    A.  234,  a,  n.  2;  G.  646;  H.  459,  2. 41, 10. 


GRA3IMATICAL  INDEX.  73 

Asyndeton.    A.  208,  b,  Wi.c;  G.  475,  483;  H.  &ki,  1. 1. 20,  7 ;  26, 

4;  27,7;  28,  .1;  30,7;  31,3;  67,7. 

Comparative. 

HVrAquam.    A. 347, a;  0.311;  H. 417, 1. 29.3;  44.2;  64,1;  68, 

7,9;  74.3. 
Without  quam.    See  Ablative. 

Conditional  Sentences. 

Prcs.  and  p<t»t  {nothiny  implied).    A.  306;  (Logical)  G.  5^ ;  (First 

form)  H.  508. 13,4;  20,0;  26,8;  61,7;  63,5;  64,8,9. 

Pres.  and  past  (contrary  implied).    A.  .'JOS ;  (Unreal)  G.  595) ;  ( Third 

form)  H.  510. 7,  12,  14;  8.  2,  5;  12,  1.  3;  25,  9;  40, 10;  62, 

13;  68.9;  72.9. 
Future  (more  vivid).    A.  307. 1.  a,  r;  (Lotjival)  G.597;  (First  form) 

H.508. 7.11;  9,9;  20,1;  54,4,6;  69,2. 

Future  (less  vivid).    A.:W7,  2;  ([deal)  G.  598;  (Second  form)  H. 

509. 8,  11;  9,8;  11,3;  21,  (J;  49,1;  62.14. 

In  indirect  discourse.    A.  337;  G.  059;  H.  527. 17,  1 ;  19,  6. 

Conjunctions.    A.  208;  G.  477  ff ;  H.  554-5.    See  Atque. 

Cum. 

Causal.    A.  326 ;  G.  587 ;  H.  617. 6,  2 ;  19,7;  28.  1 ;  32,  2. 

Concessive.    A.  313,  d;  G.  688;  H.  615,  III. 22,  3;  38.8;  46,  4; 

48,  2;  70. 1,  2. 
Temporal  (historical).    A.  326;  G.  686;  H.  521,  II. 16,  2;  23.  7; 

81,3;  32,1;  36,8;  66,7. 

Cum  (prep.)  enclitic.    A.  99.  e,  104,  c ;  G.  414,  R.  1 ;  H.  184,  6,  187,  2. 
4,  10;  6,3;  19,9;  28.9. 

Dative. 

0/ agent.    A.  232;  G.352;  H.  388. 7,5;  22.8;  32,4;  46,1. 

0/  indirect  object.    A.  225  ff ;  G.  343  ff ;  H.  3*4  flf. 

0/ possessor.    A.  231  ;  G.  349;  H.  387. 37,  10;  38,  7;  69,  2,  8. 

0/  reference.    A.  236;  G.  343.  R;  H.  384,  4.  x.  2. 6. 12;  18,  4; 

42,8. 

With  adjectives.    A.  234 ;  G.  356 ;  H.  391. 68,  6;  64.  3;  66,  8. 

With  compounds.    A.  228-9;  G.  346;    H.  386,  385,  II.  2. 6,9; 

9.9;  28.3;  42.  10. 
With  special  verbs.    A.  227;  G.  :W5;   H.  385. 1,  10;  3.3;  6,8; 

8,10;  14.4;  30,4;  36.5;  36,4;  42,7;  48,4;  62.4. 

D6b6o.  Past  tenses  of,  w.  pres.  inf.    A.  288,  a;  H.  537, 1. 1  13; 

8.2. 


74  GRAMMATICAL   INDEX. 

Dum  w.  indie.    A  276,  3 ;  G.  572 ;  H.  467,  4. 59, 1. 

Dum  modo  w.  subj.    A.   314;  G.  575;  H.  513,1. 5,  4;  9,  4,  7; 

24,  6;  60, 1. 

Et  repeated  or  omitted.    A.  208,  &,  1;  G.  483,  2;  H.  554,  I.  6. 27,  7; 

30,7;  39,  7. 

Fore   ut  w.  subj.  for  fut.  inf.    A.  288  f ;  G.  240,  531;  H,  537,  3. 

19,6;  20,  8;  44,5;  77,1. 

Genitive. 

Objective.    A.  217;  G.  361,  2;  H.  395,111. 52,5;  58,4;  67,5; 

69,7;  71,11. 

Of  charge  and  penalty.    A.  220;  G.  377 ;  H.  409,  II. 2,  9 ;  17,1. 

Partitive,    A.  216;  G.  366  ft;  H.  397. 2,  1;  4,  12,  14;  29,  1;  43, 

10;  53,9;  55,  1. 
Possessive.    A.  214, 1 ;  G.  360 ;  H.  .396, 1. 
Predicate.    A.  214,  c;  G.  365;  H.  401-2. {Of  possession)  27,  9; 

69,  7.     {Of'quality)  26,  7;  27,  1;  47,  4;  51,  4;  52,  12;  74,  1. 

{Of  price)  9,  4;  24,  6,  7;  68,  8. 
With  adjectives.    A.   218;  G.  373;  H.  399. 1,  9;  2,  14;  35,  7; 

38,  2;  57,8;  65,  7;  72,8. 
With  some  verbs.    A.  219  if ;   G.  375  ff;   H.  406  ff. (Interest) 

53,  2;  (Paenitet)  58,  2  ;  (Obliviscor)  3,  2;  49,  2,  3. 

Gerund  and  Gerundive. 

Gen.    A.  298;  G.  429;    H.  542,  I,  543  ff. 24,  1;  63,  2;    64,  2; 

65,2. 3,  10;  8,3;  39,8. 

Ace.    A.  300;  G.  431,  433;  H.  542,  III,  543  ff. 41,  10;  51,  1;  54, 

12;  {w.  prep.)  50,  11;  55,  1,  2,  3;  56,  4;  60,  2,  3;  68,  8. 
AM.    A.  301;  G.434;  H.  542,  IV,  543  ff. 12,  8;  51,  8. 22,  1; 

27,2;  46.5;  54,2;  73,6. 

Hendiadys.    A.  385;  G.695;  H.  636,  III,  2. 4,  3;  16,4;  22,2;  75,2. 

Hie.    A.  102,  a,  /;  G.  290;  H.  450. 2,  15;  4,  8;  13,  2,  10;  17,  1; 

37,  10. 

Ille.    A.  102,  b;  G.  292;  H.  450. 6,  12;  9,  11;  14,  3;  15,  2;  23.  8; 

37,8;  41,6;  45,10;  65,9;  73,3. 

Imperative.    A.  269;  G.  259  ff;  H.  487. 4,  2;  5,  3;  8,  9;  9,7;  13, 

1;  15,2;  27,9.    See  Subjunctive  (hortatory)  and  Prohibitions. 

Imperfect  indicative  of  attempted  action  (conative).    A.  277;   G, 
222;  H.  469.  II. 40,  7;  46,  2;  62,  2. 


GRAJkTMATICAL   INDEX.  75 

Impersonal  verbs.    A.  HS-O;  G.  199.2;  H.298fif. 3. 3;  4,  8;  36,4; 

39. -.',<.);  45,  S;  65,3;  68,4. 

Impersonal  uses ;  pass,  of  intrans.  verbs.    A.  146,  d;  G.  199, 1 ;  H.  301. 
40,10;  46,3.4,5. 

Indirect  discourse  (OratiO  obliqua).    A.330ff;  G.651ff;  H.S22flf. 

8.5.10,12;  6,11;  32,2;  40,  1;  41,7;  42,4;  71,4. 

Informal.    A.  »41 ;  G.  (»1.  R.  1 ;  H.  528,  1. 37,  (•;  47,  4 ;  75,  3. 

Subordinate  clauses  in.    17,  1;  36,  2,  3;  40,  1:  77,  1. 
See  Ck>ndltional  sentences. 

Infinitive. 

As  object.    A.  :m,  B ;  G.  527;  H.  535.    See  Indirect  Discourse. 
As  subject.    A.  270;  G.  423;  H.  538. 3,  3.  7;  4,  8;  12,  2;  46,  8; 

61,4;  66,  1;  65,3. 
Complementanj.    A.  271 ;  G.  424;  H.  523-4. 2,  14, 17 ;  6, 10 ;  7. 2, 

9;  11,3;  30,  r.;  40,3;  60,1. 
Subject  of.    See  Accusative. 
Tenses  of,    A.  288 ;  G.  273  ff,  530;  H.  537. 

Ipse.    A.  195, /•-/:  G.2«i7-8;  H.  452. 2,9;  4,11;  8.1;  16,2;  18,2; 

20.7;  21.3;  25,2;  40,5;  73,3;  77.3. 

Iste.    A.  102,  c;  G.291;  H.450. 1,  11;  3,2;  8.9;  10,1. 

lam.  iamdadum.  etc.  tc.  pres.    A.  276,  a;  G.  221;  H.467,  III,  2. 

1.  13,  UJ;  2,  4;  6.  1,  12,  13;  8,  12;  23,  6;  31,  1. 

Locative.    A.258.4:  G.412;  H.425ff. 84,  8;  66,  3;  66,6.    (DomI) 

8,3;  23,  10.     (UumI)  10,4. 

K6  .  .  .  quidem.    A. 345,  6;  G. 681;  H.  569,  III.  2. 14,  4;  17,  1; 

27,5;  33,  2;  63,10. 

NfisciO  quis,  etc.  w.  indie.    A.  334,  c;  G.  469,  R.  2;  H.  529,  5,  3.-^ 
17.3. 

Nominative. 

Predicate.    A.   176.  185;    G.  197;  H.  362. 4.  6;  10,  9;  11,  4  r 

24,5;  40,9;  62,2. 
Subject.    A.  173.  a ;  G.  194 ;  H.  368. 

NostrQm  and  vestrQm  used  partitively.   A.  194,  6;  G.  362,  R ;  H.  466^ 
N.  3. 1,7,12;  31,2;  54,10;  66.2. 

Participles.    A.  289  (T:  G.  667  ff:  H.  r^H  ff.    Sec  Adjectives. 
Denoting  cause.    (Abl.  abs.)  6.  13;  12,  10;  30,  4;  39,  11. 


76  GRAMMATICAL   INDEX. 

.  Denoting  circumstance.    54,  3.     (Abl.  abs.)    5,   7;    14,   1;    32,  3; 

49,2;  63,6. 
Denoting  concession.    2,  18. 

Denoting  condition.    56,  3;  70,  5;  77,  2.     (Abl.  abs.)  45,  9;  73,  8. 
Denoting  manner.    70,  5. 
Denoting  time.     8,  12;  46,  5;  68,  11;  (Abl.  abs.)   26,  1;  40,  11; 

42,5;  43,4;  54,7. 
For  coordinate  verb.    36,  2. 
For  relative.    8,  9;  10,  3;  34,  5;  36,  2. 

Periphrastic  conjugation,  First.    A.  113,  6,  n.,  129;  G.  239;  H.  233, 
466,  N. 25,  10;  46,  2;  74,  1. 

Periphrastic  conjugation.  Second.    A.  113,  d.  n.;  G.  243;  H.  234. 
16,2;  20,6;  22,5,8;  29,6;  32,4;  60,5. 

Personal  construction  instead  of  impersonal.    A.  330,6;  G.  528  ; 
H.534,  1.  N.  1. 16,2;  17,2;  24,3;  47,4;  70,  1,3. 

Prepositions.    A.  152  flf;  G.  417-9;  H.  432  fp. 

Priusquam.    See  Antequam. 

Prohibitions.    A.  269,  a;  G.  256,  2;  H.  484,  4. 13,  3;  27,  4;  74,  4. 

Pronouns.    See  Agreement. 

Demonstrative.    See  Hie,  Ille,  Ipse,  Iste. 

Indefinite.    A.  202;   G.  300  fe;    H.  189  if. (Quis)  19,  1;   21,  2; 

29,  9;   52,  10;    72,  10.     (Aliquis)  38,  2;  63,1;  65,6.     (Ullus) 

21,9.     (Nullus)  7,  13;  21,10;  22,  7;  58,  14.     (Quidam)  51,5; 

63,9;  75,3.    (Quispiara)  69.5.    (Quisquam)  14,  3;  38,6.    (Quis- 

que)  13,  6;  32.  1;  38,  13;  54,  10. 
Reflexive.    See  Sui  and  Suus. 

Purpose  clauses.    A.  317  ff ;  G.  543  ff;  H.  497  ff. 

Pure  purpose  w.  ut  orne.    2,  3  ;  5,  12;  29,  5;  33, 1;  34,  7;  38, 13; 

45,6;  60,2. 
Relative.    4,  13;  46,  2.     (Quo  w.  comp.)  39, 12;  47,  1. 
Substantive.     5,  14;  8.4;  9,  6;  35,  1;  38,  14;  39,  2;  50,  10. 

NS  and  ut  w.  verbs  of  fearing.    2,  12,  13;  12,  4;  24,  9;  54, 13; 

61,4. 

Questions,  double.    A.  211;  G.  460-1;  H.  353. 23,  3,  4;  54,9; 

62,3. 

Questions,  indirect.    A.  210,  2,  334;  G.  462  ff ;  H.  529,  I. 1,  6,  7 ; 

4,2,  10,  14;  13,6;  34,6. 


GRAMM^VTICAL   INDEX.  77 

Questions  w.  -ne,  nOnne,  and  num.    A.  210,  (i,c\  G.  45C-8;  H.  ^^ji, 

1,  'J. 1.  2;  3,5,  11,  12;  4,10;  6,7;  10.2;  27,(5; 6,5;  26. 

1;  42.4. 2,  15;  8,7,  10;  4,5,9;  23,9;  26,  (J;  34,8. 

Qtdn.    iSee  Result  clauses. 

Quisque  w.  superlative.    A.  03,  c;  G.  305;  H.  458, 1. 73,  1. 

Qu5.    Seo  Purpose  clauses. 

Quod,  quia,  quonlam.    A.  321 ;  G.  530  ft;  II.  510,  I.  II. 
With  indicative.    22,  5;  47,  1;  67,  1,  8,  0. 

With  gubjunctivc.     4,  12;    8,  8;  17,  1;  18,  0,  10;  31,  1;   39,  4, 
8,10;  76,3. 

Relative  clauses. 

0/ cause  or  reason.    A.  320,  c;  G.G3G;  H.  517. 8,8;  9,  10;  39, 

12;  48,1;  72,5.6,7. 
0/ characteristic.    A.  320;  G.634;  H.  503, 1. 3. 1,8;  4,  7;  6.  1.2; 

XO,  G;   12,  Ti;  22,  7;  23, 1.     (After  ttnus  and  sOlus)  42,  0;  65, 

4,  6,  6.    (After  dignus)  66,  3. 
0/  concession  and  proviso.    A.  320,  d,e;  G.  637;  H.  515,  III. 

66.2;  62,1,2. 
Be/ore  antecedent.    A.  ^45,  <>;  G.614;  H.  572,  II,  n. 8,  12  ;  39, 

11;  68,0;  71,10;  72,3;  73,4. 
See  Purpose  clauses  and  Result  clauses. 

Resiilt  clauses.    A.  310,  332 ;  G.  553  ff ;  H.  600  ff. 

Pure  result  tc.  ut  and  ut  nOn.     1.  17 ;  9,  5 ;  23,  2 ;  30,  2,  3  ;  70,  2; 

71,3. 
Relative.    2,  14 ;  12,  11 ;  60,  4 ;  56,  7 ;  70,  8. 
Substantive.    10,  8;  49,  4,  8. 
IKjfAquIn.    83,4. 

Sequence  of  tenses.    A.  285-7 ;  G.  510  flf ;  H.  491  flf. 

Singrull.     A.  96.  a)  Q.  310  ;  H.  172,  3. 64,  10. 

Subject.    See  Nominative  and  Accusative. 

Ttco  subjects  of  same  verb.    A.  205;  G.  281;  H.  463. 28,  5;  87, 

5;  46.3;  47,3. 

Subjunctive. 

By  attraction.    A.  342;  G.  G6C;  11.629. 11. 19,  3.8;  81,  3;  64.  8; 

68,8;  76,3;  77,1. 

Conceuive.    A.  313.  i ;  G.  257 ;  H.  484.  III. 68,  6,  6 ;  62.  4 ;  76. 4. 

Deliberative,    A.  268 ;  G.  468 ;  H.  4*1,  V. 70.  0. 


78  GRAMMATICAL   INDEX. 

Hortatory.    A.  26G;  G.  256;  H.  484,  II. 2,  1;  13,  2,  5,  G;  27,  3; 

39,  G;  52,  9,  10, 11.    See  Prohibitions. 
Optative.    A.  267;  G.  253-4;  H.  483. 9,  1,  2,  3;   13,  10;   19,  8; 

28,9. 
Potential.    A.  311,  I,  II;  G.  250;  H.  485-6. 9,  10;  31,  3;  44,  2; 

49,6,7,8;  56.9;  60,2;  76,1. 
Tenses  of.    A.  2G6  £f,  283,  308;  G.  271 ;  H.  478  ff. 
See  Cum,  Dum  modo,  Indirect  discourse,  Indirect  questions, 

Priusquam,  Purpose   clauses,   Quod,  Relative    clauses, 

Result  clauses. 

Sui  and  Suus.    A.  196;  G.  294-5;  H.  448-9. 1,  18;  2,  9;  3.  10;  8 

2;  23,  10;  38,  10,12;  47,4. 

Superlative  w.  quam.    A.  93,  b ;  G.  317;  H.  444,  3.  —  5,  3. 

Supine  in  urn.    A.  302;  G.  436;  H.  546. 15,  2. 

Supine  in  u.    A.  303;  G.  437 ;  H.  547.  —  12,  2. 

Utrum  .  .  .  an.    See  Double  questions. 

Vestrum.     See  Nostrum. 


^TJi 


\nnounceme^%i* 

THE  STUDENTS'  SERIES  OP  LATIN  CLASSICS. 

UXOBR  THB  KDITORIAL  SUPBHTISIOM  Or 

ERNEST  MONDFXL  PEASE,  A.M., 
Leland  Stanford  Junior  fnireraity, 

AND 

HARRY  THURSTON  PECK,  Ph.D.,  L.HJ)., 
Columbia  College. 


This  Series  will  contain  those  portions  of  the  Latin 
authors  that  are  usually  read  in  American  schools  and 
colleges;  and  to  meet  the  growing  demand  for  more 
liberal  courses  such  other  portions  will  be  included  as 
are  well  fitted  for  classroom  use,  but  which  have  hitherto 
lacked  suitable  editions.  In  order  to  furnish  permanent 
editions  of  uniform  merit  the  work  is  distributed  among 
a  large  number  df  special  editors,  and  the  several  editions 
will  be  based  for  the  most  part  upon  approved  German 
editions. 

While  thus  profiting  by  the  valuable  results  of  German 
scholarship,  which  give  the  assurance  of  marked  excel- 
lence to  the  Series,  each  editor  will  nevertheless  verify 
all  the  statements  of  the  original,  and  add  to  and  alter 
them  as  much  as  may  be  necessary  to  adapt  his  work  to 
the  needs  of  American  students. 

The  text  will  be  carefully  revised,  and  will  be  followed 
in  a  separate  part  of  the  l)ook  by  a  full  commentary  and 
index. 

The  Series  will  also  contain  elementary  and  supple- 
mentary works  prepared  by  competent  scholars.  Every 
effort  will  he  made  to  give  the  books  a  neat  and  attrac- 
tive appearance. 


The  following  voluBies  are  now  ready  or  in  preparation : 

CATULLUS,  Selections,  based  upon  the  edition  of  Kiese.  By  Thomas 
B.  Lindsay,  Ph.D.,  Professor  in  Boston  University. 

CICERO,  Tusculan  Disputations,  Books  I  and  n.  By  Professor 
Peck.  Nearhj  Ready. 

CICERO,  De  Oratore,  Book  I,  based  upon  the  edition  of  Sorof.  By 
W.  B.  Owen,  Ph.D.,  Professor  in  Lafayette  College. 

CICERO,  Select  Letters,  based  in  part  upon  the  edition  of  Siipfle- 
Buckel.     By  Professor  Pease. 

GELLIUS,  Selections.    By  Professor  Peck. 

HORACE,  Odes  and  Epodes.  By  Paul  Shorey,  Ph  D.,  Professor  in 
the  Chicago  University.  Nearly  Ready, 

HORACE,  Satires  and  Epistles,  based  upon  the  edition  of  Kiessling. 
By  James  H.  Kirkland,  Ph.D.,  Professor  in  Vanderbilt  Uni- 
versity. Ready. 

JUVENAL,  based  upon  the  edition  of  Weidner.  By  Henry  Clark 
Johnson,  A.M.,  LL.B.,  President  of  the  Central  High  School, 
Philadelphia. 

LIVY,  Books  XXI  and  XXII,  based  upon  the  edition  of  Wulfflin.  By 
John  K.  Lord,  Ph.D.,  Professor  in  Dartmouth  College.        Ready. 

LUCRETIUS,  De  Rerum  Natura,  Book  III.  By  W,  A.  Merrill,  Ph.D., 
Professor  in  the  Indiana  University. 

OVID,  Selections  from  the  Metamorphoses,  based  upon  the  edition  of 
Meuser-Egeu.  By  B.  L.  Wiggins,  A.M.,  Professor  in  the  University 
of  the  South.  Nearly  Ready. 

PETRONIUS,  Cena  TrimaJchionis,  based  upon  the  edition  of  Biicheler. 
By  W.  E.  Waters,  Ph.D.,  Professor  in  the  University  of  Cincinnati. 

PLAUTUS,  Menaechmi,  based  upon  the  edition  of  Brix.  By  Harold 
N.  Fowler,  Ph.D.,  Professor  in  the  Western  Reserve  University. 

Ready. 

QUINTILIAN,  Book  X  and  selections  from  Book  XII,  based  upon  the 
edition  of  Kruger.  By  Carl  W.  Belser,  Ph.D.,  Professor  in  the 
University  of  Colorado. 

SALLUST,  Catiline,  based  upon  the  edition  of  Schmalz.  By  Charles 
G.  Herbermann,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  Professor  in  the  College  of  the 
City  of  New  York.  Ready. 


;3Ct^ 


SENECA.  Select  Lettew.    By  E.  C.  Winsi.ow,  A.M. 

J  ^^^^  i^JTACITUS,  Annals.  Book  I  and  selections  from  Book  II.  b.ised  uix)u 
the  iMlitlon  of  Xipiwjnky-Antlresen.  By  E.  M.  Hyde,  Ph.D.,  Pro- 
fessor in  Lehigh  University. 

TACITUS,  Oermania  and  Agricola,  basetl  ui>on  the  cilitions  of  Schwei- 
zer-Sidler  and  Drager.  By  A.  G.  Hopkins,  Ph.l>.,  Professor  in 
Hamilton  College.  livady. 

TACITUS,  Histories,  Book  I  and  selections  from  Books  II-V,  based 
ui»oii  th«'  «'<liti()n  of  WoHT.     \\\  Kdwaiiu  II.  Spiekkk,  Ph.D.,  Pro- 
■""  fcssor  in  till*  Johns  Hopkins  University. 

TEBENCE,  Phormio,  based  \\\\o\\  the  edition  of  Dziatzko.  By  Herbert 
C.  Elmeu,  Ph.D.,  A.ssistant  Professor  in  the  Cornell  University. 

TIBULLUS  AND  PKOPESTIUS,  Selections,  based  upon  the  edition  of 
J:u-.)by.     Py  IIknkv  F.  BruTox,  .\.M.,  Professor  in  the  University 

of  Koi-hosttr. 

VELLEIUS  PATEKCULUS,  Historia  Romana,  Book  H.  Uy  F.  E.  Rock- 
wi»on,  A.M..  Prf)f»ss(jr  in  Bncknell  University.  Ready. 

LATIN  COMPOSITION  FOR  COLLEGE  USE.  By  Walter  Miller, 
.A.M.,  Profes.sor  in  the  Leland  Stanford  Jr.  University.  Ready. 

HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  SYNONYMS.    By  Mr.  Miller. 

A  FIRST  BOOK  IN  LATIN.  By  Hiram  Tuell,  A.M.,  Principal  of 
the  Milton  Hish  School,  Mass.,  and  Harold  N.  Fowler,  Ph.D., 
Western  Reserve  University  Ready. 

EXERCISES  IN  LATIN  COMPOSITION.  FOR  SCHOOLS.  By  M.  Grant 
Damki.i..  A.m..  Piiiu'ipal  of  ('haunt  y-IIall  School,  Boston.      Ready. 

THE  PRIVATE  LIFE  OF  THE  ROMANS,  a  manual  K^r  the  use  of 

schools  and  eolle>:t's.     By  Uahim'  '  \v'  *  t  i-i w  ]'i.i..iT<iv  mh.I  Ix)UISE 

Dodge.  Ready. 

ATLAS  ANTIQUUS.   Twelve  maiKS  oi  tin-  ancuiu  woiki.  lor  seiundsand 

eollej;es.    By  Dr.  Henry  Kiepert,  M.  R.  Acad.,  Berlin.        Ready. 

Tentative  arrangements  have  been  made  for  other  books  not  ready 
to  ho  announced. 

LEACH,   SHEWELL,  &   SANBORN, 

Boston,  New  Tork,  and  Chicago. 


^  AV'/'^a^ 


^w 


Tt/^ 


^. 


'«/< 


f 


^(ftVAv 


JdiXc-^ 


Bl 


^ 


n 


I 


r^  ^'.^^  ^^^  ^ 


4  (X-  ^^^ 


gi.- 


u) 


v_- 


^ 


^ 


7 


I    L 


i  D   OdiL  1 1 


Jm^^^ 


u    ^ 


in 


V 


'>4Ji)64 


H- 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CAUFORNIA  LIBRARY 


^ywu 


M 


'C>-*s«r 


^ 


